CVPD50
50-INCH HIGH-DEFINITION
PLASMA DISPLAY
CVR700
HIGH-PERFORMANCE
AUDIO/VIDEO RECEIVER/VIDEO
PROCESSOR/OPTICAL DISC
CHANGER
®
OWNER’S GUIDE
JBL CINEMA VISION™ SYSTEM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
92
92
92
93
93
93
94
94
95
95
95
96
98
Programming Product Codes
Direct Code Entry
Auto Search Method
Learning Codes
Erasing Learned Codes
Macros
Programmed Device Functions
Volume Punch-Through
Channel Control Punch-Through
Transport Control Punch-Through
Resetting the Remote Memory
CVR700R1 Remote Function List Table
CVR700R1 Remote Setup Code Tables
109 Troubleshooting Guide
110 System Reset
111 Technical Specifications
113 Index
See trademark acknowledgements on page 114.
Typographical Conventions
In order to help you use this manual with the remote controls, front-panel controls and
rear-panel connections, certain conventions have been used.
EXAMPLE – (bold type) indicates a specific remote control or front-panel button or
indicator, or rear-panel connection jack
CAUTION: To reduce the risk of electric shock,
do not remove cover (or back).
No user-serviceable parts inside.
EXAMPLE– (OCR type) indicates a message that is visible on the front-panel
information display or screen
Refer servicing to qualified service personnel.
CAUTION: To prevent electric shock,
do not use this (polarized) plug with
an extension cord, receptacle or other outlet
unless the blades can be fully inserted to
prevent blade exposure.
EXAMPLE – (Synchro type) indicates a message that is visible on the CVR700R2
remote’s LCD display
1– (number in a square) indicates a specific front-panel control
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol,
within an equilateral triangle, is intended to
alert the user to the presence of uninsulated
“dangerous voltage” within the product’s
a– (number in an oval) indicates a button or indicator on the CVR700R2 remote
control
enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute
a risk of electric shock to persons.
¡ – (number in a circle) indicates a rear-panel connection
The exclamation point within an equilateral
triangle is intended to alert the user to the
presence of important operating and
A– (letter in a square) indicates an indicator in the front-panel information display
1
– (number in a triangle) indicates a button or an indicator on the CVR700R1 remote
maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the appliance.
control
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
read first!Important Safety Precautions!
1. Read these instructions.
2. Keep these instructions.
3. Heed all warnings.
intended to operate from battery power,
or other sources, refer to the operating
instructions.
21. The apparatus shall not be exposed
to dripping or splashing, and no objects
filled with liquids, such as vases, shall be
placed on the apparatus.
17. If an outside antenna or cable system
is connected to the product, be sure the
antenna or cable system is grounded so
as to provide some protection against
voltage surges and built-up static
charges. Article 810 of the National
Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides
information with regard to proper ground-
ing of the mast and supporting structure,
grounding of the lead-in wire to an
antenna discharge unit, size of grounding
conductors, location of antenna-dis-
charge unit, connection to grounding
electrodes, and requirements for the
grounding electrode. See Figure A.
4. Follow all instructions.
22. Do not attempt to service this product
yourself, as opening or removing covers
may expose you to dangerous voltage or
other hazards. Refer all servicing to quali-
fied service personnel.
5. Do not use this apparatus near water.
6. Clean only with a dry cloth.
7. Do not block any ventilation openings.
Install in accordance with the manufac-
turer’s instructions.
23. When replacement parts are
required, be sure the service technician
has used replacement parts specified by
the manufacturer or that have the same
characteristics as the original part.
Unauthorized substitutions may result in
fire, electric shock or other hazards.
8. Do not install near any heat sources
such as radiators, heat registers, stoves
or other apparatus (including amplifiers)
that produce heat.
9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of
the polarized or grounding-type plug.
A polarized plug has two blades with one
wider than the other. A grounding-type
plug has two blades and a third ground-
ing prong. The wide blade or the third
prong are provided for your safety. If the
provided plug does not fit into your out-
let, consult an electrician for replacement
of the obsolete outlet.
24. Upon completion of any service or
repairs to this product, ask the service
technician to perform safety checks to
determine that the product is in proper
operating condition.
18. An outside antenna system should
not be located in the vicinity of overhead
power lines or other electric light or
power circuits, or where it can fall into
such power lines or circuits. When
installing an outside antenna system,
extreme care should be taken to keep
from touching such power lines or circuits,
as contact with them might be fatal.
25. The product should be mounted to a
wall or ceiling only as recommended by
the manufacturer.
10. Protect the power cord from being
walked on or pinched, particularly at
plugs, convenience receptacles and the
point where they exit from the apparatus.
19. Do not overload wall outlets, exten-
sion cords, or integral convenience recep-
tacles, as this can result in a risk of fire
or electric shock.
11. Only use attachments/accessories
specified by the manufacturer.
20. Never push objects of any kind into
this product through openings, as they
may touch dangerous voltage points or
short-out parts that could result in a fire
or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any
kind on the product.
12. Use only with the cart,
stand, tripod, bracket or
table specified by the manu-
facturer or sold with the
apparatus. When a cart is used,
use caution when moving the cart/appa-
ratus combination to avoid injury from
tip-over.
13. Unplug this apparatus during light-
ning storms or when unused for long
periods of time.
Figure A.
Example of Antenna Grounding as per
National ElectricalCode ANSI/NFPA 70
14. Refer all servicing to qualified serv-
ice personnel. Servicing is required when
the apparatus has been damaged in any
way, such as power-supply cord or plug
is damaged, liquid has been spilled or
objects have fallen into the apparatus,
the apparatus has been exposed to rain
or moisture, does not operate normally,
or has been dropped.
Antenna Lead-In Wire
Ground Clamp
Antenna Discharge Unit (NEC Section 810-20)
Grounding Conductors (NEC Section 810-21)
Electric Service Equipment
Ground Clamps
15. Do not use attachments not recom-
mended by the product manufacturer, as
they may cause hazards.
Power Service Grounding Electrode System
(NEC Art. 250, Part H)
16. This product should be operated only
from the type of power source indicated
on the marking label. If you are not sure
of the type of power supply to your
home, consult your product dealer or
local power company. For products
Part No. HCGUL1492/6500 04/2004 EN
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INTRODUCTION
®
Thank you for choosing JBL . The JBL
but purists may manually set the proces-
sor to display 4:3 video images without
scaling or adjustment. The CVPD50 offers
stunning picture quality, even under nor-
mal lighting conditions, thanks to its
audio/video source inputs for two record-
ing devices, a cable television/satellite
receiver/HDTV tuner, a personal computer
and an auxiliary device. A sixth source
may be connected to the front-panel
jacks, which include not only analog
audio and video inputs, but S-video, com-
ponent video and optical and coaxial digi-
tal audio inputs. A front-panel optical dig-
ital audio output enables recording with
compatible portable devices. Dedicated
rear-panel digital audio inputs (4 optical
and 4 coaxial) are pre-assigned to the
sources, and 2 outputs (1 optical and 1
coaxial) are also provided. An HDCP
(high-definition copy-protected) DVI video
input may be used with a DVI-enabled
HDTV tuner, a satellite or cable set-top
box, or a DVD player, or with a personal
computer featuring a DVI or Analog VGA
video output. A composite video input
may be used with the PIP (picture-in-pic-
ture) function for simultaneous viewing of
two video sources using either a tradi-
tional small screen inset or a split screen.
™
Cinema Vision home theater system is
truly an entertainment system for the
21st century. JBL Cinema Vision is a com-
plete, integrated audio/video system that
combines the sophisticated performance
of separate components with the conven-
ience of a turnkey solution. The system
includes a 50-inch high-definition plasma
display monitor and an audio/video sys-
tem controller that contains a 5-disc
DVD-Audio/DVD-Video/CD changer, high-
performance A/V receiver and a video
processor. The multichannel loudspeaker
system is designed to acoustically, elec-
trically and visually complement the JBL
Cinema Vision source and video compo-
nents. Satellites and the center feature
common voicing, dual-neodymium-driver
satellites, and a 1-inch titanium-laminate
tweeter. The subwoofer features a 400-
watt RMS power amplifier and a 12-inch
cast-basket woofer.
2
3,000:1 contrast ratio and 1,000cd/m
brightness rating. The digital video
processor on board the CVR700 outputs
a digital video signal via a single, propri-
etary connection to the CVPD50 display.
(The CVPD50 display requires the CVR700
control center for operation.)
CVR700 7 x 100 Watts System
Control Center
The CVR700 is a unique multifeatured
component, combining audio and video
source selection and processing with a
five-disc magazine changer capable of
playing DVD-Audio, DVD-Video, CD, CD-
R/RW, DVD+R/RW, DVD-R/RW, MP3,
®
WMA, Kodak Picture CD, VCD and JPEG
discs. Video playback using the internal
DVD changer is of the highest quality,
benefiting from pixel-by-pixel processing
and digital output to the plasma display.
The CVR700 is capable of reconstructing
the 3/2 pulldown effect introduced when
film-based programs are transferred to
video. In conjunction with precision video
output DACs, the result is a full 60-frame-
per-second image that is the closest thing
to film this side of your local cinema.
This manual describes the CVR700 con-
trol center, and the CVPD50 50-inch high-
definition plasma display. Together with
the CVSAT50, CVCEN50 and CVSUB50
loudspeakers, the JBL Cinema Vision sys-
tem delivers a complete home theater
experience, including high-quality play-
back of most optical discs.
A universal remote control operates all
devices, and may be programmed to
operate other components in your sys-
tem, such as a VCR, personal video
recorder (PVR), or other devices. The main
remote control is easy to program using
its two-line LCD text display. A second,
simplified remote is also included.
The CVPD50 and CVR700 have been engi-
neered so that it is easy to take advan-
tage of all of the power of their digital
technology. However, to obtain the maxi-
mum enjoyment from your new home the-
ater system, we urge you to read this
manual. A few minutes spent learning
the functions of the various controls will
enable you to take advantage of all the
power these components are able to
deliver.
The audio section includes all of the lat-
est surround sound processing formats,
including Dolby* Digital, Dolby Pro Logic*
Simple to Install and Use
The JBL Cinema Vision system is
®
®
IIx, Dolby Headphone, DTS , DTS-ES ,
designed for easy installation and simple
operation. Its sophisticated processing
capabilities operate automatically, trans-
parent to the user. The JBL On Screen
®
®
DTS Neo:6 , DTS 96/24 and Logic 7 .
High-efficiency digital amplifiers are
designed to match the characteristics of
the JBL Cinema Vision speakers, preserv-
ing signal quality and delivering the
power and fidelity you expect from JBL.
™
Library display of loaded discs simplifies
navigation and selection of desired pro-
gram material. With state-of-the-art
audio and video components, the JBL
Cinema Vision home theater system is
the perfect combination of the latest digi-
tal audio and video technologies in an
elegant, easy-to-use package.
If you have any questions about these
products, their installation or operation,
please contact your retailer or custom
installer, as they are your best local
sources of information.
In addition to providing a wide array
of listening and viewing options, the
CVR700 is easy to configure so that it
provides the best results for your specific
listening environment and viewing prefer-
ences. On-screen menus make it simple
to customize system settings, on-screen
status banners streamline user interac-
tion, and the EzSet remote automatically
measures and calibrates sound levels
for a perfectly balanced sound field
presentation.
I 50" True high-definition plasma display
with ultrawide viewing angle
CVPD50 50-Inch High-Definition
Plasma Display Monitor
2
I 3,000:1 contrast ratio and 1,000cd/m
The CVPD50 is a state-of-the-art, true
high-definition plasma display that may
be used to display HDTV cable or satellite
television signals, as well as movies
played using the CVR700’s internal DVD
changer, or it may be used with a person-
al computer, as well as other external
devices such as video gaming consoles
and recording devices. The sophisticated
processor automatically configures 4:3
video sources for full-screen 16:9 display,
brightness
I 7 x 100W digital control center with
an audio/video receiver, video proces-
sor and DVD changer
Although the CVR700 is designed to be
used with the internal DVD changer and
CVPD50 display, it also includes a full
complement of inputs and outputs that
are normally found only on standalone
audio/video receivers. It includes
I A wide range of digital and matrix sur-
round modes, including Dolby Digital,
Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Pro Logic II
and IIx, DTS, DTS-ES Discrete and
Matrix, DTS 96/24, DTS Neo:6, Logic 7
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(5.1 and 7.1, Cinema and Music
modes)
I Seven channels of amplification
I Internal five-disc changer plays DVD-
Audio, DVD-Video, CD, VCD, CD-
R/RW, DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW, MP3,
®
WMA, Kodak Picture CD and JPEG
discs
I Extensive bass management options,
including quadruple crossover and
EzSet output-level calibration
I Six A/V inputs with composite video
and S-video, three HDTV-compatible
component (Y/Pr/Pb) inputs, one DVI
input
I Ten digital audio inputs, including
front-panel optical and coaxial inputs
I Front-panel component video inputs, in
addition to conventional audio/video
and S-video inputs
I Picture-in-picture capability for simul-
taneous viewing of two video sources
I Accommodates 4:3 aspect ratio pro-
grams, with intelligent options for fit-
ting to 16:9 full-screen display
I Universal programmable learning
remote with LCD text display
I Secondary remote for everyday use
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SAFETY INFORMATION
Verify Line Voltage Before Use
Your CVR700 and CVPD50 have been
designed for use with 120-volt AC cur-
rent, and the plugs are specifically
designed for 120-volt applications.
Connection to a line voltage other than
that for which the unit is intended can
create a safety and fire hazard and may
damage the unit.
Installation Location
Unpacking
I To ensure proper operation, and to
avoid the potential for safety hazards,
place the unit on a firm and level sur-
face. When placing the unit on a shelf,
be certain that the shelf and any
mounting hardware can support the
weight of the product.
Cartons and shipping materials used to
protect your new system components
during shipment are specially designed to
cushion them from shock and vibration.
We suggest that you save the carton and
packing materials for use in shipping if
you move, or should the unit ever need
repair.
I Make certain that proper space is pro-
vided both above and below the unit
for ventilation. If this product will be
installed in a cabinet or other
enclosed area, make certain that there
is sufficient air movement within the
cabinet.
If you have any questions about the volt-
age requirements for your specific model,
or about the line voltage in your area,
contact your selling dealer before plug-
ging the unit into a wall outlet.
To minimize the size of the cartons in
storage, you may wish to flatten them.
This is done by carefully slitting the tape
seams on the bottom, and collapsing the
carton down to a more two-dimensional
appearance. Other cardboard inserts may
be stored in the same manner. Packing
materials that cannot be collapsed should
be saved along with the carton in a
plastic bag.
Do Not Use Extension Cords
I Do not place the unit directly on a
carpeted surface.
We do not recommend that extension
cords be used with this product. As with
all electrical devices, do not run power
cords under rugs or carpets or place
heavy objects on them. Damaged power
cords should be replaced immediately by
an authorized service center with cords
meeting factory specifications.
I Avoid moist or humid locations.
I Avoid installation in extremely hot or
cold locations, or an area that is
exposed to direct sunlight or heating
equipment.
If you do not wish to save the packaging
materials, please note that the carton
and other sections of the shipping protec-
tion are recyclable. Please respect the
environment and discard those materials
at a local recycling center.
I Do not obstruct the ventilation slots
on the sides of the unit, or place
objects directly over them.
Handle the AC Power Cord Gently
When disconnecting the power cord from
an AC outlet, always pull the plug; never
pull the cord. If you do not intend to use
the unit for any considerable length of
time, disconnect the plug from the AC
outlet.
Cleaning
When the unit gets dirty, wipe it with a
clean, soft, dry cloth. If necessary, wipe
it with a soft cloth dampened with mild
soapy water, then a fresh cloth with
clean water. Wipe immediately with a
dry cloth. NEVER use benzene, aerosol
cleaners, thinner, alcohol or any volatile
cleaning agent. Do not use abrasive
cleaners, as they may damage the finish
of metal parts. Avoid spraying insecticide
near the unit.
Important Note for CVPD50 Plasma
Display: Always make sure that two
people lift the CVPD50 plasma display
together. Never attempt to lift the unit by
yourself. Failure to follow this instruc-
tion may result in personal injury or
irreparable damage to the unit that is
not covered under warranty.
Do Not Open the Cabinet
There are no user-serviceable compo-
nents inside this product. Opening the
cabinet may present a shock hazard, and
any modification to the product will void
your guarantee. If water or any metal
object such as a paper clip, wire or a
staple accidentally falls inside the unit,
disconnect it from the AC power source
immediately, and consult an authorized
service center.
Remove Front-Panel Protective Film
In order to protect the lens covering the
front panel of your new CVR700, it is
shipped from the factory covered by a
protective plastic film. Before using the
unit, remove this film by grabbing one
corner and gently peeling back the plastic
sheet. Note that the film must be
removed for proper operation of the
remote control.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Moving the Unit
Important Information for the User
The CVR700 and CVPD50 have been tested
and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B device, pursuant to Part 15 of
FCC Regulations 47. Operation is subject
to the following conditions: (1) These
devices may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) these devices must accept
interference received, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired operation.
These limits are designed to provide rea-
sonable protection against harmful inter-
ference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses and can radiate
radio-frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interfer-
ence to radio communication. However,
there is no guarantee that harmful inter-
ference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, the
user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the
The following is important safety infor-
mation that you should read carefully in
order to prevent the possibility of person-
al injury to yourself or others, or damage
to the equipment. Errors in installation or
connection may lead to damage to the
CVPD50, the CVR700 or other devices in
your system.
Before moving any of the units, be certain
to disconnect any interconnection cords
with other components, and make certain
that you disconnect the unit from the
AC outlet.
Important Note for CVPD50 Plasma
Display: Always make sure that two
people lift the CVPD50 plasma display
together. Never attempt to lift the unit by
yourself. Failure to follow this instruc-
tion may result in personal injury or
irreparable damage to the unit that is
not covered under warranty.
Never allow children to use the CVPD50,
CVR700 or any other electrical appliances
without supervision. Take care to install
these devices where they are safe from
children and pets.
Never operate the CVPD50 plasma dis-
play in environmental conditions other
than those listed in the technical specifi-
cations on pages 111–112 of this manual.
IMPORTANT NOTE: To avoid damage to
the CVR700 that may not be covered by
the warranty, be certain that all discs are
removed from the unit before it is tilted
in place or moved. Once the CVR700 is
installed, a disc may be left in the unit
when it is turned off, but the unit should
NEVER be tilted or moved with a disc
left in the changer. Failure to do so
may result in discs becoming dis-
lodged and jamming the mechanism
which will require that the unit be
returned to an authorized service
facility for repair.
Protect the CVPD50 plasma display and
the CVR700 from moisture, including high
levels of humidity, proximity to standing
water, dripping water, spray water and
rain. Do not install this equipment out-
doors, near a hot tub or in a bathroom.
Do not put any vessels that are filled
with water, such as vases, on the unit. If
you connect an external antenna to any
device connected to the CVR700, ensure
that no water can penetrate the cable.
following measures:
I Reorient or relocate the receiving
antenna.
I Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.
Protect this equipment from heat, heat
accumulation and direct sunlight. Avoid
placing the unit near fire, heat sources or
ovens. Maintain sufficient space on all
sides of the unit for proper ventilation.
Do not drape curtains over the unit. Do
not mount the unit in an enclosed
cabinet or wall.
I Connect the equipment into an outlet
on a circuit different from that to which
the receiver is connected.
I Consult the dealer or an experienced
radio/TV technician for help.
NOTE: Changes or modifications may
cause these units to fail to comply with
Part 15 of the FCC Rules and may void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Failure to follow these instructions
may lead to personal injury or death
due to electric shock and/or fire
caused by overheating, and/or
irreparable damage to the unit that
is not covered under warranty.
CAUTION: The CVR700 uses a laser sys-
tem. To prevent direct exposure to the
laser beam, do not open the cabinet
enclosure or defeat any of the safety
mechanisms provided for your protection.
DO NOT STARE INTO THE LASER BEAM.
To ensure proper use of this product,
please read this owner’s manual carefully
and retain it for future use. Should the
unit require maintenance or repair, please
contact your local JBL service center. Refer
servicing to qualified personnel only.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Connection and Operator
Control
The CVPD50 plasma display is equipped
with an attached glass filter plate. If the
unit is exposed to excessive stress, e.g.
due to shock, vibration, bending or heat,
the glass surface can break. Do not sub-
ject the glass surface to any pressure or
knocks. If the glass is cracked, unplug the
power cord immediately. Do not touch the
fragments with your bare hands. Failure
to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury due to
The CVPD50 plasma display and the
CVR700 are completely disconnected
from electrical power only when the
power cables are removed from both
units and/or the wall outlets, and the
™
JBL Digital Link cable connecting the
CVR700 to CVPD50 is unplugged. Only
connect the CVPD50 plasma display and
the CVR700 to a plug receptacle that has
been installed in compliance with local
regulations regarding proper grounding,
and which provides 120V. Make sure that
the power plug and outlet are accessible
at all times.
sharp-edged glass fragments.
Always make sure that two people lift
the CVPD50 plasma display together.
Never attempt to lift the unit by yourself.
Failure to follow this instruction may
result in personal injury or irrepara-
ble damage to the unit that is not
covered under warranty.
Use only the power cord supplied with
the CVPD50 plasma display. Never
remove the plug from the outlet by
pulling on the cable. Do not run the
power cord near heat-producing objects.
If you will be away for an extended period
of time, it is a good idea to unplug the
units and any antennae. It is also a good
idea to do the same before any thunder-
storms. This is a precautionary measure
to prevent the possibility of personal
injury or death due to fire or electric
shock resulting from a lightning strike,
and to prevent damage to the unit.
Always power off all units and unplug
them before connecting them to each
other.
Failure to follow this instruction may
result in personal injury due to elec-
trical shock or fire, and/or irrepara-
ble damage to the unit that is not
covered under warranty.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
One JBL Digital Link cable to connect the CVPD50 screen
to the CVR700 (3 meters; 5- and 10-meter lengths available
separately), packed with CVPD50
What’s Included
CVPD50 Carton Contents:
One CVPD50 50-Inch Plasma Display Screen (shown with
credenza stand)
One VGA to DVI cable for analog PCs (3 meters), packed with
CVPD50
CVR700 Carton Contents:
One CVR700 audio/video receiver/video processor/optical disc
changer with owner’s guide, quick-start guide and warranty
cards.
AUDIO
/
VIDEO RECEIVER
/
VIDEO PROCESSOR OPTICAL DISC CHANGER
/
DVD
SVCD P-SCAN
PCM 192K 96K
RANDOM PROGRAM
RPERAT DISC ALL
A
MP3 6:9 4:3
DIGITAL EX
PRO LOGIC II
L
R
96/24
NEO:6
SL
SR
LOGIC
7
SBL
SBR
57CH. STEREO
DSP SURR.
One wall-mount bracket for the CVPD50 screen
One AM loop antenna
One FM antenna
One power cord for the CVPD50 screen (packed with CVPD50)
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What’s Included (continued)
One CVR700R2 remote control
One CVR700R1 remote control
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DISC FORMATS SUPPORTED BY THIS PLAYER
The unit can play the following types of
discs:
Audio CD Compatibility:
ture or soundtrack option is available,
please check the options noted on the
disc jacket.
• 8cm (3") or 12cm (5") discs
• Linear PCM digital audio
• Playback capability for CD- or DVD-
recordable discs may vary due to varia-
tions in the quality of the disc and the
recorder used to create the disc.
• Audio CDs are divided into tracks
CD-R/RW Compatibility:
DVD
8cm (3") disc
12cm (5") disc
CD
8cm (3") disc
12cm (5") disc
• 12cm (5") discs
• Linear PCM, MP3 (32kbps – 320kbps)
• The CVR700 is compatible with most
discs recorded with files encoded using
MP3 or Windows Media 9, as well as
JPEG still images. However, note that
variations in the encoder or codec used
and the bit rate of the encoding may
affect the CVR700’s ability to play back
a specific disc. As a result, we cannot
guarantee complete compatibility with
all encoders and versions of the codecs.
For best results, we recommend that
MP3 files be encoded at bit rates rang-
ing between 32kbps and 320kbps.
WMA files should be encoded at bit
rates between 16kbps and 192kbps.
JPEG files should contain no more than
5 megapixels, and the file size should
be no larger than 5Mb.
®
or Windows Media WMA (16kbps –
The CVR700 will also play most DVD-
Video, DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R or
DVD+RW blank discs, but we cannot guar-
antee complete playback compatibility of
DVD-recordable discs due to the wide
variation in recorders and blank discs.
192kbps) digital audio
• May contain JPEG still images (up to
5 megapixels, file size up to 5mb)
• Linear PCM discs are generally divided
into tracks like an audio CD. MP3,
WMA and JPEG discs (or discs that
contain more than one of these for-
mats) are divided into files, which may
be organized into folders, depending on
how the disc was created.
ReWritable
VCD Compatibility:
CD-RW
12cm (5") 8cm (3")
CD-R
VCD
8cm (3")
12cm (5") 12cm (5")
• 12cm (5") discs
• Linear PCM, MP1 (MPEG-1, Layer 1),
MP3 (MPEG-1, Layer 3) digital audio
• MPEG-1 digital video
• May contain JPEG still images (Video
CD Version 2.0)
• Some discs may contain menus and
chapters, while other discs simply con-
tain tracks. Version 2.0 discs may offer
interactive playback control (PBC).
NOTE: Playback of CD-R or CD-RW discs
created on a computer requires proper
formatting and finalization of the disc for
audio playback. Some computers and/or
software programs may not be capable of
creating compatible discs.
Note on DVD-Audio Discs: Due to the
newness of this format and some author-
ing issues, it is possible that some DVD-
Audio discs will not play, or that all fea-
tures and menus may not be available.
Note that in many cases, in order to
DVD-Video Disc Compatibility:
However, it will NOT play the following:
access the disc menu, instead of pressing
• 8cm (3") or 12cm (5") discs
• Single-sided or double-sided discs
• Single-layer or dual-layer discs
• Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG or Linear
PCM digital audio tracks
the Menu Button j
, it is neces-
38
• DVD discs with a Region Code other
than that indicated on the rear panel
• DVD-ROM data discs
• DVD-RAM discs
• CD-I discs
• CD-G discs
sary to press the Title Button yor the
Audio Button U. In addition, many
DVD-Audio discs provide two menus: a
DVD-Audio menu and a DVD-Video menu
intended for use on older players that do
not support the DVD-Audio format. If you
wish to view the DVD-Video menu and
access surround modes and other fea-
tures only available through that menu
(such as Dolby Digital 5.1 or PCM audio
tracks), you will need to temporarily dis-
able the CVR700’s DVD-Audio capability
using the DVD Setup menu (see Fig. 31).
• MPEG-2 digital video
• Discs are generally divided into one or
more titles, which may be further sub-
divided into chapters.
• SVCD discs
®
• Kodak Photo CD discs (Kodak Picture
CD discs, which are available to con-
sumers, contain files in the JPEG for-
mat which may be viewed using the
CVR700.)
DVD-Audio Disc Compatibility:
• 8cm (3") or 12cm (5") discs
• Single-sided discs
• Single-layer or dual-layer discs
• Linear or packed PCM digital audio
• Some discs may contain MPEG-2 video,
and Dolby Digital, DTS or MPEG digital
audio
• Discs are generally divided into one or
more groups, which may be further
subdivided into tracks.
NOTE: Due to differences in the format-
ting of certain discs, it is possible that
some discs may include features that
are not compatible with the CVR700.
Similarly, although the CVR700 is capable
of a wide range of features, not all discs
include every capability of the DVD sys-
tem. For example, although the CVR700 is
compatible with multi-angle discs, that
feature is only possible when the disc is
specially encoded for multiple-angle play.
In addition, the CVR700 is capable of
playing back both Dolby Digital and DTS
soundtracks, but the number and types of
tracks available will vary from disc to
disc. To make certain that a specific fea-
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TERMINOLOGY
Home theater equipment has changed a
great deal since the first VCR was intro-
duced about 30 years ago. Some of the
terms used to describe and configure
your CVPD50 PDP plasma display monitor
and the internal DVD/CD changer in your
CVR700 may be unfamiliar. Some of
Aspect Ratio: This is a description of
the width of a video image in relation to
its height. A conventional video screen is
four units wide for every three units of
height, making it almost square. Newer
wide-aspect-ratio video displays are 16
units wide for every nine units of height,
making them more like the screen in a
movie theater. The program material on a
DVD may be recorded in either format.
video signal is of higher resolution
than 480i or DVI, you may need to
repeatedly press the Letterbox
Button z
on your remote con-
16
trol to select either the “2.35 LTRBOX
TO 16:9” or “2.35 LB TO 16:9
CROPPED” mode, choosing the mode
that provides the picture most pleas-
ing to you. Note that the cropped
mode may leave out portions of the
frame in order to fit the image to the
screen, and you may prefer the scaled
mode, even though black bars will
appear on the top and bottom of your
screen.
these terms are described in this section.
Since they share some of the characteris-
tics and technology of CD players, many
of the terms and operational concepts
used in a DVD player are similar to what
you may be familiar with from CD players
and changers, or older video disc formats
such as Laser Disc. However, if this is
your first DVD product, some of the terms
used to describe the features of a DVD
player may be unfamiliar. The following
explanations should solve some of the
mysteries of DVD, and help you to enjoy
all the power and flexibility of the DVD
format and the CVR700.
NOTES:
I Due to the advent of HD (high-defini-
tion) programming and the new 16:9
(also called 1.85 or widescreen) aspect
ratio, many newer sources now offer
their own scaling (resizing of the pic-
ture to fit a frame) options which are
accessed through their remote or
through their on-screen menu. To take
advantage of CVR700’s robust scaling
capabilities, it is best to allow the
CVR700 to handle all rescaling duties.
This means that all high-definition
external sources connected to CVR700
should be configured to supply a 16:9
picture to CVR700 if at all possible
and all non-HD legacy sources should
supply their native 4:3 (otherwise
called 1.33 or FULL SCREEN) aspect
ratio (with older devices, there are
usually no adjustments or options for
picture size, anyway). Regarding HD
sources, some experimentation may
be necessary, as not all offer a basic
16:9 aspect ratio option without other
parameter settings. The correct mode
may be called 16:9 FULL SCREEN in
some brand products; in other brand
products, you may need to select the
16:9 aspect ratio separately from
selecting FULL SCREEN scaling. Some
experimentation with the settings on
your source device may be necessary
to find the most pleasing appearance.
If you have turned off the DVD Auto
Resize feature, you may also choose how
to view 4:3 ratio images. You may view
the image as is, in which case black bars
will appear on the left and right sides of
the screen. You may set the system to
stretch the image to fill the screen, using
either linear (the stretch is even across
the entire image) or non-linear (the
stretch is more pronounced towards the
edges of the image, leaving the center
nearly unmodified) scaling. When the
4:3 ratio image consists of a letterboxed
movie, you may simply zoom in to remove
the black bars at the top and bottom of
the screen.
With the arrival of DVD, disc data capaci-
ty has increased dramatically. On a DVD
Video disc, most of this capacity is taken
up by MPEG 2 video and the multichannel
movie soundtrack in Dolby Digital and/or
DTS. This information is compressed. But
with DVD Audio, most of this capacity is
available for music only, without any
compression. This allows us to put the
audio information on the disc in the same
quality as the original mastering in the
studio, in PCM up to 24-bit/192kHz.
Chapter: DVD programs are divided into
chapters and titles. Chapters are the sub-
sections programmed into a single title
on a disc. Chapters may be compared to
the individual tracks on an audio CD.
j
38
Press the Menu Button
to see
DVD-Audio’s 24-bit system provides sub-
stantially improved resolution of fine
detail, because it describes a specific
point in the musical information using
a 24-digit-long string of ones and zeros
with 16,777,216 possible combinations,
while CD’s primitive 16-bit system offers
only 65,536 options. The 192kHz frequency
allows us to have fast changes in music
made audible, which results in more
dynamism, and also allows us to obtain a
higher bandwidth, up to 96kHz. Although
that is far beyond the human audible
spectrum, it still improves the musical
realism.
a listing of the chapters on a disc. On
DVD-Audio discs, a Chapter is referred
to as a Track.
Component Video: This form of video
signal eliminates many of the artifacts of
traditional composite video signals by
splitting the signal into a separate lumi-
nance channel (the Y signal channel) and
two color-difference signals (the Pr and
Pb signal channels). With a component
video connection, you will see greater
picture resolution and eliminate many
picture imperfections such as the moiré
patterns often seen on check-patterned
cloth. However, in order to benefit from
component video you must have a video
display with Y/Pr/Pb component video
inputs. Do not connect the component
video outputs of the CVR700 to the stan-
dard composite or S-video inputs of a
TV or recorder.
I There are two film formats commonly
used in movie theaters today that are
close to the 16:9 aspect ratio of your
CVPD50 screen – 1.85:1 and 2.35:1.
The aspect ratio of your screen is
1.78:1, which is very close to the
1.85:1 film ratio that is found in many
movies recorded on DVDs or broadcast
on television, and these programs will
fill your screen. However, some
movies are filmed in the wider 2.35:1
ratio. Check the jacket of your DVD to
find its aspect ratio. When playing
such a DVD on your JBL Cinema Vision
system, if you have turned off the DVD
Auto Resize feature, or if your analog
NOTE: The CVR700 is optimized to be
used with the CVPD50 High-Definition
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Plasma Display. Composite, S-video and
component video monitor outputs on the
CVR700 are provided as a means of con-
necting an auxiliary display only. On-
screen status messages, and all digital
video post-processing – including scaling,
de-interlacing, and upconversion features
of the CVR700 – are only available when
used with the CVPD50.
• 1080p – The picture is 1920 x 1080
pixels, sent at 60 complete frames per
second.
the same scene in a program. When a
disc is encoded with multiple-angle infor-
mation, pressing the Angle Button
E
will enable you to switch
15
The “p” and “i” designations stand for
“progressive” and “interlaced.”
between these different views. Note
that, at present, few discs take advan-
tage of this capability and, when they do,
the multiple-angle technology may only
be present for short periods of time with-
in the disc. Producers will usually insert
some sort of icon or graphic in the picture
to alert you to the availability of multiple-
angle scenes.
The 480p and 480i (when digital) formats
are called the SD (standard-definition)
formats, and 480i is the digital equivalent
of a normal analog TV picture. When ana-
log TV shows are upconverted and broad-
cast on digital TV stations, they are
broadcast in 480p or 480i.
When using the CVR700 with the CVPD50
display, there is no need to use the
CVR700’s component video outputs. All
video signals, including those from the
internal DVD/changer as well as those
originating with external source devices,
are upconverted to the digital format uti-
lized by the single proprietary interface
cable between the CVR700 and the
CVPD50.
Progressive scan: If you are using the
CVR700 with the CVPD50 display, and
with no external DVD players, you may
skip this section, as the internal DVD
player outputs a digital video signal that
is passed directly to the CVPD50 using
the proprietary interface cable. The
CVR700 offers progressive scan video
outputs for use with compatible high-res-
olution televisions and projectors. Before
DVD, no consumer medium could store,
transmit or display video with full resolu-
tion. To conserve bandwidth, analog com-
pression (interlacing) is employed: first
the odd-numbered lines of a frame are
displayed, followed by the even-num-
bered lines. The result is that only half of
the video image is drawn at one time; the
viewer’s brain must reassemble the com-
plete image. This is acceptable, if the
monitor is not too large and if there is not
too much motion in the image. Large dis-
plays and fast-moving images reveal the
limitations of this system. Thanks to
DVD’s immense data capacity, images are
now stored intact (progressively), so that
all the lines in each frame (odd and even)
are shown at the same time. But because
most TVs cannot handle a progressive
signal, all current DVD players generate
an interlaced output for compatibility. The
CVR700 is among the select few DVD
players with true progressive scan video
output for use with compatible TVs and
CRT projectors and with all plasma, LCD
and DLP display devices via the compo-
nent video output. The result is 40%
greater light output than a conventional
TV and a stunningly detailed high-defini-
tion image, along with an almost com-
plete absence of visible scanlines and
motion artifacts. The CVR700’s sophisti-
cated pixel-by-pixel processing is a major
advancement over the previous genera-
tion’s line-by-line processing, bringing out
even greater detail in your favorite video
presentations. Of course, traditional
The 720p, 1080i and 1080p formats are
HD (high-definition) formats. When you
hear about “HDTV,” this is what is being
discussed – a digital signal in the 720p,
1080i or 1080p format. If your HD source
allows you to choose a picture resolution,
set it to 720p, which works best with the
CVR700 and CVPD50.
High-Definition Television (HDTV):
HDTV is a form of digital television that
advances picture quality by leaps and
bounds over conventional analog televi-
sion. HDTV signals are broadcast in a dig-
ital format that compresses the signal,
allowing far more information to be sent.
Broadcasters take advantage of the addi-
tional bandwidth by offering high-resolu-
tion images containing millions more pix-
els than an analog picture, the end result
being an image so sharp it looks more
like a photograph than television.
Strictly speaking, the 480p format is con-
sidered ED (enhanced definition). However,
the JBL Cinema Vision system processes
480p signals as high-definition, and when
referring to high-definition signals, we
will be talking about 480p or better
images.
JPEG Files: JPEG stands for the Joint
Photographic Experts Group, which devel-
oped a standard for compressing still
images, such as photographs. JPEG files
may be created on a personal computer
by importing images from a digital cam-
era, or scanning printed photographs.
These files may be burned onto a com-
pact disc. The CVR700 is among the DVD
players that are capable of recognizing
JPEG files and enabling you to view them
on your video screen.
The resolution of a digital video signal
can vary, depending on the number of pix-
els used, and whether the image frames
are interlaced or progressive. Conventional
television uses interlaced frames, in
which first the odd horizontal pixels are
scanned, then all of the even pixels are
scanned to display one frame. Progressive
scanning, as described below, displays
all of the horizontal lines of pixels in one
pass. These are the common digital video
formats:
MP3 Files: MP3 is an audio compression
format that was developed by the Motion
Picture Experts Group as an adjunct to the
MPEG-1 video compression format. A
number of encoding software programs
are available for transferring CDs and
other audio programs into the MP3 for-
mat. The main benefit of MP3 is that it
reduces the size of audio files consider-
ably, depending on the amount of com-
pression selected during the encoding
process, enabling you to store many more
songs on one compact disc than in the
standard audio CD format. The CVR700 is
capable of playing MP3 files and display-
ing the filenames on screen.
• 480i – The picture is 704 x 480 pixels,
sent at 60 interlaced frames per sec-
ond (30 complete frames per second).
• 480p – The picture is 704 x 480 pixels,
sent at 60 complete frames per second.
• 720p – The picture is 1280 x 720 pix-
els, sent at 60 complete frames per
second.
• 1080i – The picture is 1920 x 1080
pixels, sent at 60 interlaced frames
per second (30 complete frames per
second).
Multiple Angle: DVDs have the capabil-
ity to show up to four different views of
Y/Pr/Pb component video, S-video and
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
composite video outputs are included for
use with conventional televisions and
projectors.
include only one title, but some may have
more than one, to give you a “Double
Feature” presentation or to include other
special features. Press the Title Button
Reading: This is a message that you will
see when you first press the Play Button
O
to see a listing of the titles on a disc.
When a disc has only one title, pressing
A
e
. It refers to the fact that the
26
the Title Button
O
may show a list of
player must first examine the contents of
the disc to see whether it is a CD or DVD,
and then extract the information about
the type of material on the disc, such as
languages, aspect ratios, subtitles, num-
ber of titles and more. The slight delay
while the contents of the disc are read
is normal.
the chapters.
• On DVD-Audio discs, a Title is referred
to as a Group. Many DVD-Audio discs
require you to press the Title Button
O
to access the disc menu.
WMA Files: WMA (Windows Media
Audio) is another audio compression
format that was developed by the
Resume: The operation of the Stop
®
Button
C
M
on the CVR700 works
Microsoft Corporation for use with its
24
differently from what you are used to on
CD players. On a traditional CD player,
when you press the Stop button, the unit
does just that: it stops playback. On a CD
player, when you press the Start button
again, the disc starts from the beginning.
With the CVR700, however, you have two
options when playing DVD discs. Pressing
Windows Media Player. WMA files can
be even smaller in size than MP3 files,
while maintaining similar quality. The
CVR700 is among the DVD players capa-
ble of playing discs containing WMA
files. Note that Windows Media Player
uses other file formats; however, the
CVR700 is only capable of playing files
that end in the “.wma” extension.
the Stop Button
C
M
once will
24
stop the playback, but it actually puts the
unit in the Resume mode. This means
that when you press the Play Button
A
e
the next time, the disc will
26
resume or continue from the point on the
disc where the Stop Button
C
M
24
was pressed. This is helpful if you are
watching a movie and must interrupt
your viewing session but wish to pick up
where you left off. Pressing the Stop
Button
C
M
twice will stop the
24
machine in a traditional manner and,
when the disc is played again, it will
start from the beginning.
Note that the Resume function will be
canceled if you shut the unit off (place
it in Standby mode), change to another
disc or select a different source. Also,
there may be a brief 1- to 2-second delay
between the second press of the Stop
Button
C
M
and the CVR700
24
acknowledging the mode change in the
Upper Display Line H.
The resume function is not available for
CDs, VCDs or JPEG files. For DVDs only,
the resume function will be retained even
after the CVR700 has been placed in
Standby mode by pressing the Power
Off Button 10
.
39
Title: For a DVD, a title is defined as an
entire movie or program. There may be as
many chapters within a title as the pro-
ducers decide to include. Most discs
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CVR700 FRONT-PANEL CONTROLS
Ô
Ó
*
&
(
AUDIO / VIDEO RECEIVER / VIDEO PROCESSOR / OPTICAL DISC CHANGER
DVD
SVCD P-SCAN
PCM 192K 96K
RANDOM PROGRAM
RPERAT DISC ALL
A
MP3 6:9 4:3
DIGITAL EX
PRO LOGIC II
L
R
96/24
NEO:6
SL
SR
LOGIC
7
SBL
SBR
57CH. STEREO
DSP SURR.
GAME/CAM
2
@
4
6
8
8)
^
$
1
3
!
%
7 9
#
5
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Main Power On/Off
Sleep Button
Display Dimmer
Disc Drawer
Disc Selector
Tuning Mode/Eject Button
Front-Panel Optical Digital Audio
8
9
Input
!
B
#
$
%
^
Front-Panel Optical Digital Audio Input
Front-Panel Coaxial Digital Audio
&
*
(
Ó
Ô
Source Selector
Surround Mode Selector
Input Select Button
Volume Control
Information Display
Remote Sensor Window
Tuner Band Selector/Play Button
Memory/Pause Button
FM Mode/Stop Button
Front-Panel Audio/Video Inputs
Headphone Jack
Output
7
Tuning/Preset/Skip/Search Button
Front-Panel Door
1Main Power On/Off: Press this but-
ton to apply power to the CVR700. The
LED indicator in the center of the button
will turn orange. Press it again to place
the CVR700 in Standby mode, and the
LED indicator will turn red.
3Display Dimmer: Press this button to
reduce the brightness of the Information
Display Ôby 50%, or to turn the dis-
play off completely, in the following order:
FULL BRIGHTNESS -> HALF BRIGHTNESS
-> OFF -> FULL BRIGHTNESS.
, the CVR700 will prompt you to enter
a disc number by pressing one of these
buttons.
13
6Tuning Mode/Eject Button: This
button’s function varies, depending on
whether you have selected the tuner or
the disc changer as the current input
source. When the tuner is the source,
press this button to select the function
of the Tuning/Preset Buttons 8. Each
press will alternate between the tuning
function and the preset selections func-
tion, with the current choice displayed
on the Lower Display Line E.
If the CVPD50 is in use, pressing this but-
ton will also turn the CVPD50 on or off,
if it is plugged into AC power and its
master power switch has been turned
on. If the LED on the CVPD50’s front panel
is flashing, then check that its master
power switch is on (the “1” position).
4Disc Drawer: This drawer is used to
access the five-disc magazine changer.
While a disc is playing, you may load a
disc into or remove a disc from another
location in the changer. If you select the
current disc, it will first stop playing. Seat
all discs carefully within the recess in the
drawer. Do not press down on the drawer
when it is open, to avoid damage to the
player. It is also best to open and close
the drawer by pressing the Eject Button
6rather than by pushing the drawer
itself.
2Sleep Button: Press this button to
place the unit in the Sleep mode. After
the time shown in the display, the
CVR700 will automatically go into the
Standby mode. Each press of the button
changes the time until turn-off in the fol-
lowing order:
When the tuning function has been
selected, each press of one of the
Tuning/Preset Buttons 8will tune the
next higher or lower frequency, regardless
of whether an acceptable signal is avail-
able. Press and hold the Tuning Button
8to scan up or down through the fre-
quencies until a station with acceptable
signal quality is located. Tap the Tuning
Button 8again to end the scan.
5Disc Selector: Press one of these
buttons when prompted by a message on
the Lower Display Line Eand on the
CVPD50 screen for a disc number after
pressing the Eject Button 6. If you
have selected the internal disc changer
as the source device using the Source
Selector &or by pressing the DVD
2
90
min
80
min
70
min
60
min
50
min
40
min
30
min
20
min
10
min
OFF
When the Sleep timer is in use, the front-
panel displays and other indicators will
dim to half-brightness.
When the preset selection function is in
force, each press of one of the Tuning/
Preset Buttons 8will tune the next
higher or lower preset station that was
previously stored in the CVR700’s memory.
Input Selector d
on either remote
control, and then pressed the Play
Button !or Disc Direct Button a
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
See page 64 for information on storing
preset stations.
9Front-Panel Optical Digital Audio
Input: Connect the optical digital output
of an audio or video product to this jack.
Stop Button !#to exit the Step
Forward mode.
When the disc changer is the source,
press this button to open or close the
Disc Drawer 4. The Lower Display
Line Ewill prompt you to press a disc
number. Press the Disc Selector 5cor-
responding to the number of the drawer
you wish to access.
#FM Mode/Stop Button: The func-
tion of this button varies depending on
whether you have selected the tuner or
the disc changer as the input source.
)Front-Panel Coaxial Digital Audio
Input: Connect the coaxial digital output
of an audio or video product to this jack.
!Tuner Band Selector/Play Button:
The function of this button varies depend-
ing on whether you have selected the
tuner or the disc changer as the source.
When the tuner is the source, press this
button to switch between Stereo and
Mono modes for FM radio reception.
When weak reception is encountered,
select the Mono tuning mode. Press
again to switch back to Stereo mode.
See page 64 for more information.
7Front-Panel Optical Digital Audio
Output: Connect the optical digital input
of an audio or video product to this jack.
When the tuner is the source, pressing
this button will switch between the AM
and FM frequency bands. (See page 64
for more information on the tuner.)
8Tuning/Preset/Skip/Search
Buttons: The function of these buttons
varies depending on whether you have
selected the tuner or the disc changer as
the current input source, and in what con-
text you press it.
When the disc changer is the source,
press this button once to stop playback
of the current disc and enter Resume
mode. In Resume mode, the CVR700 will
“remember” the point on the disc where
play was stopped, and the next time the
disc is played, it will commence playback
from this point, unless the unit was
turned off, another disc was selected or
another source was selected. To fully
stop the disc, press this button twice.
There may be a 1- or 2-second delay
before Stop mode takes effect. Resume
mode is not available for CDs, VCDs, MP3
discs or WMA discs. If one of those disc
types is playing, a single press of this
button will place the disc in Stop mode,
as indicated by the solid square and the
word STOPappearing in the Upper
Display Line H.
When the disc changer is the source,
pressing this button will prompt you to
enter the number of the disc you wish
to play (corresponding to the drawer in
which the disc is loaded). You may select
a disc either by pressing one of the Disc
Selectors 5numbered 1 through 5, or
When the tuner is the source, press the
left button to tune lower-frequency sta-
tions and the right button to tune higher-
frequency stations. Each tap of the but-
tons will increase or decrease the fre-
quency by one increment. Press and hold
the button, and the tuner will scan for a
station with acceptable signal strength.
When the next higher or lower frequency
station with a strong-enough signal is
tuned, the frequency scan will pause.
Press the button again to stop scanning.
by pressing the Numeric Keys l
14
numbered 1 through 5 on either remote
control. If you don’t select a disc number
within 5 seconds, the CVR700 will play
the last disc that was selected. If the disc
is an MP3 or WMA disc, each press of
this button will expand the current folder
until a file is located, and the final press
will begin play of that file. If no disc is
found, the STOPMODE,DISC1
message will appear and you will need to
open the drawer to insert a disc.
When the tuner is the source and you
have pressed the Tuning Mode Button
6so that PRESETappears in the
Lower Display Line E, pressing these
buttons enables you to scroll through the
list of stations that have been previously
stored in the CVR700’s memory.
$Front-Panel Audio/Video Inputs:
The front-panel inputs give you the flexi-
bility to temporarily connect a device to
the CVR700. This capability is useful for
such applications as viewing home
@Memory/Pause Button: The func-
tion of this button varies depending on
whether you have selected the tuner or
the disc changer as the input source.
See page 64 for more information on
using the tuner.
When the tuner is the source, press this
button to store the currently tuned station
as a preset. Two flashing underlines will
appear in the Upper Display Line H.
Press the Tuning Mode Button 6
until PRESETappears in the Lower
Display Line Eto indicate the function
of the Tuning/Preset Buttons 8, then
press either of the Preset Buttons 8
until the desired preset location appears
in place of the flashing underlines. Press
the Memory Button @again to store
the station in the preset location displayed.
movies directly from the camcorder, or
playing a video game. For video devices,
connect one of the composite video, S-
video or component video outputs of the
device to the corresponding front-panel
input, and connect the left and right
audio outputs to the analog audio inputs.
Do not make more than one type of video
connection. In addition to the analog
audio connection, you may also connect
an optical or coaxial digital audio output
from the device to the CVR700. You will
then need to press the Input Select
Button (to select the desired audio
input (analog, optical or coaxial), and
specify the correct video input using the
audio on-screen menu system. Press the
System Selector f, and then the
OSD Button nto enter the menu sys-
tem. Select the SOURCESsubmenu,
and make sure the GAME/CAMERA
source is selected (or select the
When the disc changer is the source,
press and release these buttons to move
(skip) either backward (left button) or for-
ward (right button) through the tracks on
a DVD-Audio, CD or VCD disc or the
chapters on a DVD-Video disc. Press and
hold either button for at least 1 second
and then release to search either back-
ward (left button) or forward (right but-
ton) the current track or chapter at 2x
speed. Press and hold again and release
to increase the scan speed to 4x. Repeat
this procedure while in scan mode to
cycle through these scan speeds: 2x, 4x,
16x, 100x, 2x and so forth. Press and
release the button while scanning to skip
tracks or chapters. To stop searching, you
must press the Play Button !, the
Pause Button @, the Stop Button #
or the other Search Button 8.
When the disc changer is the source,
pressing this button during playback
freezes a picture (for DVD and VCD discs)
and pauses the playback signal. Pressing
the Pause Button @twice places the
DVD changer in the Step Forward mode,
in which each subsequent press of the
Pause Button @advances the picture
one step or frame. Press the Play or
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTE: 6.1 and 7.1 digital modes are
available only when the appropriate digi-
tal bitstream is present.
SOURCEline to adjust it). Scroll down
to the VIDEO INPUTline and
select it to configure the CVR700 to use
the video input you connected your
device to.
(Input Select Button: After you have
selected the desired input source, press
this button repeatedly to scroll through
the analog, optical digital and coaxial
digital audio inputs available for that
source.
%Headphones Jack: This jack may
be used to listen to the CVR700's output
through a pair of headphones. Be certain
that the headphones have a standard
1/4" stereo phone plug, or that you use
an adapter, as needed, to convert the
plug on your headphones to the 1/4" jack
used on the CVR700. When the head-
phone jack is in use, the main room
speakers will automatically be turned off
and the unit will output a standard stereo
signal. For more information on head-
phone listening, see page 60.
ÓVolume Control: Turn this knob
clockwise to increase the volume, coun-
terclockwise to decrease the volume. If
the CVR700 is muted, adjusting the vol-
ume control will automatically release
the unit from the silenced condition.
ÔInformation Display: This display
delivers messages and status information
to help you operate the CVR700. See
page 19 for a complete explanation of
the display.
^Front-Panel Door: The door may
be closed to hide the front-panel jacks
when they are not in use for a smoother
appearance. To open the door, gently
push on the bottom of the door in the
center to swing it down towards you, or
gently pull on the upper right corner. Push
upward on it to close.
Remote Sensor Window: The sen-
sor behind this window receives infrared
signals from the remote control that are
intended to control the non-video func-
tions of the CVR700 only. Aim the remote
at this area and do not block or cover
it unless an external remote sensor is
installed. Note that unless the CVR700
is not being used with the CVPD50, it is
best to aim the remote at the LED light
on the front of the CVPD50 plasma dis-
play, as the IR receiver located there can
accept remote control signals intended
for both the plasma display and the
CVR700.
&Source Selector: Rotate this knob
to scroll through the available input
sources. Turn the knob slowly and gently,
and you will feel a soft click as each
source is engaged. You may also hear a
click as the CVR700’s electrical circuits
engage the source. This is normal, and
assures you that you have correctly
selected the source. The name of the
source will be displayed in the Upper
Display Line H, and in a Status Banner
on screen, together with the source’s
audio input (for external sources) and
video format.
*Surround Mode Selector: Press
this button repeatedly to scroll through
the available surround modes. The modes
available will depend on the number of
speakers in the system and whether the
input is analog or digital. See page 60 for
more information on surround modes.
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CVR700 FRONT-PANEL INFORMATION DISPLAY
ADisc-Type Indicators
BPCM Bitstream Indicators
CProgrammed Play Indicators
DDisc Indicators
ELower Display Line
IProgressive Scan Indicator
JAspect Ratio Indicator
FSpeaker/Channel Input Indicators
GSurround Mode Indicators
HUpper Display Line
ADisc-Type Indicators: The DVD,
DVD-Audio, CD, VCD or MP3 indicator
will light to show the type of disc cur-
rently being played. WMA and JPEG
discs will be identified in the Upper and
Lower Display Lines EH.
ELower Display Line: Depending on
the unit’s status, a variety of messages
will appear here. In normal operation, the
current surround mode will appear on
this line.
HUpper Display Line: Depending on
the unit’s status, a variety of messages
will appear here. In normal operation,
this line will show the current input
source and identify whether an analog
or digital input is in use. When the tuner
is selected as the input, this line will
identify the station as AM or FM and
show the frequency and preset number,
if any.
FSpeaker/Channel Input Indicators:
These indicators are multipurpose, indicat-
ing both the speaker type selected for
each channel and the incoming data signal
configuration. The left, center, right, right
surround and left surround speaker indica-
tors are composed of two boxes, while the
subwoofer is a single box. The inner box
lights when a “small” speaker is selected,
and the outer boxes light when “large”
speakers are selected. When none of the
boxes are lit for the center, surround or
subwoofer channels, no speaker has been
assigned that position. (See page 48 for
more information on configuring speakers.)
The letters inside each box display the
active input channels. For standard analog
inputs, only the L and R will light, indicat-
ing a stereo input. For a digital source, the
indicators will light to display the channels
being received at the digital input. When
the letters flash, the digital input has been
interrupted. When a 6.1-channel bitstream
is detected, a horizontal line will appear
between the icons for the surround back
left and right channels to indicate that
these two channels are in mono mode.
(See page 61 for more information on the
Channel Indicators.)
BPCM Bitstream Indicators: The
PCM indicator will light when a PCM
(pulse code modulation) bitstream is
detected. PCM bitstreams are used on
audio CDs, and may also be found on
other disc types either as the main audio
format or as the format used on certain
portions of the disc, such as a “making
of” featurettes on a DVD. The 96K or
192K indicators will light when a high-
resolution audio signal is detected. This
type of audio track may be found on
some DVD-Audio discs.
IProgressive Scan Indicator: This
indicator lights when the CVR700’s
progressive scan component video output
is activated.
JAspect Ratio Indicators: The
aspect ratio of the incoming video signal
will light. These indicators are informa-
tional only and reflect the aspect ratio
information provided by the DVD disc
itself. You may need or wish to make
manual adjustments to display the
images so that they fill the screen, or if
you prefer to avoid any scaling or crop-
ping of the images, you may wish to let-
terbox the image. See pages 13 and 27
for more information on adjusting the
CVPD50 display to compensate for vari-
ous aspect ratio issues.
CProgrammed Play Indicators: The
CVR700 is capable of playing discs in a
programmed order other than the order in
which the tracks are found on the disc.
Tracks may be played in random order,
or you may program some or all of the
tracks on a CD to play in a playlist order.
In addition, you may program the CVR700
to repeat play of some of the tracks on a
disc, an entire disc, all discs, or a pro-
grammed playlist. Some of the pro-
grammed modes may not be available
for certain disc formats. See page 75
for more information.
DDisc Indicators: The circled num-
bers will light to indicate the positions of
loaded discs, and the indicator for the
current disc will flash.
GSurround Mode Indicators: One of
these indicators will light to show the
surround mode in use. Depending on the
specific combination of input sources and
surround mode selected, more than one
indicator may light. (See page 61 for
more information.)
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CVR700 REAR-PANEL CONNECTIONS
k
e
i g
V
X
f
j h
Y
W
U
d
ª
¡
£
fi
‡ ·
b
¶
⁄ ‹
∞
™
fl
°
c
¤ ›
a
¢
§ •
‚
NOTE: To make it easier to follow the instructions that refer to this illustration, a larger copy may be downloaded from the Product
Support section for this product at www.jbl.com.
0 Back Surround Speaker Outputs
(7.1-channel only)
D Composite and S-Video Monitor
Outputs
f Digital Recorder Coaxial Digital Audio
Input
1 Side Surround (7.1-channel) or
Surround (5.1-channel) Speaker Outputs
2 Center Speaker Outputs
3 Front Speaker Outputs
4 Fan Slots
E Remote IR Output
F Remote IR Input
G Digital Recorder Component Video
Inputs
H Cable/Satellite Component Video
Inputs
g Optical Digital Audio Output
h Auxiliary Optical Digital Audio Input
i Cable/Satellite Optical Digital Audio
Input
j Digital Recorder Optical Digital Audio
Input
5 Subwoofer Output
6 DVI/Computer Analog Audio Inputs
7 Auxiliary Analog Audio/Video Inputs
8 Digital Recorder Analog Audio/Video
Inputs
9 Digital Recorder Analog Audio/Video
Outputs
A VCR Analog Audio/Video Inputs
B VCR Analog Audio/Video Outputs
C Cable/Satellite Analog Audio/Video
Inputs
I Component Video Monitor Outputs
J Picture-in-Picture (PIP) Composite
Video Input
b Coaxial Digital Audio Output
c Auxiliary Coaxial Digital Audio Input
d Cable/Satellite Coaxial Digital Audio
Input
k DVI/Computer Optical Digital Audio
Input
31
FM Antenna Jack
AM Antenna Terminals
32
Output to JBL Cinema Vision CVPD50
33
Screen
34
Port for Factory Use Only
e DVI/Computer Coaxial Digital Audio
Input
DVI (HDCP)/Computer Video Input
35
NOTE: To assist in making the correct con-
nections for multichannel input, output and
speaker connections, all connection jacks and
terminals are color-coded in conformance
with the CEA standards as follows:
Front Left:
Front Right:
Center:
Side Surround/Surround Left: Blue
Side Surround/Surround Right: Gray
White
Red
Green
Subwoofer:
Digital Audio:
Composite Video:
Component Video “Y”:
Component Video “Pr”:
Component Video “Pb”:
Purple
Orange
Yellow
Green
Red
Back Surround Left:
Back Surround Right:
Brown
Tan
Blue
terminal should be connected to the red
(+) terminal on the Back Surround Right
speaker with the older color-coding.
Connect the black (–) terminal on the
CVR700 to the matching black negative
(–) terminals for each back surround
speaker. (See page 42 for more informa-
tion on speaker polarity.)
¡ Back Surround Speaker Outputs:
These speaker terminals are normally
used to power the back surround left/
back surround right speakers in a 7.1-
channel system. In conformance with the
CEA color-code specification, the brown
terminal is the positive (+) terminal that
should be connected to the red (+) termi-
nal on the Back Surround Left speaker
with older color-coding, while the tan
™ Side Surround Speaker Outputs:
Connect these outputs to the matching +
and – terminals on your side surround
(7.1-channel system) or Surround (5.1-
channel system) speakers. Conforming to
CEA color-code specifications, the blue
terminal is the positive (+) terminal that
should be connected to the (+) terminal
on the Side Surround/Surround Left
speaker with older color-coding; the gray
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
terminal should be connected to the
red (+) terminal on the Side Surround/
Surround Right speaker with the older
color-coding. Connect the black (–) termi-
nals on the CVR700 to the matching black
negative (–) terminals for each side sur-
round speaker. (See page 42 for more
information on speaker polarity.)
page 46 for more information on configur-
ing an input for various source options.)
§ Subwoofer Output: Connect this
jack to the line-level input of a powered
subwoofer. If an external subwoofer
amplifier is used, connect this jack to
the subwoofer amplifier input. Use a
Y-adaptor when connecting two sub-
woofers.
‚ Digital Recorder Analog Audio/
Video Outputs: Connect the left/right
analog audio and composite or S-video
RECORD/IN jacks of a video recording
device such as a DVD-Recorder, personal
video recorder or VCR to these jacks.
¶ DVI/Computer Analog Audio
Inputs: Connect the left/right analog
audio outputs of a computer or other
device with a DVI output to these jacks
to benefit from the CVR700’s surround
processor for added realism and excite-
ment when playing computer games,
or giving multimedia presentations, or
for other uses. When you have also
connected the computer’s DVI video out-
put to the DVI/Computer Video Input
35 , you may also benefit from the
superior visual presentation of the JBL
Cinema Vision CVPD50 screen.
£ Center Speaker Outputs: Connect
these outputs to the matching + and –
terminals on your center channel speaker.
In conformance with the CEA color-code
specification, the green terminal is the
positive (+) terminal that should be con-
nected to the red (+) terminal on speakers
with the older color-coding. Connect the
black (–) terminal on the CVR700 to the
black negative (–) terminal on the speaker.
(See page 42 for more information.)
⁄ VCR Analog Audio/Video Inputs:
Connect the left/right analog audio and
composite or S-video PLAY/OUT jacks of
a video recording device such as a VCR,
DVD-Recorder or personal video recorder
to these jacks.
¤
VCR Analog Audio/Video Outputs:
Connect the left/right analog audio and
composite or S-video RECORD/IN jacks of
a video recording device such as a VCR,
DVD-Recorder or personal video recorder
to these jacks.
¢ Front Speaker Outputs: Connect
these outputs to the matching + or – ter-
minals on your left and right speakers.
When making speaker connections
always make certain to maintain correct
polarity by connecting the color-coding
(white for front left and red for front
right) (+) terminals on the CVR700 to the
red (+) terminals on the speakers and
black (–) terminals on the CVR700 to the
black terminals on the speakers (see
page 42 for more information).
You may connect any device with left and
right analog audio outputs to these jacks.
The CVR700’s remote control has a VCR
as the default device for this input, but
you may connect any video source such
as an HDTV or cable set-top box, personal
video recorder, or other device to these
inputs. Note, however, that the VCR
source is not associated with any digital
audio inputs or component video inputs,
and should therefore only be used as a
last resort for devices that have those
capabilities. The preferred system config-
uration is to connect an HDTV tuner or
digital cable or satellite receiver to the
Cable/Sat source, and to connect a per-
• Auxilliary Analog Audio/Video
Inputs: Connect the left/right analog
audio and composite or S-video jacks of a
video device to these jacks. You may con-
nect any video source such as a VCR,
HDTV receiver, or other device to these
inputs. Note that if the source device
offers digital audio capability, that con-
nection must be made separately, and the
CVR700 configured accordingly. Note that
the Auxiliary Source Input does not have
component video inputs assigned to it
and thus may only be used with compos-
ite or S-video. Therefore, if possible, it
is recommended that an HDTV receiver
be used with the Cable/Sat or even the
Digital Recorder source, so that a compo-
nent video connection may be made. (See
page 46 for more information on configur-
ing an input for various source options.)
∞ Fan Slots: These ventilation holes
are the output of the CVR700’s airflow
system. To ensure proper operation of the
unit and to avoid possible damage to del-
icate surfaces, make certain that these
holes are not blocked and that there is at
least three inches of open space between
the vent holes and any wooden or fabric
surface. It is equally important to make
sure that the holes in the top and bottom
covers of the unit are not blocked, either.
It is normal for the fan to remain on at
all times at one of three speeds,
®
sonal video recorder, such as a TiVo, to
the Digital Recorder source.
‹ Cable/Satellite Analog
Audio/Video Inputs: Connect the
left/right analog audio and composite or
S-video jacks of a video device to these
jacks. The CVR700’s remote control has
a cable, satellite or HDTV set-top as the
default devices available for this input,
but you may connect any video source
such as a VCR, HDTV or satellite receiver,
personal video recorder, or other device
to these inputs. Note that if the source
device offers either digital audio or com-
ponent video capability, those connec-
tions must be made separately, and the
CVR700 configured accordingly.
ª Digital Recorder Analog
Audio/Video Inputs: Connect the
depending on the selection you make in
the ADVANCEDSETTINGS
submenu. By selecting the default
left/right analog audio and composite
or S-video PLAY/OUT jacks of a video
recording device such as a VCR, DVD-
Recorder or personal video recorder to
these jacks. The CVR700’s remote control
has a variety of digital recorders avail-
able as the default devices for this input,
but you may connect any video source
such as a VCR, HDTV or cable set-top
box, personal video recorder, or other
device to these inputs. Note that if the
source device offers either digital audio
or component video capability, those con-
nections must be made separately, and
the CVR700 configured accordingly. (See
MINIMUMNOISEsetting, the fan
will run at its slowest speed at volumes
below –20dB, and at its slightly faster
medium speed at higher volumes. This
setting should only be selected when
the CVR700 is placed on a shelf and
not within an enclosed space. When
the CVR700 is placed inside a cabinet
or other enclosed space, select the
MAXIMUMCOOLINGsetting, in
which the fan will always be on at its
highest setting.
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
permanently assigned to the Auxiliary
source input.
› Composite and S-Video Monitor
Outputs: If you are not using the
· Component Video Monitor
Outputs: If you are not using the
CVPD50, or if you desire a secondary
video display, connect these outputs to
the component video inputs of a video
projector or monitor. When a source con-
nected to one of the Component Video
Inputs ‡° is selected, the signal will
be sent to these jacks.
CVPD50, or if you desire a secondary dis-
play, connect thse jacks to the composite
or S-video input of a TV monitor or video
projector to view the output of any stan-
dard video source selected by the receiv-
er’s video switcher. If both standard com-
posite and S-video sources are used,
you must make connections from both
Video Monitor Output jacks to your
display. Also, if component video sources
are used, you must also connect the
Component Video Monitor Output ·
to the display.
d Cable/Satellite Coaxial Digital
Audio Input: Connect the coaxial digital
audio output from a DVD player, HDTV
receiver, the S/P-DIF output of a compati-
ble computer sound card playing audio
files or streams, LD player or CD player
to this jack. The signal may be a Dolby
Digital signal, DTS signal or a standard
PCM digital source. Do not connect the
RF digital output of an LD player to this
jack. This input is permanently assigned
to the Cable/Satellite source input.
NOTE: The CVR700 is optimized to be
used with the CVPD50 High-Definition
Plasma Display. Composite, S-video and
component video monitor outputs on the
CVR700 are provided as a means of con-
necting an auxiliary display only. On-
screen status messages, and all digital
video post-processing – including scaling,
de-interlacing, and upconversion features
of the CVR700 – are only available when
used with CVPD50.
e DVI/Computer Coaxial Digital
Audio Input: Connect the coaxial digital
audio output from a DVD player, HDTV
receiver, the S/P-DIF output of a compati-
ble computer sound card playing audio
files or streams, LD player or CD player
to this jack. The signal may be a Dolby
Digital signal, DTS signal or a standard
PCM digital source. Do not connect the
RF digital output of an LD player to this
jack. This input is permanently assigned
to the DVI/Computer source input.
NOTE: The CVR700 is optimized to be
used with the CVPD50 High-Definition
Plasma Display. Composite, S-video and
component video monitor outputs on the
CVR700 are provided as a means of con-
necting an auxiliary display only. On-
screen status messages, and all digital
video post-processing – including scaling,
de-interlacing, and upconversion features
of the CVR700 – are only available when
used with CVPD50.
a Picture-in-Picture (PIP)
Composite Video Input: Connect the
composite video output of a video device
that you would like to have available for
picture-in-picture (PIP) viewing using the
JBL Cinema Vision CVPD50 screen. When
the PIP function is activated, the signal
fed to this jack will appear within a small
field over the main program visible on
the plasma screen. Except for the DVI/
Computer source, the PIP view may also
be available as a split screen. Use the
Screen menu system to configure the PIP
view. When the main source is HD com-
ponent video (480p or better), the PIP
function is not available.
f Digital Recorder Coaxial Digital
Audio Input: Connect the coaxial digital
audio output from a DVD player, HDTV
receiver, the S/P-DIF output of a compati-
ble computer sound card playing audio
files or streams, LD player or CD player
to this jack. The signal may be a Dolby
Digital signal, DTS signal or a standard
PCM digital source. Do not connect the
RF digital output of an LD player to this
jack. This input is permanently assigned
to the Digital Recorder source input.
fiRemote IR Output: This connection
permits the IR sensor in the receiver to
serve other remote controlled devices.
Connect this jack to the “IR IN” jack on
JBL (or other compatible) equipment.
fl Remote IR Input: If the CVR700’s
front-panel IR sensor is blocked due to cab-
inet doors or other obstructions, an exter-
nal IR sensor may be used. Connect the
output of the sensor to this jack.
The PIP source must be able to output
composite video simultaneously with
its main method of connection to the
CVR700. If the PIP device is connected
via its composite video output to a source
input on the CVR700, a Y-Cable will be
required to connect to both the main
source input jack and the PIP input.
NOTE: The remote IR input and output on
the CVR700 are only used for non-video
functions, and will have no effect on the
CVPD50 plasma display. JBL recommends
that you point the remote control at the
LED light on the front of the CVPD50 dis-
play for all functions, as the CVPD50 will
pass any non-video command codes to
the CVR700.
g Optical Digital Audio Output:
Connect this jack to the optical digital
input connector on a DVD+R/RW, DVD-
R/RW, CD-R/RW, MiniDisc or other com-
patible digital recorder.
h Auxiliary Optical Digital Audio
Inputs: Connect the optical digital output
from a DVD player, HDTV receiver, the
S/P-DIF output of a compatible computer
sound card playing audio files or streams,
LD player or CD player to these jacks.
The signal may be a Dolby Digital signal,
a DTS signal or standard PCM digital
source. This input is permanently
b Coaxial Digital Audio Output:
Connect this jack to the coaxial digital
input of a DVD+R/RW, DVD-R/RW, CD-
R/RW, MiniDisc or other compatible
digital recorder.
‡ Component Video Digital
Recorder Inputs: These inputs may
be used with any video source device
equipped with analog Y/Pr/Pb component
video outputs. These jacks are perma-
nently linked to the Digital Recorder
Source input.
c Auxiliary Coaxial Digital Audio
Input: Connect the coax digital output
from a DVD player, HDTV receiver, the
S/P-DIF output of a compatible computer
sound card playing audio files or streams,
LD player or CD player to this jack. The
signal may be a Dolby Digital signal, DTS
signal or a standard PCM digital source.
Do not connect the RF digital output of
an LD player to this jack. This input is
assigned to the Auxiliary source input.
i Cable/Satellite Optical Digital
Audio Input: Connect the optical digital
audio output from a DVD player, HDTV
receiver, the S/P-DIF output of a compati-
ble computer sound card playing audio
files or streams, LD player or CD player
° Component Video Cable/Satellite
Inputs: These inputs may be used with
any video source device equipped with
analog Y/Pr/Pb component video out-
puts. These jacks are permanently linked
to the Cable/Satellite source input.
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
to this jack. The signal may be a Dolby
Digital signal, DTS signal or a standard
PCM digital source. Do not connect the
RF digital output of an LD player to this
jack. This input is permanently assigned
to the Cable/Satellite source input.
damage to the device or to the CVR700,
which would not be covered under the
warranty.
34
Port for Factory Use Only: This
connector is used only by factory-author-
ized service personnel. Do not connect
any control devices to this port, or
attempt to connect it to any other device.
Doing so may cause serious damage to
the device or to the CVR700, which would
not be covered under warranty.
j Digital Recorder Optical Digital
Audio Input: Connect the optical digital
audio output from a DVD player, HDTV
receiver, the S/P-DIF output of a compati-
ble computer sound card playing audio
files or streams, LD player or CD player
to this jack. The signal may be a Dolby
Digital signal, DTS signal or a standard
PCM digital source. Do not connect the
RF digital output of an LD player to this
jack. This input is permanently assigned
to the Digital Recorder source input.
35
DVI (HDCP)/Computer Video
Input: Connect the compatible DVI video
output of a computer, HDTV tuner or DVD
player to this input. This input can also
be connected to the VGA output of a con-
ventional PC (cable for connection to a
VGA output PC is included with the
k DVI/Computer Optical Digital
Audio Input: Connect the optical digital
audio output from a DVD player, HDTV
receiver, the S/P-DIF output of a compati-
ble computer sound card playing audio
files or streams, LD player or CD player
to this jack. The signal may be a Dolby
Digital signal, DTS signal or a standard
PCM digital source. Do not connect the
RF digital output of an LD player to this
jack. This input is permanently assigned
to the DVI/Computer source input.
CVPD50). Be sure to select the appropri-
ate device from the SCREEN MENU. You
must select the DVI input first by pressing
the DVI Input Selector d
on the
10
remote control or the Source Selector
&on the CVR700 front panel before you
can configure your DVI input via the
SCREEN MENU. Please note that due to
newness of HDCP technology, all HDCP-
encoded DVI outputs may not be compati-
ble with the CVR700. We recommend
that you test the compatibility of an
HDCP DVI source with your CVR700
before purchasing that source unit. In cer-
tain problematic connections, switching
to a top-quality DVI cable that is as short
as possible will help improve connection
consistency. This input is assigned to the
DVI/Computer source input.
31
FM Antenna: Connect the supplied
indoor or an optional external FM antenna
to this terminal
32
AM Antenna Terminal: Connect
the AM loop antenna supplied with the
receiver to these terminals. If an exter-
nal AM antenna is used, make connec-
tions to the AM and GND terminals in
accordance with the instructions sup-
plied with the antenna.
NOTE: If using indoor antennas, please
mount them as far away from CVR700
and CVPD50 as possible, and empirically
position them for the least amount of
possible interference from the many
digital processors inside the CVR700
and CVPD50.
33
Output to JBL Cinema Vision
CVPD50 Screen: Connect this output to
the JBL Cinema Vision CVPD50 screen
using the cable supplied with the screen.
When the CVR700 is used with the JBL
Cinema Vision CVPD50 screen, no other
video monitor connections need to be
made. Do not connect this output to any
other device. Doing so may cause serious
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CVR700R2 REMOTE CONTROL FUNCTIONS
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
Power Off (All)
Power On (All)
LCD Information Display
Input Selectors
Screen Selector
System Selector
Surround Mode Selector
Test Tone Button
Logic 7 Mode/Sports Preset Button
SPL Select Button
Audio Input Selector
Direct/Brightness/Window Button
Tone Mode/Color/List Button
OSD/Contrast Button
Angle/Tuning Mode Button
Level/Guide Button
55
53
54
a
b
c
e
d
f
g
i
52
50
h
j
51
49
G ⁄ ¤
/
/‹/›Navigation Disc
Exit/Cancel Button
H
I
J
Set Button
Preset/Page Down/Reverse Skip
k
Button
48
46
l
K
L
M
Volume Up/Down Control
Tuning Down/Reverse Search Button
Record/Stop/Pause Transport
m
o
n
p
47
Controls
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
Status/Settings/Button
Title/Freeze Button
Random/Letterbox Button
Repeat/Frame Button
A-B/Auto Button
Program/PVR Replay Button
Disc Skip/PVR List Button
Audio/Screen Saver Button
Subtitle/TV/Video Button
Light Button
q
r
t
45
43
s
u
44
42
Macro/A/B/C Buttons
Sleep/PIP Move Button
Night Mode/PIP Channel Down
Button
v
a Disc Direct/PVR Live Button
b Remote Menu/PIP Channel Up
Button
c DVD Setup/PIP On-Off/PIP Swap
Button
w
y
x
z
28
41
39
40
38
36
34
™
d JBL On Screen Library /Favorite
Button
`
29
31
e Play Transport Control Button
f Tuning Up/Forward Search Button
g Channel/Slow Play Up/Down
Control
h Preset/Page Up/Forward Skip Button
i Last Channel/Distance Button
j Screen Setup/Disc Menu/Info Button
k Zoom/Memory Button
l Alphanumeric Keys
37
35
30
32
33
o DTS Digital Surround Mode Button
p Dolby Surround Mode Button
q Mute Button
r EzSet Microphone Sensor
s IR Transmitter/Receiver
m Stereo Mode/Movies Preset Button
n DTS Neo:6 Mode/Broadcast Preset
Button
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CVR700R2 REMOTE CONTROL FUNCTIONS
IMPORTANT NOTE: The JBL Cinema
Vision remotes are powerful devices
capable of controlling virtually your entire
home cinema system. In comparison to a
traditional system of the same capabili-
ties, these remotes can replace up to 10
separate remote controls and therefore
end the confusion and clutter associated
with having a different remote for each
of your system components. In order to
achieve this goal, the JBL Cinema Vision
remotes are designed to assume the
duties of controlling different devices
within your system by first pressing one
of the 10 Selector Buttons dfg
. Pressing one of these
• Some buttons have special functions
when they are pressed and held for 3
seconds.
3 Input Selectors: Pressing one of
these buttons will perform two actions.
The CVR700 will switch to the source
selected, and the remote will switch to
the control codes for the selected source.
In order to control the CVR700 again,
press the System Selector 5, and to
control the CVPD50 screen, press the
Screen Selector 4.
• The jack on the upper right side of the
remote is reserved for future use. Do
not remove the plug provided or con-
nect any device to the jack.
• To make it easier to follow the instruc-
tions that refer to this illustration, a
larger copy may be downloaded from
the Product Support section for this
product at www.jbl.com.
Press and hold any of these buttons to
power on the CVR700, the CVPD50 and
the source device, and to begin play of
the source device.
4 Screen Selector: Press this button
to select the control codes for the
CVPD50 screen.
• The JBL Cinema Vision main remote
control may be programmed to control
up to eight devices, including the
CVR700 receiver with disc changer and
the CVPD50 screen. Before using the
remote, it is important to press the
Input Selector 3 that corresponds
to the device you wish to operate.
2
10
33
34
buttons places your remote control in a
different “page”, where the remote but-
tons are assigned control functions avail-
able for that specific purpose. For exam-
ple, all internal DVD changer functions
are accessed by pressing the DVD
5 System Selector: Press this button
to select the control codes for the CVR700.
6 DSP Surround Mode Selector: In
System mode, press this button to select
one of the DSP audio surround modes,
such as Hall 1, Hall 2 or Theater. Each
press of the button selects another mode.
See page 62 for descriptions of the vari-
ous surround modes.
Button d
first, and all CVPD50
2
• The remote is capable of operating a
wide variety of products made by other
manufacturers using control codes that
are programmed into the remote’s code
library. As described on pages 76–78,
it is simple to program the remote to
operate your device by selecting the
device type and brand, and then pro-
gramming the correct set of codes for
that brand.
Plasma Display functions are accessed
by pressing the Screen Button e
34
first, and all overall audio and system
commands for the CVR700 are accessed
by first pressing the System Button f
7 Test Tone Button: Press this button
to activate the CVR700’s test tone that is
used to calibrate speaker output levels.
See pages 50–51 for more information on
calibrating speaker output levels.
. Throughout this manual, you will
33
see references to the system being active
in DVD, SYSTEM, SCREEN, CABLE/SAT,
or other modes. This means that one of
these 10 keys is to be pressed first to
place your remote in the prescribed mode
before accessing any specific controls. It
is important to always remember to press
the appropriate page selection button
before trying to access any specific func-
tions for a system or source. This may
take a little bit of discipline and practice
at first, but it should become second
nature in a very short time.
8 Logic 7 Mode/Sports Preset
Button: When the System Selector
5 is active, press this button to select
from among the available Logic 7 sur-
round modes. (See page 62 for descrip-
tions of the various surround modes.)
When the Screen Selector 4 is
active, press this button to select the
CVPD50 picture settings that were preset
at the factory for optimal viewing of
sporting events.
0 Power Off (All): Press this button
to place the CVR700 (and the CVPD50) or
a selected device in the Standby mode.
Press and hold this button to place all
devices, including the CVR700, the
CVPD50 and any other products whose
codes you have programmed into the
remote, into the Standby mode.
1 Power On (All): Press this button
to power on the CVR700 (and CVPD50) or
another device you selected by first press-
ing the appropriate Input Selector 3.
NOTES:
NOTE: The Sports/Broadcast/ Movies
• The function names shown here are
each button’s function when used with
the CVR700 (System), its internal DVD
changer (DVD/Main) and the CVPD50
(Screen). Most buttons have additional
functions when used with other
devices, and some of these functions
may be assigned to different buttons,
depending on which device was select-
ed. The device name will appear in the
upper line of the LCD Information
Display 2 and the function
assigned to that device will appear in
the lower line when the button is
pressed. See pages 89 through 91 for a
list of the functions assigned to each
button for each device type.
Buttons imn
optimize picture
3
settings for a specific viewing medium.
The Broadcast settings are the most neu-
tral, balanced and accurate, and are opti-
mized for clarity. The Movies settings are
softer and less bright. The Sports settings
are more vibrant and optimized for fast-
moving action.
Press and hold this button to power on
all devices, including the CVR700, the
CVPD50 and any other products whose
codes you have programmed into the
remote.
2 LCD Information Display: This
two-line screen displays various informa-
tion depending on the commands that
have been entered into the remote.
Normally, the upper line will display the
current device (e.g., DVD/MAIN), and
the lower line will display the name of
the function key when pressed (e.g.,
DISC SKIP). See page 85 for informa-
tion on renaming devices and keys.
9 SPL Select Button: This button
activates the EzSet function to quickly
and accurately calibrate the speaker out-
put levels. The EzSet remote also has a
manual SPL meter function to assist with
manual setting of the output levels, or
trimming the settings to an external
source. See page 51 for more information
on EzSet.
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Audio Input Selector: Press this
button to select one of the digital audio
inputs 9)cdefhijk for
use with its source or to select the analog
audio input for that source. It is not possi-
ble to reassign a digital audio input to
another source. See page 60 for more
information on using digital inputs.
E Angle/Tuning Mode Button: When
the DVD mode is active, press this button
so select an alternate camera angle, if
available on the current DVD.
H Exit/Cancel Button: When pro-
gramming the remote, press this button
to cancel the current function and return
to the previous remote function. When
using the remote to enter frequencies for
direct tuner access or track numbers for
direct access on a CD, press this button
to clear previous entries.
When the tuner is in use, press this but-
ton to change the tuner scan mode
between manual and automatic. When
the button is pressed so that TUNE
AUTOappears in the Lower Display
Line E, only stations with acceptable
signal quality will be tuned when scan-
ning, and the tuner will play FM stations
in stereo, when available. In the Auto
mode, when the Tuning Up/Down
B Direct/Brightness/Window
Button: Press this button when the tuner
is in use to directly enter a station’s fre-
quency, or when a CD is in use to directly
enter a track number. After pressing this
button, press the appropriate Alpha-
numeric Keys l to select a station
or track.
I Set Button: This button is used to
enter settings into the CVR700’s memory,
or to confirm a selection while setting
delay distances, speaker configuration
and output level adjustments. It is used
as the Enter or OK button for most other
devices.
27
29
Buttons 8Lf
are pressed
and held, the unit will automatically
search for the next available station with
good signal strength. When the Tuning
Mode Button ois pressed so that
TUNEMANUALappears in the
Lower Display Line E, pressing and
holding the Tuning Up/Down Buttons
J Preset/Page Down/Reverse Skip
Button: This multipurpose button has a
different function depending on the
source in use.
When the Screen mode is active, press
this button to adjust the brightness of
the CVPD50. Use the ‹/›Navigation
6
Controls q
to increase or decrease
When used with the tuner, this button
scrolls through the preprogrammed sta-
tion presets.
the brightness setting.
See page 55 for more information on
screen adjustments. This button also
activates the Window function for TiVo
players. See your TiVo owner’s manual
for more information on the Window
function.
27
29
8Lf
will cause the tuner to
When used with optical sources, such as
the internal disc changer or an external
CD player, press this button once to
return to the beginning of the current
track, and again quickly to go to the
beginning of the previous track.
scan up or down through the frequencies
and stop when the button is released,
even if that frequency does not provide
an acceptable signal. In either TUNE
AUTOor TUNEMANUALmode,
each tap of the Tuning Up/Down
C Tone Mode/Color/List Button:
This button controls the tone settings,
enabling adjustment of the bass and tre-
ble boost or cut. You may also use it to
disable the tone controls, for a “flat”
response. The first press of the button
displays a TONEINmessage in the
Lower Display Line Eand on-screen
display. To disable the controls, press the
⁄/¤ Navigation Controls G until
the display reads TONEOUT. To
change the bass or treble settings, press
this button again until the desired control
appears in the Lower Display Line E
and in the on-screen display, and then
press the ⁄/¤ Navigation Controls
G until the desired setting appears.
27
29
Buttons 8Lf
will cause the
The Page Down function is used with
cable and satellite television to page
quickly through on-screen menus.
tuner to step through the frequencies in
single-step increments.
When the FM band is in use, pressing the
button so that the TUNEMANUAL
mode is activated will enable you to tune
stations with weak signals by changing
to monaural reception. See page 64 for
more information on tuner operation.
When a disc containing JPEG still images
is being played using the internal changer,
press this button to scroll to the previous
image.
K Volume Up/Down Controls: To
raise the volume, press towards the top
of the disc, where it is marked ⁄ Vol,
and to lower the volume, press towards
the bottom of the disc, where it is marked
¤ Vol. The left and right arrows on this
disc have different functions, depending
on the source in use. See Channel/Slow
Play Up/Down Control g below for
more information.
F Level/Guide Button: This button is
used to start the process of setting the
CVR700’s output levels to an external
source, such as a favorite DVD. While
the source is playing, press this button,
and then press the ⁄/¤ Navigation
Controls G until the channel to adjust
appears. Press the Set Button I to
select that channel, and then use the
⁄/¤ Navigation Controls G again
to adjust the level setting. See page 64
for more information.
When the Screen mode is active, press
this button to adjust the color tempera-
ture of the CVPD50 display. See page 55
for more information on screen adjust-
ments. This button also activates the List
function for TiVo players. See your TiVo
owner’s manual for more information on
the List function.
L Tuning Down/Reverse Search
Button: This button has different func-
tions depending on whether the tuner or
another source is in use.
G ⁄/¤/‹/›Navigation Disc:
This single disc-like button is used to nav-
igate the on-screen configuration menus,
to scroll through options lists and to
select various settings such as delay,
speaker configurations, surround modes,
digital inputs, etc. To use the button, sim-
ply press it left, right, up or down in the
direction indicated by the ⁄/¤/‹/›
icons printed on the disc.
Press this button when the tuner is in use
to change the station to one with a lower
frequency. Each tap of this button will
decrease the frequency by one increment.
When the tuner receives a strong enough
signal for adequate reception, MANUAL
TUNEDwill appear in the Lower
Display Line E. When the tuner is in
the Auto/Stereo mode, press and hold the
button to cause the tuner to scan for the
D OSD/Contrast Button: Press this
button when the System mode is active
to access the setup menu for the
CVR700’s audio functions. When the
Screen mode is active, press this button
to adjust the contrast of the CVPD50 dis-
play. See page 55 for more information on
screen adjustments.
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
next lower station with acceptable signal
strength and stop. The Lower Display
Line Ewill indicate AUTOTUNED.
When an FM Stereo station is tuned, the
display will read AUTOSTTUNED.
When the tuner is in Manual/Mono mode,
you may press and hold this button to
scan downward through the frequencies,
and the tuner will stop immediately
when you release this button, even if no
acceptable signal is detected at that
frequency.
When the internal disc changer or tuner,
or an external cable television box is in
use, press this button to access the cur-
rent settings for the device.
of the program material and adjust the
display automatically to fill the screen.
However, in some cases the material may
be a movie displayed in widescreen
(2.35:1) format, or the material may not
contain embedded information necessary
for the CVR700 to make an automatic
adjustment. The available letterbox
modes are:
For digital VCRs and game consoles, this
button performs the Back function. For
some PVRs/DVRs this button performs
the Instant Replay function.
O Title/Freeze Button: This button’s
function differs, depending on whether
the internal disc changer (DVD/Main
mode) or the Screen mode is active. To
use this button, be careful to press only
on the upper portion of the button, as
other functions are accessed by pressing
on the lower portion of the button.
16:9 – This setting is used to display 16:9
program material in the full-screen 16:9
mode on the CVPD50. This setting will
also apply a linear (consistent) stretch to
a 4:3 picture.
See page 64 for more information on
using the tuner.
When an optical player source, such as
the internal DVD changer, is in use, press
this button to search quickly in reverse
through the current track or chapter.
Depending on the type of disc used in the
internal DVD changer, each additional
press will cycle through the available
scan speeds as follows (available scan
speeds may differ for external optical
source devices):
4:3 LTRBOX TO 16:9 – This mode is used
to adjust an image which is designed to
display a 16:9 movie on a 4:3 screen. In
order to preserve the full width of the
movie on a narrower screen, the image
is reduced in size and black bars appear
above and below it. This setting zooms
in on the image, enabling it to fill the
CVPD50’s 16:9 screen without losing any
portion of the image. The image is simply
enlarged so that its two sides fit the
edges of the CVPD50 16:9 screen and the
black bars on top and bottom are cropped
off. The image is stretched in a linear
fashion (evenly throughout the frame).
In DVD/Main mode, press this button
while a disc is playing to display the cur-
rent title number. Press it again to jump
to the next numbered title on the disc.
This function may be available even
when the disc’s software prohibits title-
jumping using the Forward/Reverse
Skip Buttons Jh. Many DVD-Audio
discs require you to press this button to
access the disc menu.
DVD-Audio and DVD-Video discs: 2x, 4x,
16x, 100x
CD and VCD discs: 2x, 4x, 8x
In Screen mode, you may use this button
to pause playback of the video picture
while allowing the audio playback to con-
tinue uninterrupted, enabling you to cap-
ture an instance or frame of the video.
MP3 and WMA discs: 2x, 4x, 8x, 16x
See page 68 for more information on
using the internal DVD changer’s trans-
port controls.
2.35 LB TO 16:9 NL – This mode is used
to adjust an image from a widescreen
film which is actually at a wider ratio
than the CVPD50’s 16:9 ratio. In order to
fit on the smaller screen, the image is
compressed in a nonlinear fashion, but no
portion of the image is lost.
P Random/Letterbox Button: This
button’s function differs, depending on
whether the internal disc changer
(DVD/Main mode) or the Screen mode is
active. To use this button, be careful to
press only on the upper portion of the
button, as other functions are accessed
by pressing on the lower portion of the
button.
M Record/Stop/Pause Transport
Controls: These buttons have no func-
tion in the System or Screen modes, but
are used with sources such as the inter-
nal disc changer or external DVD or CD
players, tape or digital recorders or VCRs.
When the internal disc changer is in use,
pressing the Stop button once will place
a DVD in resume mode, meaning that you
may press the Play Button e to con-
tinue playing the disc from the point
where it was stopped. If you press the
Stop button twice, play will resume from
the beginning of the disc. Pressing the
Pause Button wwill pause play,
allowing you to step frame by frame for-
ward through a DVD with each additional
press of the Pause Button w. Press
the Play Button e, to resume normal
play, or press the Stop Button wto
stop.
2.35 LB TO 16:9 CROPPED – This mode
is an alternative adjustment for a
widescreen film. The image is not com-
pressed or scaled in any way, but the
outer edges are cropped, sacrificing a
slight amount of the original content in
exchange for 100% accurate image pro-
portions.
In DVD/Main mode, press this button for
playback in random order. The Random
function is not available when playing
DVD-Audio or DVD-Video discs unless a
playlist has been programmed, and it is
not available at all for JPEG discs.
4:3 HDTV TO 16:9 – As HDTV is new to
the broadcast industry and there is still a
considerable amount of older 4:3 stan-
dard recording and broadcast equipment
in use, 4:3 material is sometimes broad-
cast in HD 16:9 format with black or
other color bars on its sides. Since these
bars are a part of the actual picture, con-
ventional picture resizing techniques do
not work in eliminating them. This setting
is specifically designed to address this
problem. It first crops the bars off the
sides of the 16:9 picture to render it a 4:3
picture, and then performs a natural-look-
ing nonlinear stretch to fill the entire 16:9
screen.
In Screen mode, when using the internal
DVD changer, this button is only active if
the Auto Resize feature is turned off via
the SCREEN MENU (see page 57). This
button performs the Letterbox function,
which enables you to adjust the screen to
eliminate black bars that may appear on
the top and bottom or sides of the image
due to the aspect ratio of the program
material differing from the 16:9 aspect
ratio of the CVPD50. In most cases, the
CVR700’s video processor is able to auto-
matically detect the aspect ratio setting
N Status/Settings Button: This but-
ton has different functions, depending on
which device is in use.
Press it to display the CVR700 system’s
status, or an external DVD recorder’s
status.
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Letterbox adjustment is temporary
and will only apply to that disc. We
encourage you to experiment with the
modes to find one that suits you for a
given presentation.
compressed, but no portion of the image
is lost.
In the Screen mode, this button selects
automatic detection of the aspect ratio of
program material from external sources,
with playback in the 16:9 format. It will
display 4:3 images stretched to fill the
16:9 screen. This function is not available
with HD (480p or better) signals. If the
4:3 image is in letterbox format, with
bars at the top and bottom of the screen,
those bars will remain. See pages 13 and
27 for more information on configuring
aspect ratios.
2.35 LB TO 16:9 CROPPED – This mode
is an alternative adjustment for a
widescreen film. The image is not com-
pressed or scaled in any way, but the
outer edges are cropped, sacrificing a
slight amount of the original content in
exchange for 100% accurate image pro-
portions.
Additional aspect ratio adjustments are
available using the Frame Button Q.
Q Repeat/Frame Button: This but-
ton’s function differs depending on
whether the internal disc changer (DVD/
Main mode) or the Screen mode is active.
To use this button, be careful to press
only on the lower portion of the button,
as other functions are accessed by press-
ing on the upper portion of the button.
4:3 HDTV TO 16:9 – As HDTV is new to
the broadcast industry, and there is still
a lot of older 4:3 standard recording and
broadcast equipment in use, 4:3 material
is sometimes broadcast in HD 16:9 for-
mat with black or other color bars on its
sides. Since these bars are a part of the
actual picture, conventional picture resiz-
ing techniques do not work in eliminating
them. This setting is specifically designed
to address this problem. It first crops the
bars off of the sides of the 16:9 picture to
render it a 4:3 picture, and then performs
a natural-looking nonlinear stretch to fill
the entire 16:9 screen.
S Program/PVR Replay Button: In
the DVD/Main mode, press this button
to access the screen for programming
playlists. When a PVR (personal video
recorder) is in use, press this button for
replay of recorded materials. Refer to
your PVR’s owner’s manual for more
information.
In DVD mode, pressing this buttons
accesses the Repeat functions. You may
repeat a chapter, track, title, disc, file or
programmed playlist. For JPEG discs, you
may repeat one file or one folder, but the
repeat disc function is not available.
T Disc Skip/PVR List Button: In the
DVD/Main mode, press this button to
begin play of the next available disc in
the changer. When a PVR is in use, press
this button to list recorded materials.
Refer to your PVR’s owner’s manual for
more information.
In Screen mode, when using the internal
DVD changer, this button is only active if
the Auto Resize feature is turned off via
the SCREEN MENU. This button performs
the Frame function, which enables you to
set the desired aspect ratio for viewing
program materials, independent of the
aspect ratio encoded on the disc. The
following settings are available:
4:3 – This mode may be used with pro-
grams that are known to be in the 4:3
aspect ratio. The image’s original aspect
ratio is preserved unaltered, and black
bars will appear on the left and right
sides of the image to fill the CVPD50’s
16:9 aspect ratio screen.
U Audio/Screen Saver Button: This
button has different functions depending
on whether it is pressed in DVD/Main
mode or Screen mode.
16:9 – This setting is used to display 16:9
program material in the full-screen 16:9
mode on the CVPD50.
In DVD/Main mode, pressing this button
accesses the available audio soundtracks
on a DVD. In some cases, the disc may
simply contain different languages. Other
discs may switch the audio format: e.g.,
to linear PCM or Dolby Digital 5.1.
The difference between the Frame and
Letterbox functions is that the Frame
function allows access to the 4:3 and
4:3 TO 16:9 NL modes, which are mainly
useful for materials originating in the
4:3 format.
4:3 TO 16:9 NL – This mode adjusts a 4:3
aspect ratio image to fill the CVPD50’s
6:9 screen while creating a more natural-
looking picture. This is accomplished by
stretching the two sides of the picture
more than the center of the picture where
most of the content is.
Pressing this button may sometimes pro-
vide access to commentary soundtracks.
NOTE: The Letterbox and Frame func-
tions are not available with the internal
DVD/CD changer unless the DVD Auto
Resize function has been turned off using
the screen setup menus. See page 57 for
more information.
In Screen mode, pressing this button
places the CVPD50 display in Screen
Saver mode, in which a JBL logo will
appear to move around the screen. It is
important to turn on the Screen Saver
any time a still image is likely to remain
on screen for more than a few minutes,
because a still image, such as a menu
display, may be “burned” into the display,
causing permanent damage to the plasma
screen that is not covered under warranty.
This danger is not present when a moving
image is displayed.
4:3 LTRBOX TO 16:9 – This mode is used
to adjust an image which is designed to
display a 16:9 movie on a 4:3 screen. In
order to preserve the full width of the
movie on a narrower screen, the image
is reduced in size and black bars appear
above and below it. This setting zooms
in on the image, enabling it to fill the
CVPD50’s 16:9 screen without losing
any portion of the image. The image is
simply enlarged so that its two sides fit
the edges of the CVPD50 16:9 screen and
the black bars on top and bottom are
cropped off.
R A-B/Auto Button: This button’s
function differs depending on whether
the internal disc changer (DVD/Main
mode) or the Screen mode is active. To
use this button, be careful to press only
on the lower portion of the button, as
other functions are accessed by pressing
on the upper portion of the button.
V Subtitle/TV/Video Button: This
button has different functions depending
on whether it is pressed in DVD/Main
mode or Screen mode.
In the DVD mode, press this button once
to select the beginning (point A), and
again to select the end (point B) of a pas-
sage you wish to play repeatedly. Press
the button again to end repeat playback.
A-B repeat play is not available for VCD,
MP3, WMA or JPEG discs.
2.35 LB TO 16:9 NL – This mode is used
to adjust an image from a widescreen
film which is actually at a wider ratio
than the CVPD50’s 16:9 ratio. In order to
fit on the smaller screen, the image is
In DVD/Main mode, press this button to
select a subtitle language or to turn sub-
titling off.
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Screen mode, or when used with a
video source device that is used for ob-
taining television broadcasts, such as a
cable box, satellite receiver, TiVo, PVR,
DVR or VCR, this button allows you to
select between the television signal or
one of the device’s video inputs. See the
device’s owner’s manual for more infor-
mation on the use of this function.
Z Night Mode/PIP Channel Down
Button: This button’s function differs
depending on the device in use when
it is pressed.
to turn on the PIP function, and again to
turn it off. Pressing and holding this but-
ton for several seconds causes the main
source to appear in the PIP inset display,
and the PIP source to appear in the main
display. Pressing and holding the button
again returns the PIP source to the inset,
and the main source to the main display.
When pressed in the System mode, this
button activates the Night mode, preserv-
ing dialogue (center-channel) intelligibility
at low volume levels when available in
specially encoded Dolby Digital sources.
™
d JBL On Screen Library / Favorite
W Light Button: Press this button to
activate the remote’s backlight for ease
of use in darkened rooms. The light will
remain active for 7 seconds after this but-
ton has been pressed, and will remain lit
for an additional 7 seconds after any
other button on the remote has been
pressed.
Button: This button performs different
functions depending on whether it is
used with the internal DVD changer or
another source.
When used with a compatible device
whose video output has been connected
to the Picture-in-Picture Composite
Video Input a, it changes the channel
of the PIP device to the next lower one. It
has no effect on the CVR700 or CVPD50.
In DVD/Main mode, this button accesses
the JBL On Screen Library, which displays
on screen a thumbnail image and descrip-
tion of each disc currently loaded in the
CVR700’s internal changer, including disc
type and title if available. Use the
⁄/¤/‹/›Navigation Controls G
and the Set Button I to conveniently
select and play any loaded disc.
a Disc Direct/PVR Live Button: This
button’s function differs depending on
which device is in use when it is pressed.
X Macro/A/B/C Buttons: Press these
buttons to store or recall a “Macro”, a
sequence of commands that you may pro-
gram into the remote. See page 80 for
more information on programming and
using macros. These buttons have unique
functions when used with game con-
soles, cable TV boxes and PVRs. See the
owner’s manual for the appropriate
device for further information.
In DVD/Main mode, press it, and then
press the numeric key corresponding to
the position number of the disc you wish
to play to immediately begin playback of
that disc.
When used with cable television boxes or
satellite receivers, pressing this button
scrolls through your list of prepro-
grammed favorite channels.
When a PVR is in use, this button switches
to play of the signal currently being
received by the PVR. See the PVR’s
owner’s manual for more information.
e Play Transport Control Button:
This button is used with the internal DVD
changer or an external DVD player, VCR,
tape deck, digital recorder, CD player or
any other device with a transport mecha-
nism to begin playback.
Y Sleep/PIP Move Button: This but-
ton has different functions depending on
which device is in use when it is pressed.
b Remote Menu/PIP Channel Up
Button: This button’s function differs
depending on whether it is pressed when
a picture-in-picture source is in use.
In the System mode, the Sleep function
is activated to automatically place the
CVR700 and CVPD50 in Standby mode
after a period of time. Each press of the
button changes the time until turn-off: 90
minutes, 80 minutes, 70 minutes, 60 min-
utes, 50 minutes, 40 minutes, 30 minutes,
20 minutes, 10 minutes, Sleep mode Off,
and then cycling back to 90 minutes, and
so forth. When the Sleep timer is in use,
the front-panel displays will dim to half
brightness.
In System mode, this button accesses
the menu system for the remote control,
enabling you to program product codes,
use the EzSet speaker calibration system,
record macros, rename functions, and
perform other functions, as described
on pages 76 through 91.
f Tuning Up/Forward Search
Button: This button has different func-
tions depending on whether the tuner or
another source is in use.
Press this button when the tuner is in use
to change the station to one with a higher
frequency. Each tap of this button will
increase the frequency by one increment.
When the tuner receives a strong enough
signal for adequate reception, MANUAL
TUNEDwill appear in the Lower
Display Line E. When the tuner is in
the Auto/Stereo mode, press and hold
the button to cause the tuner to scan for
the next higher station with acceptable
signal strength and stop. The Lower
Display Line Ewill indicate AUTO
TUNED. When an FM Stereo station is
tuned, the display will read AUTOST
TUNED. When the tuner is in Manual/
Mono mode, you may press and hold this
button to scan upward through the fre-
quencies, and the tuner will stop immedi-
ately when you release this button, even
if no acceptable signal is detected at that
frequency. See page 64 for more informa-
tion on using the tuner.
When used with a compatible device
whose video output has been connected
to the Picture-in-Picture Composite
Video Input a, pressing this button
changes the channel of the PIP device to
the next higher one. It has no effect on
the CVR700 or CVPD50.
In the Screen mode, this button places
the CVPD50 display in Standby mode,
without affecting use of the CVR700. This
function may be preferred for audio-only
listening sessions to prevent burning the
plasma display.
c DVD Setup/PIP On-Off/PIP Swap
Button: This button’s function differs
depending on whether it is used with the
internal DVD changer, or with a source
whose video output has been connected
to the Picture-in-Picture Composite
Video Input a.
When a composite video output from a
PIP-capable device, such as a cable box,
has been connected to the Picture-in-
Picture Composite Video Input a,
pressing this button enables you to move
the PIP inset display around the CVPD50
screen, using the ⁄/¤/‹/ ›
When used with the DVD changer, this
button accesses the DVD setup menu
and enables you to configure the DVD
changer.
Navigation Disc q.
When used in Screen mode with a PIP
source connected, press this button once
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When an optical player source, such as
the internal DVD changer, is in use, press
this button to search quickly forward
through the current track or chapter.
Depending on the type of disc used in the
internal DVD changer, each additional
press will cycle through the available
scan speeds as follows (available scan
speeds may differ for external optical
source devices):
When used with optical sources, such as
the internal disc changer or an external
CD player, press this button once to skip
to the beginning of the next track.
then either use the Preset Up/Down
Buttons Jh to scroll to the desired
preset station, or use the Alphanumeric
Keys l to directly enter the preset sta-
tion location.
The Page Up function is used with cable
and satellite television to page quickly
through on-screen menus. When a disc
containing JPEG still images is being
played using the internal changer, press
this button to scroll to the next image.
In DVD/Main mode, this button may be
used while a DVD-Video disc is playing to
zoom the picture so that it is enlarged.
There are four steps to the zoom function,
each progressively larger. Continue press-
ing the button to cycle through the steps
and return to the normal view. Depending
on the disc, you may also be able to use
the ⁄/¤/‹/›Navigation Controls
G to view different areas of the
enlarged image.
DVD-Audio and DVD-Video discs: 2x, 4x,
16x, 100x
i Distance/Last Channel Button:
This button’s function differs depending
on whether it is used in the System mode
or with another source.
CD and VCD discs: 2x, 4x, 8x
MP3 and WMA discs: 2x, 4x, 8x, 16x
In the System mode, this button is used
to enter the distance from each speaker
group to the listening position to avoid
unnatural sound caused by the speakers
being placed at varying distances from
the listener, which could result in delay
artifacts. When this button is pressed,
DISTFRONT10FTwill appear
in the Lower Display Line E, with
FRONTand 10FTboth flashing.
Press the Set Button sto select
the front speaker group, and FRONT
will stop flashing. Use the ⁄/¤
Navigation Controls qto select the
desired distance, and press the Set
Button sagain to enter it. Use the
⁄/¤ Navigation Controls qto
scroll through the remaining speaker
groups: CENTER, SIDE-S(side
surround) or BACK-S(back surround –
this setting may only be available after a
6.1-channel bitstream has been detected;
for example, by playing a Dolby Digital
EX DVD).
See page 68 for more information on
using the internal DVD changer’s trans-
port controls.
l Alphanumeric Keys: Select num-
bers by pressing these keys. When
renaming functions or devices on the
remote, these keys may be used to
select letters.
g Channel/Slow Play Up/Down
Control: These controls use the ‹/›
icons on the same disc as the Volume
Up/Down Controls K. The left and
right arrows have different functions,
depending on the source in use.
m Stereo Mode/Movies Preset
Button: This button’s function varies
depending on whether the System or
Screen mode has been selected.
When a disc containing JPEG still images
is being played using an external disc
player, press the right side of this button
to advance to the next image on the disc
or the left side of this button to return to
the previous image. (When using the
internal changer, the Page Up/Down
Buttons Jh perform this function.)
In System mode, this button is used to
select a stereo listening mode. When the
button is pressed so that 2CHANNEL
STEREOappears in the Lower
Display Line Eand on-screen display,
and the DSP and Surround Off
Surround Mode Indicators Gare lit,
you will enjoy a two-channel presenta-
tion of the sound along with the benefits
of bass management. Depending on
whether your system is configured for 5.1
or 6.1/7.1 channels, the next press of the
button will cause 5CHSTEREOand
then 7CHSTEREOto appear, and
the stereo signal will be routed to all five
(or seven) speakers. See page 62 for
more information on stereo playback
modes.
When a cable television box, satellite
receiver, HDTV tuner or TiVO device is in
use, press the right side of this button to
tune in to the next higher channel, or the
left side to tune in to the next lower
channel.
When used with most video sources, this
button returns to the previously selected
broadcast channel.
When the internal DVD changer or an
external DVD player is in use and a DVD
is playing, press the right side of this but-
ton once to switch to the DVD slow for-
ward play mode. Each additional press
of the right side of the button will cycle
through the available slow-play speeds of
1/2x, 1/4x and 1/8x. Pressing the left side
of the button switches to the DVD slow
reverse play mode. Additional presses of
the left side of the button cycles through
the available slow-play speeds of 1/2x,
1/4x and 1/8x. No slow-play speeds are
available for CDs or other disc types.
j Screen Setup/Disc Menu/Info
Button: This button is used in Screen
mode to access the setup menus to con-
figure and adjust the CVPD50 display
screen. In DVD mode, this button access-
es the menu on the current disc, enabling
you to select the main feature or accom-
panying featurettes for playback or make
other selections, depending on how the
disc is programmed.
In the Screen mode, pressing this button
automatically adjusts the screen’s picture
settings to preprogrammed settings that
are recommended as optimal for viewing
movies.
NOTE: The Sports/Broadcast/ Movies
Buttons imn
optimize picture
3
settings for a specific viewing medium.
The Broadcast settings are the most neu-
tral, balanced and accurate, and are opti-
mized for clarity. The Movies settings are
softer and less bright. The Sports settings
are more vibrant and optimized for fast-
moving action.
k Memory/Zoom Button: When used
with the tuner, press this button to enter
the currently tuned radio station into a
desired preset location using the
Alphanumeric Keys l to select the
preset location between the numbers 01
and 30. Press this button a second time
to store your selection. To recall that sta-
tion later, select the tuner as the source,
h Preset/Page Up/Forward Skip
Button: This multipurpose button has
a different function depending on the
source in use.
When used with the tuner, this button
scrolls through the preprogrammed sta-
tion presets.
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
n DTS Neo:6 Mode/Broadcast
Preset Button: This button’s function
varies depending on whether the System
or Screen mode has been selected.
s IR Transmitter/Receiver: The
infrared emitters and receivers behind
the plastic lens at the top of the remote
communicate the remote codes to the
CVR700 and other programmed devices.
Be certain that the lens is not covered
when using the remote, and point the
lens toward the CVR700 for the best
results. In learning mode, the remote
receives IR codes to be learned through
a receiver behind the lens. See page 78
for more information on learning remote
codes.
In System mode, this button is used to
select a DTS Neo:6 audio surround mode.
See page 62 for more information on the
available DTS Neo:6 options.
In the Screen mode, pressing this button
automatically adjusts the screen’s picture
settings to preprogrammed settings that
are recommended as optimal for viewing
broadcast television programs.
NOTE: DO NOT remove the rubber plug
that is supplied to cover the jack on the
upper right side of the remote. The jack is
not active and is reserved for future use.
NOTE: The Sports/Broadcast/ Movies
Buttons imn
optimize picture
3
settings for a specific viewing medium.
The Broadcast settings are the most neu-
tral, balanced and accurate, and are opti-
mized for clarity. The Movies settings are
softer and less bright. The Sports settings
are more vibrant and optimized for fast-
moving action.
o DTS Digital Surround Mode
Button: In System mode, when a DTS-
encoded digital source is playing, each
press of this button will scroll through the
available DTS audio surround modes. The
specific choice of modes will vary accord-
ing to the type of encoding on the disc
and your system’s speaker configuration
(5.1-channel or 6.1/7.1-channel). See
page 62 for more information on DTS
modes.
p Dolby Surround Mode Button:
In System mode, this button is used to
select from the available Dolby audio sur-
round modes. Each press of this button
will select one of the Dolby Pro Logic II
(available in 5.1-channel systems) or IIx
(available in 6.1/7.1-channel systems)
modes, Dolby 3 Stereo, or Dolby Digital
when a Dolby Digital-encoded source is
in use. Each press of this button will
scroll through the available modes. See
page 62 for more information on Dolby
modes.
q Mute Button: Press this button to
momentarily silence the CVR700. Press
it again, or use the Volume Up/Down
Control K to restore audio.
r EzSet Microphone Sensor: The
microphone sensor that is used by the
EzSet system is behind the three slots
at the top of the remote control. When
using EzSet to calibrate the CVR700, be
certain that the slots are not covered.
See page 51 for more information
on EzSet.
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CVR700R1 REMOTE CONTROL FUNCTIONS
The CVR700R1 remote is capable of performing most of the same functions as the CVR700R2 remote control, which is intended mainly
for system setup, but is smaller and easier to handle on a day-to-day basis. The most noticeable functions missing from the CVR700R1
remote are the LCD information screen, and the EzSet speaker calibration function.
As it is a programmable, learning remote that is capable of controlling the source devices in your system, you will need to program it
separately from the CVR700R2 remote with the codes for your other components. It is already preprogrammed at the factory to control
your CVR700 and its internal disc changer, as well as the CVPD50 screen.
1
Power On (All)
DVD/Tuner/Auxiliary/VCR/CBL/SAT
40
2
Input Selectors
39
3
Sports, Broadcast and Movies
1
Preset Selectors
2
4
4
5
6
⁄/¤ Navigation Buttons
Level/DVD Setup/Guide Button
‹/›Navigation Buttons
Set Button
3
5
7
38
6
8
9
Exit/Cancel Button
Direct/Brightness/Window Button
Game/Digital Recorder/Computer
6
7
9
10
37
Input Selectors
11
8
4
Mute Button
Volume Up/Down Control
Disc Direct/Favorite Button
Alphanumeric Keys*
Angle/Tuning Mode (Tune-Manual)
12
36
13
14
15
35
33
10
12
34
32
11
Button
16
Screen Saver/Letterbox Button
17
18
19
PIP On-Off/PIP Swap Button
Auto/PIP Channel Up Button
Learn/Screen Standby/PIP Channel
13
31
Down Button
30
20
Light Button
14
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Program/Record Button
Freeze/PVR List Button
Pause Button
Frame/Stop/PVR Live Button
Forward Play Button
Status/TV/Video/PVR Play Button
Tuning Down/Reverse Search Button
Memory/Zoom Button
Tuning Up/Forward Search Button
Preset/Page Up/Down/Forward/
29
28
26
24
22
15
17
27
25
16
18
23
19
Reverse Skip Buttons
20
31
Disc Skip/Last Channel Buttons
32
Picture/Channel Up/Down and Slow
Play Forward/Reverse Button
33
System Selector
Screen Selector
Tone Mode/Color/List Button
OSD/Contrast Button
34
35
*The alphanumeric keys function as such for all devices except in System mode of the
CVR700, where pressing each key will access certain audio functions as follows:
36
™
37
JBL On Screen Library /
1: Dolby Surround Mode Selector
2: DTS Digital Surround Mode Selector
3: DTS Neo:6 Surround Mode Selector
4: Logic 7 Surround Mode Selector
5: DSP Surround Mode Selector
6: Stereo Mode Selector
7: Test Tone
Settings/Distance Button
38
Menu/Info/Audio Input Selector
Power Off (All)
39
8: No additional function
9: Night Mode
40
IR Transmitter/Receiver
0: Sleep Timer
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMPORTANT NOTE: The JBL Cinema
Vision remotes are powerful devices
capable of controlling virtually your entire
home cinema system. In comparison to a
traditional system of the same capabili-
ties, these remotes can replace up to 10
separate remote controls and therefore
end the confusion and clutter associated
with having a different remote for each
of your system components. In order to
achieve this goal, the JBL Cinema Vision
remotes are designed to assume the
duties of controlling different devices
within your system by first pressing one
of the 10 Selector Buttons dfg
. Pressing one of these
another device you selected by first
In DVD mode, this button accesses the
DVD setup menu described on page 53,
and enables you to configure the DVD
changer.
pressing the appropriate Input Selector
2
10
.
Press and hold this button to place all
devices, including the CVR700, the
CVPD50 and any other products whose
codes you have programmed into the
remote, into the Standby mode.
‹ ›
/
6
Navigation Buttons: These
buttons are used to navigate the on-
screen configuration menus, to scroll
through options lists and to select various
settings such as delay, speaker configura-
tions, surround modes, digital inputs, etc.
2
DVD/Tuner/Auxiliary/VCR/CBL/
SAT Input Selectors: Pressing one of
these buttons will perform two actions.
First, the CVR700 will switch to the
source selected. Then, the remote will
switch to the control codes for the selected
source. In order to control the CVR700
33
7
Set Button: This button is used to
enter settings into the CVR700’s memory,
or to confirm a selection while setting
delay times, speaker configuration and
output level adjustments. It is used as
the Enter or OK button for most other
devices.
2
10
33
34
again, press the System Selector
,
buttons places your remote control in a
different “page”, where the remote but-
tons are assigned control functions avail-
able for that specific purpose. For exam-
ple, all internal DVD changer functions
are accessed by pressing the DVD
and to control the CVPD50 screen, press
34
the Screen Selector
.
8
Exit/Cancel Button: When pro-
Press and hold any of these buttons to
power on the CVR700, the CVPD50 and
the source device, and to begin play of
the source device.
gramming the remote, press this button
to cancel the current function and return
to the previous remote function. When
using the remote to enter frequencies for
direct tuner access or track numbers for
direct access on a CD, press this button
to clear previous entries.
Button d
first, and all CVPD50
2
Plasma Display functions are accessed
3
Sports, Broadcast and Movies
by pressing the Screen Button e
34
Preset Selectors: When the Screen
first, and all overall audio and system
commands for the CVR700 are accessed
by first pressing the System Button
33
Selector
is active, press any of
9
these buttons to select the CVPD50 pic-
ture settings that were preset at the fac-
tory for optimum viewing of sporting
events, broadcast television programs or
movies.
Direct/Brightness/Window
Button: Press this button when the
tuner is in use to directly enter a station’s
frequency, or when a CD is in use to
directly enter a track number. After press-
ing this button, press the appropriate
Alphanumeric Keys l to select a
station or track.
f
. Throughout this manual, you
33
will see references to the system being
active in DVD, SYSTEM, SCREEN, CABLE/
SAT, or other modes. This means that one
of these 10 keys is to be pressed first to
place your remote in the prescribed mode
before accessing any specific controls. It
is important to always remember to press
the appropriate page selection key before
trying to access any specific functions for
a system or source. This may take a little
bit of discipline and practice at first, but
it should become second nature in a very
short time.
NOTE: The Sports/Broadcast/ Movies
Buttons imn
optimize picture
3
settings for a specific viewing medium.
The Broadcast settings are the most neu-
tral, balanced and accurate, and are opti-
mized for clarity. The Movies settings are
softer and less bright. The Sports settings
are more vibrant and optimized for fast-
moving action.
When the Screen mode is active, press
this button to adjust the brightness of the
CVPD50. See page 55 for more informa-
tion on screen adjustments. This button
also activates the Window function for
TiVo players. See your TiVo owner’s man-
ual for more information on the Window
function.
⁄
4
¤
/
Navigation Buttons: These
buttons are used to navigate the on-
screen configuration menus, to scroll
through options lists and to select various
settings such as delay, speaker configura-
tions, surround modes, digital inputs, etc.
Each function on the CVR700R1 remote
has the same effect on the CVR700,
CVPD50 and other devices as described
earlier for the CVR700R2 remote control
functions; however, functions may be
combined on different keys. Each key has
an independent function depending on
the device currently in use. Be careful to
press the input selector, or the System or
Screen mode selector, corresponding to
the device you wish to control prior to
pressing a button to be sure that your
button press will operate the desired
function. Refer to the function list on
pages 96 through 97 for information on
which function is assigned to a given key
for a given device.
NOTE: The Sports/Broadcast/ Movies
Buttons imn
optimize picture
3
settings for a specific viewing medium.
The Broadcast settings are the most neu-
tral, balanced and accurate, and are opti-
mized for clarity. The Movies settings are
softer and less bright. The Sports settings
are more vibrant and optimized for fast-
moving action.
5
Level/DVD Setup/Guide Button:
This button is used to start the process of
setting the CVR700’s output levels to an
external source, such as a favorite DVD.
While the source is playing, press this
¤
button, and then press the ⁄
/
10
Game/Digital Recorder/
4
Navigation Controls
until the
Computer Input Selectors: Pressing
one of these buttons will perform two
actions. First, the CVR700 will switch to
the source selected. Then, the remote
will switch to the control codes for the
selected source. In order to control
the CVR700 again, press the System
33
channel to adjust appears. Press the
7
Set Button
to select that channel,
and then use the ⁄
/
Navigation
¤
4
Controls
again to adjust the
level setting. See page 64 for more
information.
1
Power On (All): Press this button
Selector
, and to control the
to power on the CVR700, the CVPD50 or
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CVPD50 screen, press the Screen
4: Logic 7 Surround Mode Selector:
Press this button to select from among
the available Logic 7 surround modes.
(See page 62 for descriptions of the vari-
ous surround modes.)
15
Angle/Tuning Mode (Tune-
34
Selector
.
Manual) Button: When the DVD mode
is active, press this button to select an
alternate camera angle if available on
the current DVD.
Press and hold any of these buttons to
power on the CVR700, the CVPD50 and
the source device, and to begin play of
the source device.
5: DSP Surround Mode Selector: Press
this button to select one of the DSP audio
surround modes, such as Hall 1, Hall 2 or
Theater. Each press of the button selects
another mode. See page 62 for descrip-
tions of surround modes.
When the tuner is in use, press this but-
ton to change the tuner mode between
manual and automatic. When the button
is pressed so that TUNEAUTO
appears in the Lower Display Line E,
only stations with acceptable signal quality
will be tuned when scanning, and the
tuner will play FM stations in stereo,
when available. In the Auto mode, when
the Tuning Up/Down Buttons 8L
11
Mute Button: Press this button to
momentarily silence the CVR700. Press
it again, or use the Volume Up/Down
12
Control
to restore audio.
12
Volume Up/Down Control: To raise
the volume, press towards the top of the
button (marked ⁄); to lower the volume,
press towards the bottom of the button,
6: Stereo Mode Selector: This button is
used to select a stereo listening mode.
When the button is pressed so that
SURROUNDOFFappears in the
Lower Display Line E, the CVR700
will operate in a bypass mode with true,
fully analog, two-channel left/right stereo
mode with no surround processing or
bass management, as opposed to other
modes where digital processing is used.
When the button is pressed so that
SURROUNDOFFappears in the
Lower Display Line E, and the DSP
and Surround Off Surround Mode
Indicators Gare lit, you will enjoy a
two-channel presentation of the sound
along with the benefits of bass manage-
ment. Depending on whether your system
is configured for 5.1 orf 6.1/7.1 channels,
the next press of the button will cause
either 5CHSTEREOor 7CH
STEREOto appear, and the stereo
signal will be routed to all five (or seven)
speakers. See page 62 for more informa-
tion on stereo playback modes.
where it is marked
¤.
27
29
f
are pressed, the unit will
13
Disc Direct/Favorite Button: In
DVD mode, press this button, and then
press the numeric key corresponding to
the position number of the disc you wish
to play to immediately begin playback of
that disc.
automatically search for the next avail-
able station with good signal strength.
When this button is pressed so that
TUNEMANUALappears in the
Lower Display Line E, pressing and
holding the Tuning Up/Down Buttons
27
29
8Lf
will cause the tuner
When used with cable television boxes or
satellite receivers, pressing this button
scrolls through your list of preprogrammed
favorite channels.
to scan up or down and stop when you
release the button, even if there is no
acceptable signal at that frequency. In
either Auto or Manual mode, each tap of
the Tuning Up/Down Buttons 8L
14
Alphanumeric Keys: Select num-
bers or letters by pressing these keys,
except in System mode (when operating
the audio section of the CVR700), in
which case each key has the following
functions:
f
27
29
will move the frequency up
or down in single-step increments. When
the FM band is in use, pressing the button
so that the Tune Manual mode is activated
will enable you to tune stations with
weak signals by changing to monaural
reception. See page 64 for more informa-
tion on tuner operation.
1: Dolby Surround Mode Selector:
This button is used to select from the
available Dolby audio surround modes.
Each press of this button will select one
of the Dolby Pro Logic II (available in
5.1-channel systems) or IIx (available in
6.1/7.1-channel systems) modes, Dolby 3
Stereo, or Dolby Digital when a Dolby
Digital-encoded source is in use. Each
press of this button will scroll through the
available modes. See page 62 for more
information on Dolby modes.
16
Letterbox/Screen Saver Button:
7: Test Tone: Press this button to activate
the CVR700’s test tone that is used to cal-
ibrate speaker output levels. See pages
50 through 52 for more information on
calibrating speaker output levels. (The
EzSet function is not available on the
secondary remote.)
This button performs the Letterbox func-
tion, which enables you to adjust the
screen to eliminate black bars that may
appear on the top and bottom or sides of
the image due to the aspect ratio of the
program material differing from the 16:9
aspect ratio of the CVPD50. In most
cases, the CVR700’s video processor is
able to automatically detect the aspect
ratio setting of the program material and
adjust the display automatically to fill the
screen. However, in some cases the mate-
rial may be a movie displayed in wide-
screen format, or the material may not
contain embedded information necessary
for the CVR700 to make an automatic
adjustment. The available letterbox
modes are:
8: No Additional Function
2: DTS Digital Surround Mode
9: Night Mode: This button activates the
Night mode, which preserves dialogue
(center-channel) intelligibility at low vol-
ume levels when available in specially
encoded Dolby Digital sources.
Selector: When a DTS-encoded digital
source is playing, each press of this but-
ton will scroll through the available DTS
audio surround modes. The specific
choice of modes will vary according to the
type of encoding on the disc and your sys-
tem’s speaker configuration (5.1-channel
or 6.1/7.1-channel). When a DTS source is
not in use, this button has no function in
System mode. See page 62 for more
information on DTS modes.
0: Sleep Timer: The Sleep function is
activated to automatically place the
CVR700 and CVPD50 in Standby mode
after a period of time. Each press of the
button changes the time until turn-off: 90
minutes, 80 minutes, 70 minutes, 60 min-
utes, 50 minutes, 40 minutes, 30 minutes,
20 minutes, 10 minutes, Sleep mode Off,
and then cycling back to 90 minutes, and
so forth. When the Sleep timer is in use,
the front-panel displays will dim to half
brightness.
16:9 – This setting is used to display 16:9
program material in the full-screen 16:9
mode on the CVPD50. This setting will
also apply a linear (consistent) stretch to
a 4:3 picture.
3: DTS Neo:6 Surround Mode
Selector: This button is used to select
a DTS Neo:6 audio surround mode. See
page 62 for more information on the
available DTS Neo:6 options.
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4:3 LTRBOX TO 16:9 – This mode is used
to adjust an image which is designed to
display a 16:9 movie on a 4:3 screen. In
order to preserve the full width of the
movie on a narrower screen, the image
is reduced in size and black bars appear
above and below it. This setting zooms
in on the image, enabling it to fill the
CVPD50’s 16:9 screen without losing any
portion of the image. The image is simply
enlarged so that its two sides fit the
edges of the CVPD50 16:9 screen and the
black bars on top & bottom are cropped
off. The image is stretched in a linear
fashion (evenly throughout the frame).
which a JBL logo will appear to move
around the screen. It is important to turn
on the Screen Saver any time a still
image is likely to remain on screen for
more than a few minutes, as a still
image, such as a menu display, may be
“burned” into the display, causing perma-
nent damage to the plasma screen that is
not covered under warranty. This danger
is not present when a moving image is
displayed.
connected to the Picture-in-Picture
Composite Video Input a, pressing
this button changes the channel of the
PIP device to the next lower one. It has
no effect on the CVR700 or CVPD50.
Light Button: Press this button to
20
activate the remote’s backlight for ease
of use in darkened rooms. The light will
remain active for 7 seconds after this but-
ton has been pressed, and will remain lit
for an additional 7 seconds after any other
button on the remote has been pressed.
17
PIP On-Off/PIP Swap Button:
When used with a PIP source whose
composite video output has been con-
nected to the Picture-in-Picture
Composite Video Input a, press this
button once to turn on the PIP function,
and again to turn it off.
21 Program/Record Button: In the
DVD mode, press this button to access
the screen for programming play lists.
2.35 LB TO 16:9 NL – This mode is used
to adjust an image from a widescreen
film which is actually at a wider ratio
than the CVPD50’s 16:9 ratio. In order to
fit on the smaller screen, the image is
compressed in a nonlinear fashion, but
no portion of the image is lost.
The Record function is used when the DR
10
Input Selector
has been activated
for use with an external recorder.
Pressing and holding this button for sev-
eral seconds causes the main source to
appear in the PIP inset display, and the
PIP source to appear in the main display.
Pressing and holding the button again
returns the PIP source to the inset, and
the main source to the main display.
22
Freeze/PVR List Button: In Screen
mode, you may use this button to pause
playback of the video picture while allow-
ing the audio playback to continue unin-
terrupted.
2.35 LB TO 16:9 CROPPED – This mode
is an alternative adjustment for a
widescreen film. The image is not com-
pressed or scaled in any way, but the
outer edges are cropped, sacrificing a
slight amount of the original content in
exchange for 100% accurate image pro-
portions.
When a PVR is in use, press this button
to list recorded materials. Refer to your
PVR’s owner’s manual for information.
18
Auto/PIP Channel Up Button: In
the Screen mode, this button selects
automatic detection of the aspect ratio
of program material, with playback in the
16:9 format, inserting black bars on the
right and left sides as required for 4:3
images, unless you have configured your
system to display 4:3 images stretched
to fill the 16:9 screen. This function is
not available with HD (480p or better)
signals. See pages 13 and 27 for more
information on configuring aspect ratios.
23
Pause Button: This button may be
used with the internal disc changer or
with an external DVD or CD player or
other playback device. Pressing the Pause
button will pause play, allowing you to
step forward frame by frame through a
DVD with each press of the Forward
30
4:3 HDTV TO 16:9 – As HDTV is new to
the broadcast industry and there is still a
considerable amount of older 4:3 stan-
dard recording & broadcast equipment in
use, 4:3 material is sometimes broadcast
in HD 16:9 format with black or other
color bars on its sides. Since these bars
are a part of the actual picture, conven-
tional picture resizing techniques do not
work in eliminating them. This setting is
specifically designed to address this
problem. It first crops the bars off the
sides of the 16:9 picture to render it a 4:3
picture, and then performs a natural-look-
ing nonlinear stretch to fill the entire 16:9
screen.
Skip Button
Button again, or the Play Button
. Press the Pause
25
,
to resume normal play.
24
Frame/Stop/PVR Live Button: In
Screen mode, this button performs the
Frame function, which enables you to
set the desired aspect ratio for viewing
program materials, independent of the
aspect ratio encoded on the disc. The
following settings are available through
the Frame function:
When used with a PIP-capable device
whose composite video output has been
connected to the Picture-in-Picture
Composite Video Input a, pressing
this button changes the channel of the
PIP device to the next higher one. It has
no effect on the CVR700 or CVPD50.
19
Learn/Screen Standby/PIP
16:9 – This setting is used to display 16:9
program material in the full-screen 16:9
mode on the CVPD50.
Channel Down Button: Press this but-
ton to begin the process of “learning” the
codes from another product’s remote into
the CVR700 secondary remote. (See page
93 for more information on using the
remote’s learning function.)
The Letterbox adjustment is temporary,
and will only apply to that disc. We
encourage you to experiment with the
modes to find one that suits you for a
given presentation.
4:3 TO 16:9 NL – This mode adjusts a 4:3
aspect ratio image to fill the CVPD50’s
16:9 screen while creating a more natural
looking picture. This is accomplished by
stretching the two sides of the picture
more than the center of the picture where
most of the content is.
NOTE: The Letterbox and Frame func-
tions are not available with the internal
DVD/CD changer unless the DVD Auto
Resize function has been turned off using
the Screen setup menus. See page 57 for
more information.
When used in the Screen mode, this but-
ton places the CVPD50 display in Standby
mode, without affecting use of the CVR700.
This function may be preferred for audio-
only listening sessions to aviod burning a
still image into the plasma display.
4:3 LTRBOX TO 16:9 – This mode is used
to adjust an image which is designed to
display a 16:9 movie on a 4:3 screen. In
order to preserve the full width of the
When pressed and held for at least two
seconds, this button places the CVPD50
display screen in Screen Saver mode, in
When used with a PIP-capable device
whose composite video output has been
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
movie on a narrower screen, the image
is reduced in size and black bars appear
above and below it. This setting zooms
in on the image, enabling it to fill the
CVPD50’s 16:9 screen without losing
any portion of the image. The image is
simply enlarged so that its two sides fit
the edges of the CVPD50 16:9 screen and
the black bars on top and bottom are
cropped off.
The stop function may be used with the
internal disc changer or with an external
DVD or CD player or other playback
device. When the internal disc changer is
in use, pressing the Stop button once will
place a DVD in resume mode, meaning
that you may press the Play Button e
Depending on the type of disc used in the
internal DVD changer, each additional
press will cycle through the available
scan speeds as follows (available scan
speeds may differ for external optical
source devices):
DVD-Audio and DVD-Video discs: 2x, 4x,
16x, 100x
25
to continue playing the disc from the
point where it was stopped. If you press
the Stop button twice, play will resume
from the beginning of the disc.
CD and VCD discs: 2x, 4x, 8x
MP3 and WMA discs: 2x, 4x, 8x, 16x
2.35 LB TO 16:9 NL – This mode is used
to adjust an image from a widescreen
film which is actually at a wider ratio
than the CVPD50’s 16:9 ratio. In order to
fit on the smaller screen, the image is
compressed, but no portion of the image
is lost.
See page 68 for more information on
using the internal DVD changer’s trans-
port controls.
When a PVR is in use, this button switches
to play of the signal currently being
received by the PVR. See the PVR’s
owner’s manual for more information.
28
Memory/Zoom Button: When
25
used with the tuner, press this button to
enter the currently tuned radio station
into a desired preset location using the
14
Forward Play Button: This button
may be used with the internal disc changer
or with an external DVD or CD player or
other playback device.
2.35 LB TO 16:9 CROPPED – This mode
is an alternative adjustment for a
widescreen film. The image is not com-
pressed or scaled in any way, but the
outer edges are cropped, sacrificing a
slight amount of the original content in
exchange for 100% accurate image pro-
portions.
Numeric Keys
to select the preset
location between the numbers 01 and 30.
Press this button a second time to store
your selection. To recall that station later,
select the tuner as the source, then either
26
Status/TV/Video/PVR Play
Button: Press it to display the CVR700
system’s status, or an external DVD
recorder’s status.
30
use the Preset Up/Down Buttons
In Screen mode, or when used with a
video source device that is used for
obtaining television broadcasts, such as a
cable box, satellite receiver, TiVo, PVR,
DVR or VCR, this button allows you to
select between the television signal or
one of the device’s video inputs. See the
device’s owner’s manual for more infor-
mation on the use of this function.
to scroll to the desired preset station, or
14
use the Numeric Keys
to directly
4:3 HDTV TO 16:9 – As HDTV is new to
the broadcast industry and there are still
a considerable amount of older 4:3 stan-
dard recording and broadcast equipment
in use, 4:3 material is sometimes broad-
cast in HD 16:9 format with black or other
color bars on its sides. Since these bars
are a part of the actual picture, conven-
tional picture resizing techniques do not
work in eliminating them. This setting is
specifically designed to address this prob-
lem. It first crops the bars off of the sides
of the 16:9 picture to render it a 4:3 pic-
ture, and then performs a natural-looking
nonlinear stretch to fill the entire 16:9
screen.
enter the preset station location.
In DVD mode, this button may be used
while a DVD-Video disc is playing to zoom
the picture so that it is enlarged. There
are four steps to the zoom function, each
progressively larger. Continue pressing
the button to cycle through the steps and
return to the normal view. Depending on
the disc, you may also be able to use the
27 Tuning Down/Reverse Search
Button: Press this button when the tuner
is in use to change the station to one
with a lower frequency. Each tap of this
button will decrease the frequency by one
increment. When the tuner receives a
strong enough signal for adequate recep-
tion, MANUALTUNEDwill appear in
the Lower Display Line E. When the
tuner is in the Auto/Stereo mode, press
and hold the button to cause the tuner to
scan for the next lower station with
acceptable signal strength, and stop. The
Lower Display Line Ewill indicate
AUTOTUNED. When an FM Stereo
station is tuned, the display will read
AUTOSTTUNED. When the tuner
is in Manual/Mono mode, you may press
and hold this button to scan downward
through the frequencies, and the tuner
will stop immediately when you release
this button, even if no acceptable signal
is detected at that frequency. See page
64 for more information.
⁄/¤/‹/›Navigation Controls
4
6
to view different areas of the
enlarged image.
29
Tuning Up/Forward Search
Button: Press this button when the tuner
is in use to change the station to one
with a higher frequency. Each tap of this
button will increase the frequency by one
increment. When the tuner receives a
strong enough signal for adequate recep-
tion, MANUALTUNEDwill appear in
the Lower Display Line E. When the
tuner is in the Auto/Stereo mode, press
and hold the button to cause the tuner
to scan for the next higher station with
acceptable signal strength, and stop. The
Lower Display Line Ewill indicate
AUTOTUNED. When an FM Stereo
station is tuned, the display will read
AUTOSTTUNED. When the tuner
is in Manual/Mono mode, you may press
and hold this button to scan downward
through the frequencies, and the tuner
will stop immediately when you release
this button, even if no acceptable signal
4:3 – This mode may be used with pro-
grams that are known to be in the 4:3
aspect ratio. The image’s original aspect
ratio is preserved unaltered, and black
bars will appear on the left and right
sides of the image to fill the CVPD50’s
16:9 aspect ratio screen.
The difference between the Frame and
Letterbox functions is that the Frame
function allows access to the 4:3 and
4:3 TO 16:9 NL modes, which are mainly
useful for materials originating in the
4:3 format.
NOTE: The Letterbox and Frame functions
are not available with the internal DVD/
CD changer unless the DVD Auto Resize
function has been turned off using the
Screen setup menus. See page 57 for
more information.
When an optical player source, such as
the internal DVD changer, is in use, press
this button to search quickly in reverse
through the current track or chapter.
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
is detected at that frequency. See page
64 for more information on using the
tuner.
in to the next higher channel, or the bot-
tom to tune in to the next lower channel.
Screen mode is active, press this button
to adjust the contrast of the CVPD50 dis-
play. See page 55 for more information on
screen adjustments.
When the internal DVD changer or an
external DVD player is in use, press the
top of this button once to switch to the
DVD slow forward play mode. Each addi-
tional press of the top of the button will
cycle through the available slow-play
speeds of 1/2x, 1/4x and 1/8x. Pressing
the bottom of the button switches to the
DVD slow reverse play mode. Additional
presses of the bottom of the button
cycles through the available slow-play
speeds of 1/2x, 1/4x and 1/8x. No slow-
play speeds are available for CDs or other
disc types.
When an optical player source, such as
the internal DVD changer, is in use, press
this button to search quickly forward
through the current track or chapter.
Depending on the type of disc used in the
internal DVD changer, each additional
press will cycle through the available
scan speeds as follows (available scan
speeds may differ for external optical
source devices):
NOTE: The Sports/Broadcast/ Movies
Buttons imn
optimize picture
3
settings for a specific viewing medium.
The Broadcast settings are the most neu-
tral, balanced and accurate, and are opti-
mized for clarity. The Movies settings are
softer and less bright. The Sports settings
are more vibrant and optimized for fast-
moving action.
DVD-Audio and DVD-Video discs: 2x, 4x,
16x, 100x
37
JBL On Screen Library/Settings/
Distance Button: In DVD mode, this but-
ton accesses the JBL On Screen Library,
which displays on screen a thumbnail
image and description of each disc cur-
rently loaded in the CVR700’s internal
changer, including disc type and title
if available. Use the ⁄/¤/‹/›
6
CD and VCD discs: 2x, 4x, 8x
33
System Selector: Press this button
MP3 and WMA discs: 2x, 4x, 8x, 16x
to select the control codes for the CVR700.
See page 68 for more information on
using the internal DVD changer’s trans-
port controls.
34
Screen Selector: Press this button
to select the control codes for the
CVPD50 screen.
30
4
Preset/Page Up/Down/Forward/
Navigation Controls
Set Button
and the
35
Tone Mode/Color/List Button:
7
Reverse Skip Buttons: When used with
the tuner, these buttons scroll through the
preprogrammed station presets.
to conveniently select
This button controls the tone settings,
enabling adjustment of the bass and tre-
ble boost or cut. You may also use it to
disable the tone controls, for a “flat”
response. The first press of the button
displays a TONEINmessage in the
Lower Display Line E. To disable the
controls, press the ⁄/¤ Navigation
4
and play any loaded disc.
In the System mode, this button is used
to enter the distance from each speaker
to the listening position to avoid unnatu-
ral sound caused by the speakers being
placed at varying distances from the
listener, which could result in delay
artifacts. When this button is pressed,
When used with optical sources, such as
the internal disc changer or an external
CD player, press the forward button once
to skip to the beginning of the next track.
Press the reverse button once to return to
the beginning of the current track, and
once again quickly to skip to the begin-
ning of the previous track. When the
23
Controls
until the display reads
TONEOUT. To change the bass or tre- DISTFRONT10FTwill appear
ble settings, press this button again until in the Lower Display Line E, with
the desired control appears in the Lower FRONTand 10FTboth flashing.
Pause Button
has been pressed
while a DVD is playing, the picture
advances frame by frame each time the
forward skip button is pressed.
7
Display Line Eand in the on-screen
display, and then press the⁄/¤
Press the Set Button
to select
the front speaker group, and FRONT
will stop flashing. Use the ⁄/¤
4
Navigation Controls
until the
4
desired setting appears.
Navigation Controls
to select the
The Page Up and Down functions are
used with cable and satellite television to
page quickly through on-screen menus.
desired distance, and press the Set
again to enter it. Use the
⁄/¤ Navigation Controls
scroll through the remaining speaker
groups: CENTER, SIDE-S(side
surround) or BACK-S(back surround,
available only after a 6.1-channel bit-
stream has been detected).
When the Screen mode is active, press
this button to adjust the picture settings
of the CVPD50 display. See page 55 for
more information on screen adjustments.
This button also activates the List func-
tion for TiVo players. See your TiVo
owner’s manual for more information
on the List function.
7
Button
4
to
31
Disc Skip/Last Channel Buttons:
In the DVD mode, press this button to
begin play of the next available disc in
the changer.
When used with most video sources, this
button returns to the previously selected
broadcast channel.
38
Menu/Info/Audio Input Selector:
NOTE: The Sports/Broadcast/ Movies
In DVD mode, this button accesses the
menu on the current disc, enabling you to
select the main feature or accompanying
featurettes for playback or make other
selections, depending on how the disc is
programmed.
Buttons imn
optimize picture
3
32
Picture/Channel Up/Down and
settings for a specific viewing medium.
The Broadcast settings are the most neu-
tral, balanced and accurate, and are opti-
mized for clarity. The Movies settings are
softer and less bright. The Sports settings
are more vibrant and optimized for fast-
moving action.
Slow Play Forward/Reverse Button:
When a disc containing JPEG still images
is being played using the internal disc
changer, press the top of this button to
advance to the next image on the disc or
the bottom of this button return to the
previous image.
In System mode, press this button to
assign one of the Digital Audio Inputs
9)cdefhijk to a source.
See page 60 for more information on
using digital inputs.
36
OSD/Contrast Button: Press this
When a cable television box, satellite
receiver, HDTV tuner or TiVo device is in
use, press the top of this button to tune
button when the System mode is active
to access the setup menu for the
CVR700’s audio functions. When the
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
39
Power Off (All): Press this button
to place the CVR700 and CVPD50, or a
selected device, in the Standby mode.
Press and hold this button to place all
devices, including the CVR700, the
CVPD50 and any other products whose
codes you have programmed into the
remote, into the Standby mode.
40
IR Transmitter/Receiver: The
infrared emitters and receivers behind
the plastic lens at the top of the remote
communicate the remote codes to the
CVR700 and other programmed devices.
Be certain that the lens is not covered
when using the remote, and point the
lens toward the CVR700 for the best
results. In learning mode, the remote
receives IR codes to be learned through
a receiver behind the lens. See page 93
for more information on learning remote
codes.
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLING AND CONNECTING THE EQUIPMENT
Before unpacking and placing the JBL
Cinema Vision components, it is impor-
tant to select appropriate locations for
each component. Make sure that all
power switches are turned off and all
equipment remains unplugged from AC
power until the system is completely
installed and connected in order to pre-
vent electric shock, or transient signals
that may damage equipment.
connect one end of a Y-adaptor intercon-
nect to the Subwoofer Output §, and
connect each end to the LFE input of a
powered subwoofer.
ware and/or bracket installation. Be sure
to follow these bracket assembly and
installation instructions carefully. If
you have any questions or doubts about
your ability to correctly wall-mount the
CVPD50 plasma display, consult with your
authorized JBL dealer or custom installer.
In 5.1-channel applications, two of the
surround speakers should be placed
slightly behind the listening position and,
ideally, should face each other and be at
a level higher than the listeners’ ears. If
that is not possible, they may be placed
on a wall behind the listening position,
facing forward. In 7.1-channel applica-
tions, place two of the surround speakers
in the side positions, and place the two
surround back speakers on the rear wall.
It is appropriate to configure the CVR700
for either 5.1- or 7.1-channel operation,
but not for 6.1 channels. When 6.1-chan-
nel program material or a 6.1-channel
processing mode is in use, material for
the surround back channel will be out-
putted simultaneously through both
the Surround Back Left and Right
Speaker Outputs ¡. Connecting only
one loudspeaker to these speaker termi-
nals will not only deprive you of the bene-
fits of 7.1-channel surround modes, such
as Logic 7, but will also interfere with the
functioning of EzSet speaker calibration,
as described on page 51. It may also put
undesirable strain on the surround back
amplifier circuits and power supplies.
The bracket must be installed in wood
studs; there is no wall-anchor option. The
slot holes in the bracket are designed to
accommodate 16-inch on-center wall
studs. See the illustration (Figure 1) for
the dimensions of the bracket.
IMPORTANT NOTES:
•
Never attempt to lift the CVPD50 plasma
screen by yourself. Always make sure
an assistant is available to lift the plasma
screen with you.
20-1/4"
• Do not block the ventilation holes of
the CVR700, and make sure that air can
circulate freely around it.
• Read through this manual before begin-
ning installation.
• Remember to observe the color coding
when connecting audio and video
cables.
16"
Figure 1
The bracket must be installed using four
lag bolts, each at least 1/4 inch in diame-
ter. Each bolt must be long enough to
engage in the stud by at least 2 inches.
Recommended Placement
The JBL Cinema Vision system will
provide the best results when installed
in a rectangular room, with the screen
installed on one of the shorter walls.
In order to avoid splintering the wall
studs, it is necessary to drill pilot holes
for each lag bolt.
The front speakers should be placed the
same distance from each other as they
are from the listening position. They
should be placed at about the same
height from the floor as the listeners’
ears will be, or they may be angled
toward the listeners.
Use a carpenter’s level to ensure that the
bracket is installed squarely. You will
observe that the bracket uses slotholes
to assist you in making adjustments to
level the bracket before fully tightening
the lag bolts.
In Dolby Digital and DTS systems, it is
best to aim all of the speakers (except the
subwoofer) toward the listening position
at about ear-level height. The low-fre-
quency material reproduced by the sub-
woofer is mostly omnidirectional, and this
speaker may be placed in a convenient
location in the room. However, bass
reproduction will be maximized when the
subwoofer is placed in a corner along
the same wall as the front speakers.
Experiment with subwoofer placement by
temporarily placing the subwoofer in the
listening position and moving around the
room until the bass reproduction is best.
Place the subwoofer in that location.
The center channel speaker should be
placed slightly behind the front left and
right speakers, and no more than 2 feet
above or below the tweeters of the left
and right speakers. This placement may
be obtained by placing the CVPD50
screen, and the left, right and center
speakers on a credenza using the included
pair of CVTS50 table stands for the left
and right CVSAT50 speakers, and the
included credenza stand for the CVPD50
screen and CVCEN50 center speaker.
Figure 2
Once the bracket has been installed. Two
people may carefully lift the CVPD50
screen and lower it onto the bracket so
that the two hooks on either side of the
bracket engage in the openings on the
underside of the CVPD50.
Wall-Mounting the CVPD50 Plasma
Display
The JBL Cinema Vision speaker system
may be used in 5.1- or 7.1-channel appli-
cations. Your system includes enough
loudspeakers for a 5.1-channel system.
Additional pairs of CVSAT50 satellite
speakers are available from your JBL
dealer or custom installer, along with
pairs of CVSAT50 table stands, should
you wish to upgrade to a 7.1-channel
system.
Due to its weight and fragility, there are
special concerns in wall-mounting the
CVPD50 screen. The customer is solely
responsible for proper selection of mount-
ing hardware not included with the
CVPD50 plasma screen, and for proper
installation of the wall bracket, including
but not limited to the selection of appro-
priate weight-bearing supports and proper
use of the bracket. JBL disclaims any lia-
bility for the selection of mounting hard-
Installing the CVPD50 Plasma Display
On the Included Credenza Stand
If wall-mounting the CVPD50 plasma
screen is not convenient or practical, you
may prefer to install the CVPD50 on a cre-
denza or other sturdy piece of furniture
using the included credenza stand. In
addition to offering an elegant appear-
If desired, a second subwoofer may be
added to create a 5.2 or 7.2 system. If so,
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ance that matches that of the optional
CVTS50 speaker stands, the stand
includes a cradle for placement of the
center speaker.
To ensure a proper fit, GENTLY place the
plasma display on a carpeted floor with
one end up. Make sure that the screen
itself is at all times perpendicular to the
floor. While one person holds the unit
steady, the other person should check the
fit of each column in the two openings on
the underside of the unit. Loosen, move
and retighten the column feet until a
proper and secure fit is achieved. Then
secure the columns in their openings
using the two supplied hex bolts and the
same 5mm hex wrench you used to
attach the feet to the columns.
of opening a new world of video enjoy-
ment with sharpness and beauty far
beyond any television you have ever
owned. As this may be the first plasma
display device you have ever owned, it is
important to be aware of some unique
properties of this technology.
IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTES:
• The credenza stand consists of three
main parts: two metal columns and a
glass base. Be extremely careful in
handling the fragile glass base to
avoid breakage that might result in
personal injury.
A plasma display works by using a grid
containing millions of “cells”, each filled
with phosphorous that glows in red,
green or blue when it receives an electri-
cal charge. The charge is supplied by a
wired grid that allows the video process-
ing logic to pinpoint each individual cell
to determine whether or not to turn it
“on”. The cells are sandwiched by glass
plates that seal the phosphorous in place.
The combination of cells, known as pixels
in video display terminology, when prop-
erly functioning can present a color pic-
ture with incredibly high resolution.
• The credenza stand is only intended for
use with the CVPD50 plasma screen.
Attempting to use the stand with any
other model plasma screen or any
other device is unsafe and may result
in personal injury and damage to the
equipment.
This method is preferable to placing the
stand on the credenza and lowering the
plasma display onto it, which may cause
the installers to place the display’s
weight unevenly on the columns for a
moment, causing the glass base to snap,
which may result in personal injury.
• The stand must be placed in a safe
location, protected from young children
and pets who might topple the stand,
possibly resulting in serious injury.
Never place the stand so that any part
of it is sticking out over the edge of
the credenza, table, shelf or other sur-
face underneath it.
It is the responsibility of the person
installing the display to properly and
securely mount the credenza stand to the
plasma display.
Given its construction, the CVPD50 is very
fragile, and requires extreme care in han-
dling. Once installed, it’s easy to use,
although there are a few points for you
to be aware of.
Two people may now right the CVPD50
and carefully place it in the desired loca-
tion. Do not lean the CVPD50 on the
stand while righting it, as this will cause
the glass to snap, possibly resulting in
personal injury. Carry the assembly by
holding the bottom and sides of the
CVPD50 plasma display itself, not by
holding the stand.
1. It is possible for a phenomenon known
as “burn-in” to occur when the phos-
phorous cells remain turned on for too
long a stretch of time. This is liable to
occur when a still image, such as a
menu screen or even the CVPD50’s
own start-up screen, remains on
screen for more than a few minutes.
In order to protect against burn-in, the
CVPD50’s screen saver will be activated
after it detects 2 minutes of no move-
ment on screen. It is not possible to
disable the screen saver.
• Make certain that your credenza or
other furniture is capable of supporting
the weight of the CVPD50 in a stable
fashion.
• If it becomes necessary to move the
CVPD50 to another location, two people
should carry it by holding the plasma
screen. Do not attempt to carry the
CVPD50 while holding it by the stand.
However, the screen saver does not
function for the DVI source. Therefore,
it is crucial that you set your source
device to activate its screen saver after
2 minutes of inactivity on screen, par-
ticularly if you are using the CVPD50
with your computer, where an image
such as a spreadsheet may remain on
screen for a long period of time.
Figure 4
Figure 3
After the video cable has been connected
to the CVPD50 as described below, and
after the speaker wire has been connected
to the CVCEN50 speaker as described in
its owner’s manual, you may carefully
place the CVCEN50 speaker in the cradle
below the screen formed by the two top
feet of the credenza stand. The bottom of
the grille will fit snugly behind the two
stops at the front of the top feet.
Each column is made up of two parts: the
main column and the top foot. Using the
supplied bolts, attach each foot to its col-
umn, but do not fully tighten the bolts.
Use a 5mm hex key (not supplied).
Burn-in is also of concern when you are
listening to audio CDs, which have no
visual information so that the CVPD50’s
start-up screen remains on. You may
wish to activate the Screen Standby
function, which places the screen in
standby mode, by pressing the Screen
Selector e 34 followed by the
Carefully insert the glass base into the
slot in the column, making sure to line up
each column flush with the edge of the
base. This will insure that the base is
installed evenly for maximum stability
and so that the columns will line up prop-
erly with the openings on the underside
of the CVPD50.
Important Information About the
CVPD50 Plasma Display
Screen Standby Button Y
.
19
Press the button again to restore the
video display.
Your new JBL Cinema Vision CVPD50
high-definition plasma display is capable
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following tips can help you avoid
burn-in:
4. There are ergonomic concerns that
apply generally to reduce viewer
fatigue and eyestrain.
• Be particularly careful during the first
100 hours of use to display mainly
moving images or frequently changing
still images.
• The optimal viewing distance for the
50-inch CVPD50 plasma display is 12
to 16 feet.
• Use your display in full-screen (16:9)
format, rather than letterbox (black
bars at top and bottom of screen) or
4:3 (black bars to left and right of
screen).
• The background lighting in the room
should be sufficient to read by, as
too much light reduces the contrast,
and too little light is difficult for your
eyes to adjust to.
• Remember to activate your comput-
er’s own screen saver when using
it with the CVPD50. This also holds
for a DVD player or other device con-
nected to the DVI input.
• When using the CVPD50 plasma dis-
play with your computer, select fonts
and backgrounds that are rich in con-
trast, such as a black font on a white
background, to avoid eye fatigue that
can result from using red or blue
fonts on a dark background.
• Even after the first 100 hours of use,
try to display moving images as much
of the time as possible.
• Switch off the display when it is not
being used by pressing the Screen
Standby Button Y
as
19
described above.
• Avoid increasing the contrast and
brightness settings.
• Whenever possible, choose to display
images containing a variety of colors
and color shades.
2. Although extreme care is taken during
the manufacturing process, it is possi-
ble that your CVPD50 plasma display
will at some point develop some minor
pixel dropouts. It is extremely unlikely
that this will occur or be noticeable
and, as such, in most cases it will not
be considered a sufficient defect for
warranty replacement (repair of indi-
vidual pixels is not possible). Should
you have any concerns, kindly contact
your custom installer for further
guidance.
3. Over a long period of time, the natural
consumption of the phosphorous layer
may result in a slight loss of brightness
or contrast. This is normal, and should
not be noticeable.
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTE: While most speaker manufactur-
ers adhere to an industry convention of
using black terminals for negative and
red ones for positive, some may vary from
this configuration. To ensure proper
phase and optimal performance, consult
the identification plate on your speaker
or the speaker’s manual to verify polarity.
If you do not know the polarity of your
speaker, ask your dealer for advice before
proceeding, or consult the manufacturer.
We also recommend that the length of
cable used to connect speaker pairs be
identical. For example, use the same
length piece of cable to connect the
front-left and front-right or surround-left
and surround-right speakers, even if the
speakers are a different distance from
the CVR700.
Subwoofer
Basic Installation
The JBL Cinema Vision system offers a vari-
ety of entertainment options, including play-
back of DVDs and CDs, and radio listening,
and it may be enjoyed with no additional
equipment. However, it is also compatible
with most available audio/video devices.
IMPORTANT NOTE: For your personal
safety and to avoid possible damage to
your equipment and speakers, it is
always a good practice to turn off and
unplug the CVR700, CVPD50 and ALL
source equipment from AC power before
making any audio or video system con-
nections.
Surround Speakers
†
†
Step One: Connect the Front, Center,
Surround and Surround Back Speaker
Outputs ¡™£¢ to the respective
speakers.
†
†
It is appropriate to configure the CVR700
for either 5.1- or 7.1-channel operation,
but not for 6.1 channels. When 6.1-chan-
nel program material or a 6.1-channel
processing mode is in use, material for
the surround back channel will be out-
putted simultaneously through both
the Back Surround Left and Right
Speaker Outputs ¡. Connecting only
one loudspeaker to these speaker termi-
nals will not only deprive you of the ben-
efits of 7.1-channel surround modes, such
as Logic 7, but will also interfere with the
functioning of EzSet speaker calibration,
as described on page 51. It may also put
undesirable strain on the surround back
amplifier circuits and power supplies.
5
— 6 f
1.5 — 1.
To ensure that all the audio signals are
carried to your speakers without loss of
clarity or resolution, we suggest that you
use high-quality speaker cable. Many
brands of cable are available and the
choice of cable may be influenced by the
distance between your speakers and the
receiver, the type of speakers you use, per-
sonal preferences and other factors. Your
dealer or installer is a valuable resource
to consult in selecting the proper cable.
Regardless of the brand of cable selected,
we recommend that you use a cable con-
structed of multistrand copper with a
gauge of 14 or smaller. Remember that in
specifying cable, the lower the number,
the thicker the cable. Cable with a gauge
of 16 may be used for short runs of less
than 3 meters (10 feet). We do not recom-
mend that you use cables with an AWG
equivalent of 18 or higher, due to the
power loss and degradation in perform-
ance that will occur. Cables that are run
inside walls should have the appropriate
markings to indicate listing with UL, CSA
or other appropriate testing agency stan-
dards. Questions about running cables
inside walls should be referred to your
installer or a licensed electrician who is
familiar with the NEC and/or the applica-
ble local building codes in your area.
†Alternate placement for surround speak-
ers when only 5.1 channels are used;
required placement for back surround
speakers in 7.1-channel systems.
The front speakers should be placed the
same distance from each other as they are
from the listening position. They should be
placed at about the same height from the
floor as the listeners’ ears will be, or they
may be angled toward the listeners.
The center channel speaker should be
placed slightly behind the front left and
right speakers, and no more than 2 feet
above or below the tweeters of the left
and right speakers. It may be convenient
to place the center speaker in the cradle
of the CVPD50 credenza stand, as shown
in the drawing.
Connections to a subwoofer are normally
made via a line-level audio connection
from the Subwoofer Output § to the
line-level input of a subwoofer with a
built-in amplifier.
Speaker Placement
Front Speakers
The JBL Cinema Vision system may be
used in 5.1- or 7.1-channel applications. In
5.1-channel applications, two of the surround
speakers should be placed slightly behind
the listening position and, ideally, should
face each other and be at a level higher
than the listeners’ ears. If that is not possible,
they may be placed on a wall behind the
listening position, facing forward.
When connecting wires to the speakers,
be certain to observe proper polarity.
Note that the positive (+) terminal of each
speaker connection now carries a specific
color code, as noted on page 20. How-
ever, most speakers still use a red
terminal for the positive (+) connection.
Connect the “negative” or “black” wire to
the same terminal on both the receiver
and the speaker.
Center Channel Speaker
NOTE: In 5.1-channel systems, the
two rear speakers are called simply the
surround speakers, whether they are
placed to the sides of or behind the
listening position. In 7.1-channel systems,
there are four surround speakers, two of
which are referred to as side surround
speakers, due to their placement to the
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
sides of the listening position. The two
remaining speakers are referred to as
back surround speakers, as they are
placed in back of (behind) the listening
position. In 7.1-channel applications,
place two of the surround speakers in the
side positions, and place the two back
surround speakers on the rear wall.
the two remotes are preprogrammed to
operate only certain types of devices,
as listed below, although you may con-
nect any compatible audio/video device
to any of the inputs. Although you may
reprogram an input selector on the
main remote control so that its device
type matches the device you wish to
connect, the secondary remote’s input
selectors may not be reprogrammed.
Therefore, we recommend that you con-
nect compatible devices to each source.
Connect the supplied FM antenna to the
FM (75-ohm) Connection . The FM
31
In Dolby Digital and DTS systems, such as
JBL Cinema Vision, it is best to aim all of
the speakers (except the subwoofer)
toward the listening position at about ear-
level height.
antenna may be an external roof antenna,
an inside powered or wire-lead antenna
or a connection from a cable TV system.
If the antenna or connection uses 300-
ohm twin-lead cable, you must use an
optional 300-ohm-to-75-ohm adaptor to
make the connection.
Input
Device Types Preprogrammed
Source In Main Remote
The low-frequency material reproduced by
the subwoofer is mostly omnidirectional,
and this speaker may be placed in a con-
venient location in the room. However,
bass reproduction will be maximized when
the subwoofer is placed in a corner, along
the same wall as the front speakers.
Experiment with subwoofer placement by
temporarily placing the subwoofer in the
listening position and moving around the
room until the bass reproduction is best.
Place the subwoofer in that location.
AUX
VCR
TV, HD Tuner, VCR/Combo,
DVD, CD, CABLE, SAT
If you would like to install any external
source devices in your system, proceed
to Step Four below. Otherwise, you are
almost ready to begin enjoying your JBL
Cinema Vision home theater system.
VCR/Combo
CBL/SAT CABLE, SAT, HD Tuner
GAME/ GAME, CAMCORDER
CAM
Step Four: You may wish to install addi-
tional components to your system. We re-
commend installing devices to the source
input jacks labeled for the corresponding
device type to benefit from both the pre-
assignment of digital audio inputs, and the
programming of the two remote controls.
DR
DVDR, CDR, DVHS, TIVO, PVR
DVI/
DVI/DVD, DVI/CABLE,
COMP DVI/SAT, HD Tuner
• The analog and digital audio connec-
tions, as well as the composite, S-
video and component video connec-
tions, are dedicated to each source
input as labeled and may not be reas-
signed to another source. Be certain to
make all of the connections for each
source device to the correct jacks.
Step Two: Thanks to its sophisticated
video processor, the CVR700 is able to
upconvert composite, S-video and compo-
nent video source signals for a single-
cable connection to the screen. Connect
Audio/video components require that
both an audio and a video connection be
made. The type of connection will depend
on the capabilities of your component.
™
the included proprietary JBL Digital Link
cable to the Output to JBL Cinema
Audio connections may be analog or digi-
tal. We recommend using digital audio
connections whenever possible for supe-
rior sound reproduction. You may also
wish to make analog audio connections
as a backup.
33
Vision CVPD50 Screen
on the back
of the CVR700, and to the digital input on
the underside of the CVPD50. The connec-
tor is located on the right side of the
screen when facing it. You may wish to
use a mirror to assist you in orienting the
cable connector correctly. Note that this
cable uses a proprietary system, and
should not be connected to any display
device other than the CVPD50.
Cable/Satellite Source Input
Since the JBL Cinema Vision system does
not include a TV tuner, you may wish to
connect a cable TV box, satellite TV
receiver, HDTV set-top tuner or another
device capable of receiving TV broad-
casts to the CVR700. This device should
be connected to the Cable/Sat source
input jacks. Select either the Cable/
Satellite Coaxial Digital Audio Input
d or the Cable/Satellite Optical
Digital Audio Input i for your digital
audio connection. If desired, connect the
analog audio outputs of the component
to the Cable/Satellite Analog Audio
Inputs ‹. If available, connect the com-
ponent video outputs of your device to
the Cable/Satellite Component Video
Inputs °. Otherwise, connect either an
S-video or composite video output from
the component to the Cable/Satellite
Analog Video Inputs ‹.
Video connections for most devices may
be composite video (yellow jacks), S-
video (four-pin connector) or component
(Y/Pr/Pb – green, red and blue jacks)
video. Choose only one type of video
connection for each source component.
Whenever possible, we recommend using
component video connections for the best
quality. S-video provides an excellent
alternative, and composite video may be
used when neither S-video or component
video signals are available. As mentioned
above, the CVR700 will upconvert each
video format to the proper digital video
format for the CVPD50. However, if you
are using another display device, you will
need to make a video monitor output con-
nection to the display corresponding to
each type of video format used by your
source components.
The jack for the AC power cord is located
on the left side of the CVPD50. Make
sure the master power switch next to the
jack is in the “0” position before plugging
in the AC power cord. Again, a mirror
may be helpful in locating the jack and
switch. Do not turn the master power
switch to the “1” or on position until after
all components have been connected.
Step Three: Assemble the supplied
AM Loop Antenna so that the tabs at
the bottom of the antenna loop snap
into the holes in the base. Connect
32
it to the AM Antenna Terminals
.
NOTE: When using a source connected
via the Cable/Satellite Component
Video Inputs °, due to limitations in
the CVR700’s audio section, it is neces-
sary to also connect the corresponding
NOTES:
• The input source selectors and their
associated control codes on each of
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cable/Satellite Analog S-Video Input
‹ in order to view the CVR700’s audio
on-screen menu system.
Next, connect the VCR Analog Audio
Outputs ¤ to the analog audio record
inputs on your recorder. Connect the
same type of VCR Analog Video Output
¤ (composite or S-video) that you used
for the input to the CVR700 to the record
input of your device.
IMPORTANT: The Screen Saver function
does not operate when using the DVI
video input. Therefore, to prevent an
image from burning into your CVPD50
screen, it is extremely important that you
activate the Screen Saver function on
your PC or other DVI device. If none is
available, we recommend you place the
CVPD50 screen in Sleep mode by press-
ing the Screen Standby/Sleep Button
19
Digital Recorder Source Input
If you have a personal video recorder
(PVR), such as a TiVo, we recommend
that you connect it to the Digital Recorder
(DR) source input and output jacks.
DVI/Computer Source Input
Alternatively, use the Digital Recorder
source for a DVD Recorder, a CD recorder,
a MiniDisc recorder, a tape deck or any
other audio or A/V recording device.
Select either the Digital Recorder
Coaxial Digital Audio Input f or the
Digital Recorder Optical Digital
Audio Input j for your digital audio
connection (but not both), and connect
the appropriate digital audio output on
the recorder to the corresponding digital
audio input. If desired, connect the ana-
log audio outputs of the recorder to the
Digital Recorder Analog Inputs ª.
Due to its advanced video processing and
reproduction capabilities, the JBL Cinema
Vision system may be used with your per-
sonal computer (PC) for no-compromise
video displays. A dedicated DVI (digital
video interface) may be used with com-
patible computers to enjoy activities from
video games to surfing the Internet. The
large screen is perfect for displaying pre-
sentations to a group, or simply for pro-
viding a better view of an intricate
Y
on either remote when you
anticipate that a still image will remain
on screen for more than a few minutes.
A/V Auxiliary Source Input
An auxiliary audio/video source input is
provided in case you have an additional
component you’d like to connect to your
JBL Cinema Vision system, such as an
additional cable television box, satellite
receiver, HDTV tuner, laserdisc player, or
any other audio/video device. Do not con-
nect a turntable to this input unless you
are using it with a phono preamp with
conventional analog audio outputs.
spreadsheet. This source input may also
be used with the latest compatible DVD
players or other devices with high-quality
DVI video outputs.
For PVRs and DVD recorders, connect the
component video outputs to the Digital
Recorder Component Video Inputs
‡. Note that there are no corresponding
component video outputs, as copy-pro-
tection measures incorporated in most
devices prohibit recording component
video signals due to their high quality.
Alternatively, you may connect the com-
posite or S-video outputs of your recorder
to the Digital Recorder Analog S-Video
Input ª, but note that a separate source
is available for analog VCRs.
Select either the DVI/Computer Coaxial
Digital Audio Input f or the DVI/
Computer Optical Digital Audio Input
k for connecting the corresponding digi-
tal audio output on your PC. Alternatively,
or as a backup, connect the analog audio
outputs on your PC to the DVI/Computer
Analog Audio Inputs ¶. If your PC’s
analog audio output is a stereo 1/8-inch
mini-jack, you will need to supply a Y-
cable with a stereo 1/8-inch mini-plug
at one end and conventional left and
right analog audio interconnect plugs
at the other.
Connect the coaxial or optical digital
audio output of the device to the
Auxiliary Coaxial Digital Audio Input
c or the Auxiliary Optical Digital
Audio Input h. As a backup, you may
wish to connect the device’s analog audio
outputs to the Auxiliary Analog Audio
Inputs •. If the device has composite or
S-video outputs, connect one or the other
to the corresponding Auxiliary Analog
Video Input •.
Connect either the Coaxial Digital
Main Room Remote Control
Extension
Audio Output b or the Optical Digital
Audio Output g to the corresponding
record input on your recording device. If
you also connect the Digital Recorder
Analog Audio Outputs ‚ to the analog
record inputs on your device, remember to
select the correct input on your recorder.
Connect the video output port on your
PC to the DVI (HDCP)/Computer Video
Input 5.
An infrared receiver located on the front
of the CVPD50 is capable of receiving
control commands for both the CVPD50
and the CVR700, enabling you to place
the CVR700 inside a cabinet. If you wish
to control an external source component
that is also hidden from view, simply con-
nect the CVR700’s Remote IR Output
Jack fi to the Remote IR input jack on
compatible equipment. Now you may
simply point the remote control at the
plasma screen to send commands to any
device in your JBL Cinema Vision system.
If your computer has an analog VGA
video output instead of a DVI output, you
may use the included VGA-to-DVI adaptor
cable to connect the computer’s video
output to the DVI (HDCP)/Computer
Video Input 5.
Connect either the composite video or S-
video Digital Recorder Analog Video
Output ‚ to the corresponding record
input on your recording device.
NOTE: When using a source connected
VCR Source Input
via the DVI (HDCP)/Computer Video
35
Input
it is not possible to view the
,
If you have an analog VCR or other ana-
log recording device, we recommend that
you connect it to the VCR source input
and output jacks.
CVR700’s video on-screen menu system.
In addition, although you may access the
audio menus, if you attempt to do so, you
will temporarily lose the video signal at
the DVI input. If the last previous source
used provided an S-video signal, such as
an external VCR, then that signal will
appear when you attempt to access the
on-screen menus while using the
If the CVR700 is used without the CVPD50
and is placed inside a cabinet or other
location that prevents the remote sensor
from receiving commands, an optional
remote IR sensor may be connected to the
Remote IR Input Jack fl.
Connect the analog audio outputs of the
recorder to the VCR Analog Audio
Inputs ⁄. If available, connect the S-
video output of your recorder to the VCR
Analog Video Input ⁄. Otherwise, use
the composite video jacks.
DVI/Computer source.
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
NOTE: All remotely controlled compo-
nents must be linked together in a “daisy
chain.” Connect the IR OUT jack of one
unit to the IR IN of the next to establish
this chain.
4. Press the Main Power On/Off Switch
• When viewing the on-screen menus, it
is important that they not be left on the
screen for an extended period of time.
The constant display of a static image
such as these menus or video game
images is likely to cause the image to be
permanently “burned into” the plasma
screen. This type of damage is not covered
by the JBL Cinema Vision warranty.
1
1b
to turn on the CVR700 and
the CVPD50.
5. The remote control contains several pre-
programmed special functions that may
be activated by pressing and holding par-
ticular buttons rather than pressing and
releasing. One such function is the “All
On/Off” power function. To turn on the
CVR700, CVPD50 display screen, and other
devices programmed into the remote,
press and hold the Power All On Button
buntil all units turn on. The LED inside
the CVR700’s Main Power On/Off
You are now ready to power up the sys-
tem, make minor configuration settings,
and then begin enjoying your JBL Cinema
Vision system.
Making Configuration
Adjustments
The on-screen menu system for the audio
1. Plug the AC power cords for the CVPD50,
CVR700 and any source devices into
unswitched AC outlets. Make sure the
master power switch on the underside of
the CVPD50 (next to the power cord jack)
is in the “1” position. Use a small mirror
to locate the switch. The LED inside the
Main Power On/Off Switch 1on the
CVR700 will turn red, indicating that the
unit is in Standby mode. The LED on the
front of the CVPD50 will turn amber, indi-
cating that it, too, is in Standby mode.
section is available by pressing the OSD
36
Button n
. When this button is
Button 1will turn orange to confirm that
the unit is on, and the Information
Display Ôwill also light. The CVPD50
will turn on and display the JBL logo screen.
pressed, the MAINMENU(Figure 6)
will appear, and adjustments are made
from the individual menus. To use the
on-screen menu system in the audio
section of the CVR700, press the ⁄/¤
Using the On-Screen Display
Navigation Controls q
until the
4
When making the following adjustments,
you may find it easier to use the on-screen
display system. These easy-to-read displays
give you a clear picture of the current status
of the unit and make it easy to see which
selection you are making. To view the on-
screen menus, make certain that you have
made a connection to the CVPD50 from the
Output to JBL Cinema Vision CVPD50
on-screen › cursor is next to the item
you wish to adjust, and then press the
NOTE: It is possible to see the LED on the
front panel of the CVPD50 flashing red and
yellow alternately even though you have
unplugged the CVPD50’s power cord. This is
because the CVPD50 also receives power
through its connection to the CVR700 in
order to trigger turn-on when the CVR700 is
powered on for seamless operation; this is
normal. However, the CVPD50’s power cord
must be plugged in for proper operation; the
LED will flash when the CVR700 is turned
on to alert you that the power cord is
unplugged. If the CVPD50 does not turn on
when the CVR700 is powered up and the
LED on the CVPD50 is not flashing red and
yellow, then turn off both units, unplug them
both from AC power, unplug the JBL Digital
Link cable that connects them and then
reconnect everything. If this does not resyn-
chronize the components, contact your
authorized JBL custom installer or dealer for
assistance.
Set Button s
to select that item.
7
In some cases, the selection will cause a
new submenu to appear, and when the
lowest level submenu has been reached,
pressing the Set Button s
will
7
select the item that the on-screen › cur-
sor is pointing to. Some settings in the
ADVANCEDsubmenu will require you
to press the. ‹/›Navigation Controls
33
Screen Port
on the rear panel of the
CVR700. The CVR700’s on-screen menus
are not available when a component video
source device is in use unless the corre-
sponding S-video connection has been
made to the CVR700. The on-screen menus
are not available at all when the DVI
q
6
to scroll through the available
settings. Throughout this manual, when
you are asked to “scroll” to a certain
item, that means to use the ⁄/¤
4
Navigation Controls q
until the
35
(HDCP)/Computer Video Input
is
on-screen › cursor is next to the item.
in use. If you attempt to use the on-screen
menus, the DVI video input will be tem-
porarily lost.
**
MAIN
MENU
**
›
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
SOURCES
IMPORTANT NOTES:
SPEAKERS
ADVANCED
• In order to access the on-screen menus
for the CVR700’s audio section, make sure
the remote control is in System mode
(NOT set to control an external source
device or even the CVPD50 screen). To set
the remote to System mode, press the
33
LIP
SYNC
2. Remove the protective plastic film from
the front-panel lens. If left in place, the
film will affect the performance of your
remote control.
Figure 6
System Selector j
.
The menus will remain on the screen for
20 seconds, and then they will “time-out”
and disappear from the screen. The time-
out may be increased to as much as 50
seconds by going to the ADVANCED
SETTINGSmenu, and changing the
item titled OSDTIMEOUT.
3. Install the four supplied AAA batteries in
the main remote as shown in Figure 5. Be
certain to follow the (+) and (–) polarity
indicators that are on the top of the bat-
tery compartment.
• Both the CVPD50 and CVR700 contain
separate IR sensors that are capable of
receiving commands from either remote
control. JBL recommends that you point
the remote at the CVPD50 screen for all
commands, as the JBL Digital Link cable
is able to pass remote commands to the
CVR700 for system and DVD control, as
well as to any other devices you have
connected to the Remote IR Output
Jack fi. However, video control com-
mands received by the CVR700 cannot be
passed to the screen.
Selections will also be shown in the
Upper Display Line Hor the Lower
Display Line E, depending on which
parameter is being adjusted. In general,
the Upper Display Line Hwill indicate
the name of the current menu and the
Lower Display Line E, will indicate
Figure 5
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the menu line or option that the on-
screen ›cursor is currently pointing to.
However, the ADVANCEDsubmenu
functions differently, in that the settings
are adjusted directly on screen rather
than by using submenus. At that time
both the setting name and the currently
selected setting will be displayed in the
Lower Display Line E.
mation screen (Figure 9) will appear, giv-
ing you the opportunity to opt out of
source configuration. To continue, scroll
to the YESline and press the Set
*
SOURCES
*
› SOURCE: GAME/CAMERA
AUDIO INPUT:ANALOG
AUDIO MODE:LOGIC
TYPE:MOVIE 7.1
NIGHT MODE:N/A
7
VIDEO INPUT: COMPOSITE
SOURCE A.R.: 16:9
Button s
again. Note that you
7
RESET TO FACTORY SETTING
BACK TO MAIN MENU
may reset all sources to their factory
default settings from this screen by
scrolling to the RESETALL
SOURCESline and selecting it.
Figure 12
*AUDIO
INPUT*
System Configuration
**
SYSTEM
**
ANALOG
With the MAINMENUon screen,
make sure that the › cursor is pointing to
the SYSTEMCONFIGURATION
ARE
WANT
YOU
TO
SURE
YOU
OPTICAL DIGITAL
COAXIAL DIGITAL
CHANGE
SETTINGS?
SOURCE
BACK TO SOURCES MENU
NO
›
YES
line and press the Set Button s
.
7
RESET
ALL
SOURCES
TO
FACTORY SETTINGS?
The SYSTEMmenu (Fig. 7) will appear
on screen, with the › cursor pointing to
the 5.1CHANNELline (the default
setting). If your system consists of only
front left, center and right speakers,
two surround speakers and a subwoofer,
scroll down to the BACKTOMAIN
MENUline and press the Set Button
Figure 13
Figure 9
For most sources, you will want to assign
a default surround audio mode. Refer to
the chart on page 62 for descriptions of
each available surround mode. You may
temporarily change the audio mode
assignments at any time during playback
using the remote control. It is recom-
mended that for initial setup you select
Dolby Digital for digital audio sources,
and Logic 7 for analog sources.
Once you have confirmed that you
wish to change source settings, the
SOURCESmenu (Figure 10) will
appear. The first line indicates the cur-
rently selected source.
s
. Otherwise, use the ⁄/¤
7
Navigation Controls q
to move
4
*
› SOURCE
AUDIO
SOURCES
DVD/CD
MODE:
*
the › cursor to point to the desired sys-
tem configuration; then press the Set
:
CHNGR
DVD-V:LOGIC
DVD-A:BASS
CD-V:LOGIC
CD-A:LOGIC
7
7. 1
MOV
MANAGEMENT
Button s
. A confirmation screen
7
7
7
7. 1
7. 1
7
MOV
MUS
(Fig. 8) will appear, giving you the opportu-
nity to retain the previous setting. Select
NOif you wish to retain the previous
setting, or YESto update the setting.
MP3
WMA:LOGIC
7. 1
16:9
SETTNG
MU
The internal DVD/CD changer enables
you to program an audio mode for each
type of disc, thus empowering you to
choose two-channel stereo reproduction
for older two-channel CD recordings,
Dolby Digital for video DVDs, and Logic 7
matrix surround processing for analog
Video CD programs.
SOURCE
A. R. :AUTO
TO FACTORY
TO MAIN MENU
RESET
BACK
Figure 10
**
SYSTEM
**
If you wish to change the current source,
or make adjustments to a different
source, then make sure that the ›cursor
is next to the SOURCEline, and select
7
SYSTEM
5. 1
7. 1
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
›
BACK
TO
MAIN
MENU
it by pressing the Set Button s
.
With the SOURCESmenu on screen
and the DVD/CD changer source selected,
scroll down to the AUDIOMODE
menu (Figure 14).
A list of available sources will appear
(Figure 11). Scroll to the desired source
and select it, or to retain the previous
source, scroll to the BACKTO
Figure 7
**
SYSTEM
**
*
AUDIO
MODE
*
SOURCESMENUline and select it.
ARE
WANT
YOU
TO
SURE
YOU
›
DVD
CD
AUDIO
VIDEO
AUDIO
WMA
CHANGE
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
*
SOURCES
› CABLE/SAT
DVD/CD CHANGER
*
CD
TO
5. 1?
MP3
NO
›
A/V
AUX
BACK
TO
AUDIO
MODE
MENU
YES
VCR
DIGITAL
RECORDER
DVI
INPUT/COMPUTER
GAME/CAMERA
TUNER
Figure 8
BACK
TO
SOURCES
MENU
Figure 14
Source Configuration
The options available for the DVD-Audio
disc audio modes differ from the other
disc types because the DVD-Audio format
outputs 5.1-channel audio that is not sub-
ject to further surround processing. How-
ever, as indicated by the available options
shown in Fig. 15, you may select whether
to pass the audio output directly to the
speakers without any bass management
Figure 11
The SOURCESsubmenu enables you
to configure both the internal DVD/CD
changer and any external sources for dig-
ital audio inputs, audio surround mode,
video input (for external sources only) and
video screen aspect ratio (for external
sources only).
For external sources, you may assign a
digital audio input by scrolling to the
AUDIOINPUTline and selecting
from the analog audio input, or the coaxial
or optical digital audio input assigned to
that source (see Figures 12 and 13). This
selection is not available for the internal
DVD/CD changer, which internally passes
its digital audio signal directly to the
audio section of the CVR700.
With the MAIN MENUon screen,
scroll down to the SOURCESline and
(
)
processing DIRECT , or you may
select the BASSMANAGEMENT
press the Set Button s
. A confir-
7
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
mode, which passes the digital audio to
the CVR700’s processor so that low-fre-
quency portions of the audio may be
steered to the appropriate speakers
depending on the capabilities of your
specific speakers. If you are using the
JBL Cinema Vision speaker system,
you may leave the DVD-Audio disc
audio mode at the default BASS
MANAGEMENTsetting. If you are
using other speakers, you should select
DIRECT, and make sure to configure
your speakers using the SPEAKERS
submenu as described on page 48.
signals are played, which are only found
on DVD-Video (or DVD-Audio) discs. To
adjust the Night mode setting, make
certain that the ›cursor is on the
NIGHTline. Next, press the ‹/›
*
› DIGITAL
DIGITAL
DOLBY
5. 1
*
EX
PL
PL
PL
PL
PL
II
MOVIE
MOVIE
MUSIC
MUSIC
5. 1
7. 1
5. 1
7. 1
5. 1
IIx
II
IIx
II
EMUL
3-STEREO
Navigation Controls q
6
to choose
BACK TO
SOURCES
MENU
between the following settings, as they
appear in the Lower Display Line E:
Figure 17
OFF: When OFF is highlighted, the
Night mode will not function.
Although you are encouraged to experi-
ment with the various audio surround
modes as you become more familiar with
your system, at this time it is recommended
that you select Logic 7 Cinema (Movie)
for DVD-Video and VCD discs, and for
video sources such as cable television,
and Logic 7 Music for audio CDs, MP3s,
WMAs, the AM/FM tuner and other
audio-only sources to complete the setup
process. Select the 7.1 version if your
system is in 7.1-channel operation, or the
5.1 version if you are using 5.1-channel
operation.
MEDIUMCOMPRESSION: A
mild compression will be applied, when
MEDIUMCOMPRESSIONis
highlighted.
*
DVD
AUDIO
*
MAXIMUMCOMPRESSION: When
MAXIMUMCOMPRESSIONis
highlighted, a more severe compression
algorithm will be applied.
›
DIRECT
BASS
MANAGEMENT
We recommend that you select the
BACK
TO
SOURCES
MENU
MEDIUMsetting as a starting point
and change to the MAXIMUMsetting
later, if desired. The Night mode may also
be adjusted directly any time a Dolby
Digital source is playing by pressing the
Figure 15
The available audio modes for DVD -
Video, audio CD, Video CD and com-
pressed audio discs are reflected in
Figure 16. Note, however, that the
options shown each encompass a suite of
surround modes. Although a more com-
plete explanation of the available sur-
round modes may be found on page 62,
the DOLBYsurround mode submenu
serves as a good example (Figure 17).
Note that some modes may not be avail-
able, depending on how you set your
system configuration in the SYSTEM
submenu above (Figure 7). For example,
the DIGITALEX,PLIIx
MOVIE7.1and PLIIx
Note that the audio mode setup for
DVD-Video discs is slightly different
than for the other disc types. With the
SOURCESmenu (Figure 10) on
screen, instead of scrolling to the
AUDIOMODEline as for the other
disc types, continue scrolling until the
›cursor is next to the DVD-Vline
and select it. The DVD VIDEOsub-
menu (Figure 18) will appear. Although
audio mode selection is similar to the
other disc types, the sub mode (e.g.,
Music 7.1 for Logic 7) is displayed
separately on the TYPEline.
Night Mode Button Z
. When the
14
button is pressed, D-RANGEwill
appear in the lower third of the video
screen and in the Lower Display Line
E. Press the ⁄¤ Navigation
Controls qwithin 3 seconds to select
the desired setting.
*
DOLBY
DIGITAL
MODE
*
NIGHT
›
OFF
MEDIUM
COMPRESSION
COMPRESSION
MAXIMUM
BACK
TO
DVD
VIDEO
MENU
*
DVD/CD
CHANGER
*
DVD VIDEO
MUSIC7.1modes are only available
for 7.1-channel systems. In addition, the
DIGITAL5.1and DIGITAL
EXmodes are only available when source
materials that are encoded in the Dolby
Digital 5.1 or Dolby Digital EX format are
actually playing.
›
AUDIO
MODE:
LOGIC
MOVIE
N/A
7
Figure 18a
TYPE:
MODE:
7. 1
NIGHT
RESET
TO
FACTORY
SETTNG
No additional adjustments are available
for the internal DVD/CD changer, as the
SOURCE A.R.line of Figure 10 is
automatically set to 16:9and may not
be adjusted.
BACK
TO
MAIN
MENU
Figure 18
However, the video input and aspect ratio
(video screen) for external sources may
be adjusted. Scroll to the VIDEO
INPUTline to select a composite
video, S-video, or for the CABLE/SAT,
DIGITAL RECORDER and GAME/CAMERA
sources only, a component video input for
each external source. In addition, scroll to
the SOURCE A.R.line to specify
whether the source uses a 16:9 or 4:3
aspect ratio, or select auto detection.
*
CD
7
VIDEO
*
The DVDVIDEOsubmenu (Fig. 18)
also enables you to adjust the Night
Mode setting. The Night Mode setting
may be accessed directly from the
›
LOGIC
DOLBY
DTS
STEREO
DSP
SOURCESmenu (Figure 12) for other
source inputs. The Night mode is a fea-
ture of Dolby Digital that preserves the
dynamic range and full intelligibility of a
movie soundtrack while reducing the
peak level. This prevents abruptly loud
transitions from disturbing others, with-
out reducing the sonic impact of a digital
source. The Night mode is only available
when specially encoded Dolby Digital
BACK
TO
SOURCES
MENU
Figure 16
The SOURCESmenu also
contains a RESETTOFACTORY
SETTINGSline that allows you to
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
reset that source to the factory default
settings.
When SMALLis selected, low-fre-
quency sounds will be sent only to the
subwoofer output. If you choose this
option and there is no subwoofer con-
nected, you will not hear any low-fre-
quency sounds from the front channels.
* SPEAKER
CONFIGURATION
BASS MANAGER
:SMALL
AND
*
FRONT
›
CENTER:SMALL
Speaker Configuration
SIDE
BACK
SURROUNDS:SMALL
SURROUNDS:SMALL
SUBWOOFER:ON
It is important to make sure that the
CVR700 is correctly configured for your
speakers so that low frequency portions
of the audio program will be steered to
the appropriate loudspeakers (this is
called bass management). Speaker con-
figuration also ensures that there are no
time delay artifacts caused by the speak-
ers being placed at varying distances
from the listening position. And it is in
this section that the output levels are
adjusted to ensure that all speaker chan-
nels are balanced, preserving the direc-
tionality and dynamism of the original
recording.
BASS
MGR:GLOBAL
THESE SETTINGS?
RESET
BACK
TO
SPEAKERS
MENU
When LARGEis selected, a full-range
output will be sent to the front left and
front right outputs. Only LFE-channel infor-
mation will be directed to the subwoofer.
Figure 21
Configuring Speaker Sizes
When you have completed your selection
for the front channel, press the ⁄/¤
The first step is to configure speaker sizes.
You may skip this step if you are using JBL
Cinema Vision speakers at all positions. If
you are using other model or brand loud-
speakers, you should NOT skip this menu.
Scroll to the CONFIGURATIONline
and select it to display the SPEAKER
CONFIGURATIONANDBASS
MANAGERsubmenu (Figure 21). For
each of these settings, use the LARGE
setting if the speakers for a particular
position are traditional full-range loud-
speakers. Use the SMALLsetting for
smaller, frequency-limited satellite speak-
ers that do not reproduce sounds below
200Hz. Note that when “small” speakers
are used, a subwoofer is required to
reproduce low-frequency sounds.
Navigation Controls q
to move
the cursor to CENTER. Press the ‹/›
Navigation Controls q to select
4
6
the option that best describes your sys-
tem, based on these speaker definitions:
When SMALLis selected, low-fre-
quency center channel sounds will be
sent only to the subwoofer output. If you
choose this option and there is no sub-
woofer connected, you will not hear low-
frequency sounds from the center channel.
If you are using JBL Cinema Vision loud-
speakers, you will be able to skip some
of these settings, as the CVR700 has
been preprogrammed at the factory to
accommodate your speakers. However,
you will need to program the distances
and speaker output levels to conform to
your specific listening room.
When LARGEis selected, a full-range
output will be sent to the center speaker
output, and NO center channel signal will
be sent to the subwoofer output.
With the MAINMENU(Figure 6) on
screen, scroll to the SPEAKERSline
and select it, and the confirmation screen
(Figure 19) will appear, allowing you an
opportunity to retain the previous set-
tings. Note that the RESETline indi-
cates that all sources will have their
speaker settings reset if you choose the
reset option. Speaker settings are global,
and only need to be set once, unless you
change the BASSMGRline in the
SPEAKERCONFIGURATION
submenu (Fig. 21) to INDEPENDENT.
Select YESto change the speaker set-
tings and continue to the SPEAKERS
submenu (Figure 20).
NOTE: If you choose Logic 7 as the sur-
round mode for the particular input
Remember that the “large” and “small”
descriptions do not refer to the actual
physical size of the speakers, but to
their ability to reproduce low-frequency
sounds. If you are in doubt as to which
category describes your speakers, consult
the specifications in the speakers’
source for which you are configuring
your speakers, the CVR700 will not make
the LARGEoption available for the
center speaker. This is due to the require-
ments of Logic 7 processing, and does
not indicate a problem with your receiver.
owner’s manual, or ask your dealer.
When NONEis selected, no signals will
be sent to the center channel output. The
receiver will operate in a “phantom” cen-
ter channel mode and center channel
information will be sent to the left and
right front channel outputs.
The factory default sets all channels
to SMALL, except for the BACK
SURROUNDS, which are set to
NONE, as the factory default system
configuration is for a 5.1-channel system.
NOTE: This setting is not affected by
changing the System Configuration setting
(see Figure 7). In order to benefit from
full 7.1-channel operation, you must
change both the System Configuration
setting and you must enable the Back
Surround speakers in the SPEAKER
CONFIGURATION AND BASS
MANAGERsubmenu (Figure 21).
When you have completed your selection
for the center channel, press the ⁄/¤
**
SPEAKERS
**
ARE
YOU
TO
SURE
YOU
4
Navigation Controls q
to move
WANT
CHANGE
SPEAKER
SETTINGS?
the cursor to SIDESURROUNDS.
Press the ‹/›Navigation Controls
NO
›
YES
6
RESET
ALL
SPEAKERS
q
to select the option that best
TO
FACTORY SETTINGS?
describes the surround speakers in your
system based on these speaker definitions:
Figure 19
When SMALLis selected, low-fre-
quency surround channel sounds will be
sent to the subwoofer output only. If you
choose this option and there is no sub-
woofer connected, you will not hear any
low-frequency sounds from the side sur-
round channels.
Begin the speaker setup process by mak-
ing certain that the cursor is pointing at
the FRONTline, which sets the config-
uration for the front left and right speak-
ers. If you wish to make a change to the
front speakers’ configuration, press the
*
SPEAKERS
*
CONFIGURATION
CROSSOVERS
DISTANCES
LEVELS
›
‹/›Navigation Controls q
6
so that either LARGEor SMALL
appears, matching the appropriate
description from these definitions:
BACK
TO
MAIN
MENU
When LARGEis selected, a full-range
output will be sent to the side surround
channel outputs, and NO surround channel
Figure 20
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
signals will be sent to the subwoofer output.
appears in the on-screen menu. When
this option is selected, all bass infor-
mation will be routed to the front
left/right “main” speakers.
of reproducing, but it may be different for
speakers that include a powered woofer
section intended to reproduce the LFE
channel. Before making any changes to
the settings for the crossover point, we
suggest that you find the crossover point
for the speakers in each of the four
groupings, front left/right, center front,
side surround and back surround, by look-
ing at the specifications page of each
speaker’s owner’s manual, by getting that
information from the manufacturer’s Web
site, or by contacting your dealer or the
manufacturer’s customer service depart-
ment. You will need this figure to accu-
rately configure the next group of settings.
When NONEis selected, surround
sound information will be split between
the front left and front right outputs. For
optimal performance when no surround
speakers are in use, the Dolby 3 Stereo
mode should be used.
• If a subwoofer is connected to the
CVR700, you have the option to have
the front left/right “main” speakers
reproduce bass frequencies at all
When you have completed your selec-
tions for the side surround channels,
press the ⁄/¤ Navigation Controls
times, and have the subwoofer operate
only when the CVR700 is being used
with a digital source that contains a
dedicated low-frequency effects, or LFE
soundtrack. This allows you to use both
your main and subwoofer speakers to
take advantage of the special bass
sounds created for some movies. Note,
however, that the subwoofer will only
play the LFE information. Press the
q
to move the cursor to BACK
SURROUNDS. Press the ‹/›
Navigation Controls q to select
4
6
the option that best describes the speakers
in use at the left and right back surround
positions based on these definitions:
Note that when any speaker group other
than the front left/right speakers is set to
LARGE, the crossover may not be
adjusted, as the feed will be full-range,
with no sound being derived for the sub-
woofer at that position. The factory
default setting for all speaker positions
is 90Hz. To change one of the settings,
return to the SPEAKERSsubmenu
(Figure 20), and then scroll to the
CROSSOVERSline and select it.
The SPEAKERCROSSOVERS
submenu (Figure 22) will be displayed.
To change the setting for any of the
four speaker groups, press the ⁄/¤
When NONEis selected, the system
will adjust so that only 5.1-channel sur-
round processing/decoding modes are
available and the surround back amplifier
channels will not be used. This setting will
override any setting made previously in
the SYSTEMCONFIGURATION
submenu (Figure 7).
‹/›Navigation Controls q
6
so that ONappears in the on-screen
menu.
The BASSMGRsetting allows you to
use the same speaker configuration set-
tings for all inputs, or to have different
settings for each input. In most cases, the
factory default setting of GLOBALwill
be appropriate, as most listeners do not
need to have individualized speaker set-
tings. However, some listeners, particu-
larly those with full-range front speakers
that are used for both movies and music,
may prefer that different bass manage-
ment settings be used when listening to
music through a CD player as opposed
to a movie from a DVD player, VCR or
cable/satellite set-top.
When SMALLis selected, the system
will adjust so that the full complement of
6.1/7.1 surround processing/ decoding
modes are available, and low-frequency
information below the crossover point
will be sent to the subwoofer output. If
you choose this option and there is no
subwoofer connected, you will not hear
any low-frequency sounds from the sur-
round back channels.
Navigation Controls q
until the
4
cursor is next to the speaker group where
you wish to make a change and then
press the ‹/›Navigation Controls
q
6
until the desired setting
When LARGEis selected, the system
will adjust so that the full complement
of 6.1/7.1 surround processing/decoding
modes are available, and a full-range
signal will be sent to the surround back
channels, with no low-frequency informa-
tion sent to the subwoofer output.
appears. The available choices for low-
frequency information to be sent to the
subwoofer, rather than to the main
Use the ‹/›Navigation Controls
q
to change this setting to
6
INDEPENDENT. You may now
change the source input and return to the
SPEAKERCONFIGURATION
menu and adjust the speaker sizes to suit
the source.
speaker channel, are 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz,
90Hz, 100Hz, 120Hz and 200Hz. Pick the
choice that is identical to the information
for your speakers, or if an exact match is
not possible, pick the closest choice that
is ABOVE the speaker’s low-frequency
limit or crossover point to avoid the cre-
ation of a low-frequency “hole” where
your system will have no bass informa-
tion. The setting for the crossover point
for the LFE channel, which is created to
provide specific low-frequency informa-
tion in many movies with digital sound-
tracks, may be set to match the cross-
over for any of the four speaker groups.
Since the crossover point commonly
used in the creation of the LFE channel
SUBWOOFERis 120Hz, we recom-
mend that you select the speaker group
whose crossover point is closest to
When you have completed your selection
for the back surround channels, press the
Speaker Crossover
Configuration
⁄/¤ Navigation Controls q
4
to move the cursor to SUBWOOFER.
When all initial speaker “size” settings
have been made, you now have the
option to take advantage of the CVR700’s
Quadruple Crossover system, which
allows individual crossover settings to be
made for each speaker grouping. Again,
if you are using JBL Cinema Vision loud-
speakers, you may skip this submenu, as
the factory default settings are appropri-
ate for your speakers.
Press the ‹/›Navigation Controls
6
q
to select the option that best
describes your system. The choices avail-
able for the subwoofer position will
depend on the settings for the other
speakers, particularly the front left/right
positions. If the front left/right speakers
are set to SMALL, the subwoofer will
automatically be set to ON. If the front
left/right speakers are set to LARGE,
two options are available:
The low-frequency crossover point is set
by the design of your speakers. Depending
on the design and driver complement of
your speakers, it is usually the lowest
possible frequency the speaker is capable
• If no subwoofer is connected to the
CVR700, press the ‹/›Navigation
120Hz. To do this, press the ⁄/¤
6
Controls q
so that OFF
Navigation Controls q
until the
4
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Delay times are adjustable only for the
Dolby and DTS modes, so you will notice
that the DISTANCESmenu may not
be accessed for other modes, such as
Logic 7. In addition, when a non-Dolby
Digital mode such as Dolby 3 Stereo or
Dolby Pro Logic II is selected, adjust-
ments may be made to the Surround
speakers only. To set the delay time for a
specific input, you will need to access the
SPEAKERDISTANCESsubmenu
(Figure 23). With the SPEAKERSsub-
menu (Figure 20) on screen, scroll down
to the DISTANCESline and select
it. Note that this line will not be available
if the audio surround mode for the current
source was not set to a Dolby mode. You
may need to return to the SOURCES
submenu (Figure 10) and select a Dolby
audio mode before adjusting the distance
settings.
speaker position in place of a distance
setting indicates that you have not config-
ured an active speaker for that location.
cursor is next to the SUBWOOFER
line, and then press the ‹/›
Navigation Controls q
6
until
the name of the speaker group with the
desired crossover frequency appears. Of
course, you may also experiment with dif-
ferent settings to find the one that pro-
vides the smoothest and most complete
bass response in your particular listening
environment.
When the delay time for all speaker posi-
tions has been set you may return to the
master menu by scrolling to BACKTO
MASTERMENUand then pressing
the Set Button s
. However, if you
7
have a digital video source or a digital
video display that causes lack of lip sync
you may use the Lip Sync adjust feature
to delay the audio signal as it is sent to
all channels (as opposed to the individual
settings) so that the picture and sound
are brought back together. That adjust-
ment is available in the LIPSYNC
submenu of the MAINMENU, and
will be described on page 53.
*
SPEAKER
CROSSOVERS
*
›
FRONT
:
90
90
Hz
Hz
CENTER:
SIDE
BACK
SURROUNDS:
SURROUNDS:
90
90
Hz
Hz
SUBWOOFER:
90
Hz
RESET
THESE
SETTINGS?
BACK
TO
SPEAKERS
MENU
Figure 22
Output Level Adjustment
Speaker Distances
Output level adjustment is a key part of
the configuration of any surround sound
product. It is particularly important for
a digital system such as JBL Cinema
Vision, as correct outputs ensure that you
hear soundtracks with the proper direc-
tionality and intensity.
Due to the different distances between
the listening position and each speaker
position, the amount of time it takes for
sound to reach your ears from each chan-
nel is different. You may compensate for
this difference through the use of the dis-
tance settings to adjust the timing for the
speaker placement and acoustic condi-
tions in your listening room or home the-
ater. The CVR700’s advanced software
enables you to quickly and easily set
delay times without the need to calculate
them using a complex formula. Instead,
all you need to do is measure the approx-
imate distance between your listening
position and each of the speakers in your
system. When you enter those distances
into the CVR700’s memory as shown below,
the CVR700’s microprocessor does the
rest of the work, calculating the proper
delay time. The measurements need not
be accurate to the inch, as the system is
designed to accommodate a typical lis-
tening area rather than require the pre-
cise measurement to one “sweet spot”
position.
*
SPEAKER
FRONT
DISTANCES
*
:
10
10
FT
FT
›
CENTER:
SIDE
BACK
UNIT
RESET
SURROUNDS:
SURROUNDS:
10
10
FT
FT
OF
MEASURE:
FEET
THESE
SETTINGS?
BACK
TO
SPEAKERS
MENU
IMPORTANT NOTE: Listeners are often
confused about the operation of the sur-
round channels. While some assume that
sound should always be coming from
each speaker, most of the time there will
be little or no sound in the surround
channels. This is because they are only
used when a movie director or sound
mixer specifically places sound there to
create ambience, a special effect or to
continue action from the front of the
room to the rear. When the output levels
are properly set, it is normal for surround
speakers to operate only occasionally.
Artificially increasing the volume to the
rear speakers may destroy the illusion of
an enveloping sound field that duplicates
the way you hear sound in a movie the-
ater or concert hall.
Figure 23
Once the SPEAKERDISTANCES
submenu (Figure 23) is on your screen,
note that the default unit of measure for
distance settings is feet. If your measure-
ments are in feet, proceed to the next
step; if your measurements are made in
meters, press the ⁄/¤ Navigation
Controls q
4
until the on-screen ›
cursor is at the UNITOFMEASURE
line on the menu. Then, press the ‹/›
Navigation Controls q
so that
6
METERis highlighted. When the
change in measurement units is made,
press the ⁄/¤ Navigation Controls
q
4
to return the ›cursor to the
FRONTposition. With the on-screen ›
cursor pointing to FRONT, press the
Before beginning the output level adjust-
ment process, make certain that all
Due to the differences between the way
surround modes operate, some modes
allow for a greater range of delay times
than others. To avoid problems, we rec-
ommend that delay times be adjusted
using the Dolby Digital mode. It may be
necessary to play a Dolby Digital disc so
that the CVR700 can process the signal
and make the DISTANCESsubmenu
accessible. If a different mode is selected
at a later time, the CVR700 will automati-
cally select the closest delay settings
available for the surround mode in use.
‹/›Navigation Controls q
6
speaker connections have been properly
made. The system volume should be set
to the level that you will use during a typ-
ical listening session. While the CVR700
allows you to set output levels manually,
we recommend that the EzSet system be
used when the CVR700 is first installed
to establish the initial level settings.
until the distance from the front left and
right speakers to the preferred listening
position is entered. Next, scroll down to
the CENTERline and enter the dis-
tance from the main listening position to
the center speaker. Repeat the procedure
for all active speaker positions. Note that
only the speaker positions that have been
set to LARGEor SMALLin the
SPEAKERCONFIGURATION
submenu (Figure 21) may be adjusted.
The appearance of five dashes next to a
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
speaker position on the left side of the
display and the offset from reference
level on the right side of the display.
As the levels are adjusted, the speaker
position and a level indication will
appear in the bottom line of the
damage to your hearing or your equip-
ment, it is important to avoid setting
the master volume above 0dB.
Using EzSet
The JBL Cinema Vision EzSet (main)
remote makes it possible to quickly and
accurately set the output levels without
the use of a sound-pressure meter,
although manual adjustment is also avail-
able. However, for the easiest setup, fol-
low these steps while seated in the listen-
ing position that will be used most often:
NOTE: The subwoofer output is not
adjusted when the test tone is in use. To
adjust the subwoofer output, you must
use an external source, following the
instructions on page 64.
remote’s LCD display (Figure 26).
Z
E T
d
Manual Output Level
Adjustment
1. Make certain that all speaker positions
have been properly configured for their
“large” or “small” settings and turn off
the OSD system if it is in use.
Figure 26
Output levels may also be adjusted man-
ually, either to set them to a specific
level with an SPL meter, or to make fine
tuning adjustments to the levels obtained
using the EzSet remote. In order to adjust
the subwoofer’s output level, you must
use the manual adjustment method.
• The channel position being adjusted
will flash in the Speaker/Channel
Input Indicators F. If the test noise
is heard from a channel other than the
one shown in the indicator, there is an
error in the speaker connections. If this
is the case, press the Remote Menu
Button b to stop the adjustment.
Then turn the unit off and verify that all
speakers are connected to the proper
Speaker Outputs ¡™£¢.
2. Adjust the volume so that it is at –2dB,
as shown in the on-screen display or
Lower Display Line E.
3. Press and hold the SPL Button j
until the red LED under the SPL
Manual output level adjustment may be
performed using either the on-screen
SPEAKERLEVELSsubmenu,
or using the main remote control.
Button jlights and the LCD screen
in the remote changes to the display
shown in Figure 24. (You may also nav-
igate to the screen shown in Figure 24
by pressing and holding the Remote
Menu Button b for 3 seconds until
the main remote menu appears; then
scroll to the SET SPKR LEVELS option
and press the Set Button s.)
Using the On-Screen Menu System
• During the adjustment process for each
channel, you will see indications of
With the SPEAKERSsubmenu on
screen, scroll down to the LEVELS
LOW, HIGH and a level readout in
This is normal, and it confirms that
EzSet is doing its job of changing the
levels to match the desired reference.
.
7
line and press the Set Button s
.
The SPEAKERLEVELSsubmenu
(Figure 27) will appear. All of the values
should be set at 0dB. If not, you may
wish to scroll down to the RESET
THESESETTINGSline and press
• If a channel cannot be adjusted to the
proper reference level, you will see
FAIL displayed in the remote’s bottom
LCD line before the test tone moves to
the next channel. This is usually an
indication that the volume control was
set too low. When EzSet stops circulat-
ing the tone through all channels and
returns to normal, adjust the volume
level and repeat the procedure from
Step 3.
Figure 24
the Set Button s
effect the reset.
7
4. Press the Set Button jwithin 5
seconds so that the screen shown in
Figure 25 appears. Press the ⁄/¤
Navigation Controls quntil the
lower line of the remote’s LCD display
shows the number of speakers in your
system. (Don’t count the subwoofer.)
For example, if you have left, center,
right, side surround left and right, and
back surround left and right speakers
for a full 7.1 system, press the button
twice so that the bottom line reads
7 CHANNELS, as shown in Fig. 25.
*
SPEAKER
LEVELS
*
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
› FRONT
CENTER
FRONT
LEFT
:
:
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
RIGHT
SURR
:
SIDE
BACK
BACK
SIDE
RIGHT:
RIGHT:
SURR
SURR
SURR
LEFT
LEFT
:
:
:
SUBWOOFER
RESET
TEST
BACK
THESE
TONE
TO SPEAKERS
SETTINGS?
:
OFF
MENU
6. After the test noise has circulated once
through each channel, it will send the
tone to each channel once again, to
verify the settings.
Figure 27
Scroll down to the TESTTONEline
and use the ‹/›Navigation Controls
7. After two complete circulations of the
tone, the levels are set. Upon comple-
tion of the second circulation, the LCD
Information Display 2 will flash
COMPLETE four times and then go
out. The tone will stop and the CVR700
will return to normal operation.
q
6
so that ON appears. The inter-
nal test tone will begin to circulate from
speaker to speaker in a clockwise direc-
tion and will be heard from all speakers
in turn, playing for two seconds in each
speaker before continuing, and a blinking
on-screen cursor will appear next to the
name of each speaker location when the
sound is at that speaker.
#
Figure 25
5. Hold the remote in front of you at arm’s
length, being sure not to cover the
EzSet Microphone Sensor at the top of
the remote, and press the Set Button
jwithin 5 seconds to begin the
EzSet calibration process. At this point,
EzSet will take control of your system,
starting the test tone at the front left
speaker, and automatically adjusting
the output level so that it is correct.
During the adjustment, the Lower
Display Line Ewill display the
If you find that the output levels cho-
sen by EzSet are either uncomfortably
low or high, you may repeat the proce-
dure. Return to Step 2 and adjust the
master volume either slightly higher or
lower to accommodate your particular
room layout and your tastes. You may
repeat this procedure as many times
as necessary to achieve a desired
result. In order to prevent possible
Alternatively, you may leave the test tone
turned off and play a favorite piece of
program material, such as a CD music
selection or a DVD movie. With the
SPEAKERLEVELSsubmenu on
screen you will be able to adjust the out-
put levels using the source material as a
reference.
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTE: Remember to verify that the
speakers have been properly connected.
As the test noise circulates, listen to
make certain that the sound comes from
the speaker position shown in the Lower
Display Line E. If the sound from a
speaker location does NOT match the
position indicated in the display, stop the
test tone by pressing the Test Tone
It is not necessary to make these adjust-
ments during the initial setup, and you
may skip this section, returning to it later
when you have more experience with
the system.
Figure 28
3. Press the Set Button swithin 5
seconds to activate the remote’s manual
mode, so that it functions as an SPL
meter. The right corner of the bottom
line of the remote’s display will show
the output level of the speakers as the
test tone circulates. The level will
show as a direct SPL indication
*
ADVANCED
SETTINGS
*
FRNT
PNL
BRGHTNESS:FULL
›
VOLUME DEFAULT
:ON
VOL
DEFAULT
LEVEL
:Ð25
MAIN
FAN:
RESET
MENU
TIMEOUT
:
20
MINIMUM
ALL OF
SETTINGS?
MAIN MENU
NOISE
Button h
twice, then turn the
14
THE ABOVE
CVR700 off using the Main Power
Switch 1and check the speaker wiring
to make certain that each speaker is con-
nected to the correct output terminal.
TO
FACTORY
TO
BACK
between 66dB and 79dB. Below 66dB
the remote will read LOW and above
79dB it will read HIGH.
Figure 29
After checking for speaker placement, let
the test noise circulate again, and listen
to see which channels sound louder than
the others. Using the front left speaker as
a reference, press the ‹/›Navigation
Front-Panel Brightness
4. When all channels have an equal vol-
ume level, the adjustment is complete.
When you are finished with all adjust-
ments, press the Test Tone Button
7 to return the remote to normal
operation. The word EXITING will
blink four times, and the remote will
switch to the DVD/MAIN mode.
The CVR700’s front-panel displays and
indicators are set at a default brightness
level that is sufficient for viewing in a
normally lit room. However, you may wish
to occasionally lower the brightness of
the display, or turn it off completely. The
FRNTPNLBRGHTNESSsetting
defaults to full brightness, but you may
adjust it to dim the display to half bright-
ness, or turn the display off altogether.
The LED inside the Main Power On/Off
Button 1will always remain lit to
Controls q
the same volume level. When the ‹/›
Navigation Controls q are
6
to bring all speakers to
6
pressed, the test noise circulation will
pause on the channel being adjusted to
give you time to make the adjustment.
When you release the button, the circula-
tion will resume after 5 seconds. Continue
to adjust individual channels until the vol-
ume level sounds the same from each
speaker. Adjustments should be made
with only the ‹/›Navigation Controls
q, NOT the main volume controls.
NOTE: The subwoofer level is not
adjustable when the normal test tone is
in use. The subwoofer output level may
be adjusted when the channel levels are
being trimmed to a program source rather
than the test tone.
remind you that the unit is turned on. The
setting is temporary, and will only remain
in effect until the unit is turned off.
The output levels may also be adjusted at
any time using the remote control and
front-panel display. To adjust the output
levels in this fashion, press the Test
Tone Button 7. As soon as the button
is pressed, the test tone will begin to cir-
culate as indicated earlier. The correct
channel from which the test noise should
be heard will be shown in the Lower
Display Line E. While the test noise is
circulating, the proper channel position
will also be indicated in the Speaker/
Channel Input Indicators Fby a
blinking letter within the correct channel.
To adjust the output level, press the
⁄/¤ Navigation Controls quntil
the desired level is shown in the display.
Once the buttons are released, the test
noise will begin to circulate again in 5
seconds. When all channels have the
same output level, press the Test Tone
Button 7 again to complete the process.
Volume Default
If you are using a sound-pressure level
(SPL) meter for precise level adjustment,
set the volume so that the meter reads
75dB on the C-Weighting, Slow scale.
As is the case with most audio/video
receivers, when the CVR700 is turned on,
it will always return to the volume setting
in effect when the unit was turned off.
However, you may prefer to always have
the CVR700 turn on at a specific setting,
regardless of what was last in use when
the unit was turned off. The VOLUME
DEFAULTfeature may be turned on
or off. The factory default setting is OFF.
To set the feature, first turn the OSD sys-
tem off and adjust the system volume to
the desired default turn-on level. This
level will be displayed on the front panel
as a negative offset from the reference
volume of 0dB, which is the system maxi-
mum. For example, you may find a level
of –25dB to be a comfortable default
turn-on volume. Make a note of this num-
ber, as you will not be able to adjust the
volume from within the ADVANCED
SETTINGSsubmenu.
Using the Remote as an SPL Meter
The EzSet feature on the main remote
may also be used as an SPL meter to
assist in accurate setting of the output
levels, when either the internal test tone
or favorite source material, such as a test
disc, is used. To use the remote as an
SPL meter, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the SPL Select Button
9 until the red LED under the Set
Button slights and the LCD screen
in the remote changes to the display
shown in Figure 24. (You may also nav-
igate to the screen shown in Figure 24
by pressing and holding the Remote
Menu Button b for 3 seconds until
the main remote menu appears; then
scroll to the SET SPKR LEVELS
NOTE: Output level adjustment is not
available for the Surround Off mode.
Advanced Settings
Next, press the OSD Button D
to
36
option and press the Set Button s.)
display the MAINMENU, and then
scroll to the ADVANCEDline and
select it to display the ADVANCED
SETTINGSsubmenu (Figure 29).
Scroll down to the VOLUME
The ADVANCEDSETTINGSsub-
menu (Figure 29) may be accessed from
the MAINMENU(Figure 6). It con-
tains some additional settings that will
enhance the convenience of the CVR700.
2. Press the ⁄/¤ Navigation
Controls qto change the bottom
line of the remote’s LCD display to read
MANUAL SPL as shown in Figure 28.
DEFAULTline and set it to ON.
52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the CVR700 in a location with adequate
ventilation, and several inches clearance
on the top and sides.
appear. Use the ⁄/¤ Navigation
Scroll down one more line to the VOL
DEFAULTLEVELline, and use the
4
Controls q
to scroll to the desired
delay setting and press the Set Button
Navigation Controls q
6
to
4
s
7
to select that setting. To retain
select the setting you chose above as a
comfortable default turn-on volume. Press
The CVR700 is equipped with a fan to
provide cooling. The fan is always turning
at one of three speeds, depending upon
the setting you choose for the FANline
of the ADVANCEDSETTINGS
submenu.
the current setting without making any
changes, scroll to the BACKTO
MAINMENUline and press the
the Set Button s
7
to enter your
selection into memory. Your setting will
be retained, even after the unit is pow-
ered off.
Set Button s
.
7
*
AUDIO
TIME
DELAY
*
Main Menu Time-Out
The default setting is MINIMUM
NOISE. At this setting, the fan will
turn at its slowest speed when the vol-
ume is set below –20dB, and slightly
faster at a medium speed whenever the
volume is –20dB or higher. This intelli-
gent cooling scheme minimizes distract-
ing fan noise while maintaining proper
operating temperatures.
0
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
50
60
70
80
90
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
›
10
20
30
40
The OSD menu system is used to simplify
the setup and adjustment of the CVR700
by using a series of on-screen menus.
The factory default setting for these
menus leaves them on the screen for 20
seconds after a period of inactivity before
they disappear from the screen (Time-
Out). Time-Out is a safety measure to
prevent image retention of the menu text
in your video display, which might happen
if it were left on indefinitely. This is of
particular concern for plasma displays
such as the CVPD50. However, some
viewers may prefer a slightly longer or
shorter period before the on-screen dis-
play disappears.
100
BACK
TO
MAIN
MENU
Figure 30
This completes the setup of the CVR700
audio section. There remain a few minor
adjustments to be made, if desired, to the
setup menu for the internal DVD/CD
changer, and you may wish to make some
advanced settings to the Screen menus,
then you will be able to enjoy the finest
in home theater entertainment.
You may choose the MAXIMUM
COOLINGsetting instead. At this
setting, the fan runs at full speed at all
times. This setting is recommended when
the CVR700 is placed inside a cabinet.
ADVANCEDSETTINGSsubmenu
settings may be reset to their factory
defaults by scrolling to the RESET
ALLOFTHEABOVETO
DVD Setup
With the ADVANCEDSETTINGS
submenu on screen, scroll down to the
OSDTIMEOUTline. Use the ‹/›
The DVD Setup menus are accessed by
first making sure that the CVR700 and
CVPD50 are properly installed and con-
nected, and then pressing the Power On
FACTORYSETTINGS?line and
pressing the Set Button s
7
.
Navigation Controls q
6
to select
Lip Sync
a timeout period of 20, 30, 40 or 50 sec-
onds. Your selection will be retained even
after the unit is powered off.
(All) Button b
units. Press the DVD Setup Button
to display the SETUP
1
to turn on both
In addition to adjusting the delay time
for each individual speaker position, the
CVR700 allows you to adjust the delay for
the combined output of all speakers as a
group. This feature is called Lip Sync
Delay; it allows you to compensate for
delays to the video image that may be
caused by the processing in products
such as digital video displays, video
scalars, digital cable or satellite systems,
or personal video recorders. With proper
adjustment of the setting for Lip Sync
Delay, you can eliminate the loss of lip
sync that may be caused by digital video
applications.
c
5
NOTE: The CVR700 and CVPD50 also use
a screen saver function as an additional
safety measure to prevent burnout, which
may even occur if the CVPD50’s own start-
up display is left on screen for too long a
period of time. After 2 minutes during
which no on-screen movement is detected,
the screen saver will appear. Simply press
any key on either remote or on the CVR700’s
front panel to wake the system and return
it to normal operation. The screen saver
time-out is not adjustable. Important: The
screen saver is not available for devices
connected to the DVI/Computer source
input, due to the nature of the digital
MENU(Figure 31) for the DVD/CD
changer.
SETUP MENU
TV DISPLAY
VIDEO OUT
TV TYPE
16:9 WIDE
INTERLACED
MULTI
VIDEO MODE
PARENTAL LOCK
PASSWORD
AUTO
UNLOCK
DVD AUDIO
SLIDE SHOW
ON
5
SEC
RETURN TO FACTORY SETTINGS
Figure 31
Important Note: The DVD Setup menu
functions differently from the CVR700
audio menu system. Although you will
still use the ⁄/¤ Navigation
When the CVR700 is used with the
CVPD50 plasma display, the delay due to
video processing is a known factor, and
the default Lip Sync delay time of 50ms
should be retained. However, if you are
using the CVR700 with another display, or
if you are experiencing lip sync problems
with an external source, you may wish to
adjust the delay time.
video interface. It is essential that you pro-
gram your computer or other DVI source
device to enter the screen saver mode to
prevent burnout of the CVPD50 screen.
Controls q
4
to scroll from one
line to the next, in order to scroll through
the options available for each setting,
you must repeatedly press the Set
Fan Speed
Button s
7
.
The CVR700’s 700 watts of amplification
generate a significant amount of heat
that must be dissipated in order to pre-
vent damage to delicate electrical com-
ponents that could shorten the unit’s use-
ful life, or even lead to failure. For this
reason, it is extremely important to place
If you are using the CVR700 with the
CVPD50 display screen, then you should
leave the first four lines at their factory
default settings. These settings should
only be adjusted if you are using the
CVR700 with a different video display
device.
With the MAINMENU(Figure 6) on
screen, scroll down to the LIPSYNC
line and select it by pressing the Set
Button s
. The AUDIOTIME
7
DELAYsubmenu (Figure 30) will
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Rating Levels
The first line of the SETUPMENU
is the TVDISPLAYsetting, which
should be set to match the aspect ratio of
your video display device. For the CVPD50,
this setting should be left at its factory
default of 16:9WIDE. If you are
using a different video display monitor
that has a 4:3 aspect ratio screen and is
capable of displaying a progressive scan
image, you may select the 4:3PSset-
ting, or if your display monitor has a 4:3
aspect ratio screen but does not have
progressive scan capability, you should
select the 4:3LBsetting, which will
display widescreen (16:9) images with
black bars above and below the image.
Parental Control
The five MPAA rating symbols are
“G” (General, Level 1), “PG” (Parental
Guidance, Level 3), “PG13” (Parental
Guidance and 13 years old, Level 4), “R”
(Restricted, Level 6) and “NC 17” (from
17 years old, Level 7). The CVR700 will
accommodate a total of eight rating
steps, as set by the DVD creators. These
additional steps allow for more critical
control of program playback for all
audiences.
The CVR700’s Password System is used
to control viewing of restricted programs
and offers the capability to change the
password itself and the rating. The
CVR700 is shipped with “1234” as the
default password and with the parental
control settings off. The following
instructions will show how to change
the password and lock the settings.
NOTE: The DVD disc must be specifically
encoded with rating information for
Parental Control to work.
Level 8: All DVDs, including adult
materials, can be played.
Password
Levels 7 to 2: DVDs for general audi-
ences/children can be played.
If you change the password from the
factory default setting, please remember
to write the new password in a safe
place. You cannot access rated discs or
rating/password menus or change or
clear the password (see below) without
entering the correct password. If you for-
get your password, you can reset the
CVR700 to the factory default password
(1234) by scrolling to the RETURNTO
FACTORYSETTINGSline and
The second line sets the CVR700’s
Level 1: DVDs for children can be played;
DVDs for adults/general audiences are
prohibited.
Component Video Monitor Outputs
· to progressive scan or interlaced.
There is no need to adjust this setting if
you are using the CVPD50, but if you are
using these outputs with another video
display device, you must select the
INTERLACEDsetting if the display
monitor is not capable of displaying a
progressive scan signal, or you may
choose the PROGRESSIVEsetting
if your display monitor is capable of dis-
playing that type of video signal.
After you have entered or changed the
password, you may set the level of
access (see Figure 31). The lowest set-
ting, “1G” refers to materials targeted for
a general audience and considered to be
appropriate for all. Higher ratings are
given to materials targeted toward older,
more mature audiences; those materials
may not be appropriate for younger view-
ers, as described above. More informa-
tion about ratings is available at
www.mpaa.org/movieratings/. Press
the Set Button s
scroll through the rating levels. When
the desired level appears, simply use the
pressing the Set Button s
7
.
NOTE: This will restore all DVD menu
settings to the factory default settings.
Any changes you have made will be lost.
The TVTYPEline should be set to
MULTIif you will be viewing both
NTSC and PAL DVDs, or you may set it to
either NTSC, which is the video stan-
dard used for most discs available in the
United States, or PAL, which is the
video standard used for most discs avail-
able in other parts of the world.
We recommend that if you wish to
restrict access to DVDs for younger view-
ers, that you change the password as
part of the setup process. Scroll to the
PASSWORDline and select it by
repeatedly to
7
⁄/¤ Navigation Controls q
scroll to another line, and the setting will
be retained.
4
to
pressing the Set Button s
7
. The
display shown in Figure 32 will appear,
prompting you to enter the old password,
and then the new. Enter “1234” for the
old password, and then enter a new
password of your choice. Type carefully,
as a mistyped entry will be retained as
the new password, and it is not possible
to correct a mistyped digit without creat-
ing an entirely new password.
The VIDEOMODEsetting affects
the CVPD50 plasma display and the
Component Video Monitor Outputs
· (but not the other video outputs). This
setting allows you to compensate for
errors in the disc authoring where proper
maintenance of frame rate was not car-
ried out in the film-to-video conversion
process.
The DVDAUDIOline may be set to
enable playback of DVD-Audio discs or
disable playback of those types of discs.
Some DVD-Audio discs contain different
materials, including menus and audio
tracks, that are only available depending
on the capabilities of the player. For
example, when such a DVD-Audio disc is
played in a DVD-Video player that doesn’t
have DVD-Audio capability, a special
DVD-Video menu may be accessed, and
conventional audio tracks, such as Dolby
Digital 5.1 and 2-channel PCM, will be
available. However, when that same disc
is played in a DVD-Audio player, only the
DVD-Audio menu may be accessed, and
the only available audio tracks will be in
the high-resolution DVD-Audio formats.
SETUP MENU
The CVR700’s advanced adaptive inter-
lacer will handle most of these types
of problems, and it is therefore recom-
mended that you leave this line at the
factory default setting of AUTO.
However, if you observe problems with
vertical resolution on a specific disc,
experiment by selecting the FILM
mode for programs originally created
on film, or the VIDEOmode for pro-
grams originating on video.
TV DISPLAY
VIDEO OUT
TV TYPE
16:9 WIDE
INTERLACED
NTSC
VIDEO MODE
PARENTAL LOCK
PASSWORD
AUTO
OLD: ----
NEW: ----
DVD AUDIO
SLIDE SHOW
5
SEC
RETURN TO FACTORY SETTINGS
Figure 32
If for some reason you forget your pass-
word, you may override the password
control by entering “2580” as the pass-
word, and then program a new password.
JBL recognizes that there may be reasons
why you would wish to have access to all
of the materials on a DVD-Audio disc. To
access the DVD-Video materials on your
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DVD-Audio disc, change the DVD
AUDIOline to OFF. You may switch
back and forth between the ON and OFF
settings at any time to access either set
of materials.
35a), or the DVISETTINGSmenu
(Figure 35b), depending on the type of
source device you have connected to the
DVI/Computer input. Scroll down to the
Connecteddeviceline and
select the appropriate source type: DVD
HDCP, HD tuner or PC for a personal com-
puter. Any of these devices must be
equipped with either a DVI video output
or a VGA video output that you have con-
nected to the CVR700’s DVI (HDCP)/
35
SCREEN MENU
INPUTS/PIP
PICTURE
DISPLAY
ADVANCED
SETTINGS
SETTINGS
INFORMATION
EXIT
The SLIDESHOWline allows you to
set the amount of time a JPEG still image
will remain on screen before the CVR700
automatically advances to the next image
on the disc. You may set this time to 2, 3,
4 or 5 seconds.
Figure 33
IMPORTANT NOTE: The Screen Setup
menus function differently from the
CVR700 audio menu system. Although
you will still use the ⁄/¤ Navigation
Computer Video Input
using the
This completes the setup of the internal
DVD/CD changer.
supplied VGA-to-DVI adaptor cable. This
menu affects the size and position of
the DVI/Computer source picture on the
screen, and it is set by the CVPD50 auto-
matically the first time you connect your
computer or other device to the DVI video
input. After the first use, these menu set-
tings are no longer user-adjustable for
the DVI/Computer input.
Controls q
to scroll from one line
4
Screen Setup
to the next, in order to scroll through the
options available for each setting, you
must repeatedly press the Set Button
The CVPD50 plasma display screen uti-
lizes state-of-the-art digital video pro-
cessing that is contained within the
CVR700, and it is not possible to use the
CVPD50 without the CVR700 processor.
Although the video processor is extremely
flexible, making adjustments to video
display devices requires knowledge and
experience to avoid making mistakes that
could require professional assistance to
correct. Although you will not do any
damage to the CVPD50 by making these
adjustments, you could set the picture in
such a way that it is not possible to view
your favorite materials.
s
.
7
It is recommended that for initial setup,
you avoid changing any of the video set-
tings and allow the CVPD50 and CVR700
to automatically display your materials
using the factory default settings. As you
become more familiar with the system
and desire to tweak it, you may wish to
explore some of these settings.
HD&PC SETTINGS
Horizontal Frequency
Vertical Frequency
Pixel Clock
31.3kHz
50.0Hz
27.0MHz
H/V Polarities
Ð
0
0
0
0
7
Ð
Auto Setup
Horizontal Position
Vertical Position
Hirizontal Total
Vertical Resolutioin
Phase
Inputs and Picture-in-Picture
Settings
Reset default settings
Back to screen menu
Figure 35a
Scroll to the INPUTS/PIPmenu
and select it. The INPUTS/PIP
menu (Figure 34) will be displayed.
To access the screen setup menus, first
make sure the remote control is set to
Screen mode by pressing the Screen
DVI SETTINGS
Horizontal frequency
Vertical frequency
Pixel polarities
33.7kHz
59.9Hz
+/+
INPUTS/PIP
Horizontal resolution 1805
Selector e
. If this is not done,
34
Main input
Digital
Off
Vertical resolution
Connected device
986
Input settings
PIP mode
the remote will execute the commands
programmed for the current source
device, or for the CVR700 audio section.
HDCP DVD
Back to screen menu
PIP size
PIP horiz. pos.
PIP vert. pos.
Back to screen menu
Press the Screen Setup Button
Figure 35b
j
to display the SCREEN
38
MENU(Figure 33). If the current source
is an external device that you are using
with component video, or if the source
has no video output, the background will
be black. If your source uses component
video, unless you have also made an S-
video connection from the source to the
CVR700, the menus will not be displayed.
Also, if the current source is the DVI/
Computer source, the menus will not be
displayed. Otherwise, the menus will be
transparent, with the program material
visible behind them. As described below,
you may adjust the transparency of
the menus from a setting in the
Figure 34
This menu is also used to align an HDTV
picture if necessary. Great caution should
be used to avoid ending up with a video
image that is too small in size to be view-
able. You may select the reset function
if you adjust these settings incorrectly.
MainInput: The Main
Inputline is informational only
and you should not attempt to change it.
The setting will reflect the video format
of the current source. For the internal
DVD/CD changer, this setting will read
Digital. For external sources, this
setting will indicate which video input is
in use: i.e., component video, composite
video or S-video.
The first four lines contain information
only and are not adjustable. The Phase
line simply reflects the settings of the
incoming signal and is not adjustable.
• AutoSetup: This initiates the
process of detecting the incoming video
signal and adjusting the horizontal and
vertical position and size of the display.
InputSettings: The Input
Settingsline will not be accessi-
ble when the internal DVD/CD changer is
in use. The available settings will vary
depending upon the video format of the
current source.
ADVANCEDmenu.
• HorizontalPosition:
This temperature bar reflects the hori-
zontal positioning of the image on
screen. When the dark square is com-
pletely to the left, the image is moved
as far to the left side of the screen as
For DVI sources, selecting Input
Settingstakes you to either the
HD&PCSETTINGSmenu (Figure
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
possible, and the numerical value is 0.
Use the ‹/›Navigation Controls
positioned toward the bottom of the
screen. Use the ‹/›Navigation
a. PIP mode is only available when the
current source input is using composite
video (not component or S-video). PIP
mode enables you to monitor the source
connected to the PIP input while watch-
ing another video source. When desired,
you may swap the images by pressing
and holding the PIP Swap Button
q
to adjust the position of the
Controls q
to adjust this setting.
6
6
image if it is not initially centered on
the screen.
Pressing the Set Button s repeat-
7
edly will only move the window upwards,
but not downwards.
• VerticalPosition: This
temperature bar reflects the vertical
positioning of the image on screen.
When the dark square is completely to
the left, the image is moved as far to
the bottom of the screen as possible,
and the numerical value is 0. Use the
Picture Settings
With the SCREENMENU(Fig. 33) on
screen, scroll down to the PICTURE
SETTINGSline and select it by
c
for several seconds. This will
17
display the main source in the PIP win-
dow and the PIP source in the main
viewing area.
pressing the Set Button s
7
. The
PICTURESETTINGSsubmenu
(Figure 37) will be displayed.
‹/›Navigation Controls q
6
There are two available PIP modes: in
one mode a small inset window will
appear on the CVPD50 screen, and it will
display the source connected to the PIP
input. The second mode splits the screen
into two equal halves, displaying the
main video signal on the left side and the
PIP source on the right. Press the Set
to adjust the position of the image if it
is not initially centered on the screen.
PICTURE SETTINGS
Digital Video Input
Mode
Broadcast
• HorizontalTotal: This
temperature bar reflects the horizontal
size of the displayed image. When the
gray square is completely to the left
and the numerical value is 0, the image
is at maximum width. Use the ‹/›
0
8
Contrast
Brightness
Sharpness
Color
1
15
5
DNC
Off
Photo CD
Reset input
Back to screen menu
Button s
repeatedly while at
7
the PIPModeline to cycle through
these modes and the Offsetting. The
remaining settings in the INPUTS/
PIPmenu enable you to adjust the size
and position of the PIP window.
Figure 37
Navigation Controls q
adjust the width of the image until it
fills the screen.
to
6
You may wish to use a test disc to guide
you through the adjustment process.
Several are available from Internet
retailers.
• VerticalResolution:
This temperature bar reflects the verti-
cal size of the displayed image in
terms of the number of pixels used.
When the gray square is completely
to the left and the numerical value is
0, the image is at maximum height.
Use the ‹/›Navigation Controls
PIPSize: The temperature bar at
this line reflects the size of the PIP win-
dow. When the dark square is towards
the right side of the bar, the window is
increased in size, and when the square is
towards the left side of the bar, the win-
dow is decreased in size. Use the ‹/›
Alternatively, we recommend that you
select one of the three factory preset
modes designed for optimal display of
various types of programs. These modes
are also directly accessible from both
remote controls. The Sports mode is
designed for the types of images normally
used in sporting events; the Movies
mode displays the images found in many
movies, which are often darker than
normal; and the Broadcast mode offers
the best display of broadcast television
programs.
q
to adjust the vertical height
6
Navigation Controls q
to adjust
6
of the image until it fills the screen.
this setting. Pressing the Set Button s
When a composite or S-video source
is in use, selecting the Input
repeatedly will only increase the
7
size of the window, but not decrease it.
Settingswill take you to the
VIDEOSETTINGSmenu (Fig. 36).
The VideoStandardline is
informational only, and will reflect the
video standard for your country. The
VCRStabilityfeature may be
set to either Onor Off. Turning it on
improves the display of VCR materials.
PIPHoriz.Pos.: The tempera-
ture bar at this line reflects the relative
horizontal position of the PIP window on
the CVPD50 screen. When the dark
square is towards the right side of the
bar, the window is positioned toward the
right side of the screen, and when the
square is towards the left side of the bar,
the window is positioned toward the
left side of the screen. Use the ‹/›
Contrast: This setting is also
known as “white level”, and is most easily
set using a test pattern containing a
grayscale – monochrome bars in different
shades of black, gray and white. Adjust
this setting between –64 and 63 to the
point just before the brightest bars of
your test pattern start to bleed into the
surrounding black background. If you do
not have a test pattern, adjust it to the
lowest level where all shades of a given
color remain visible.
VIDEO SETTINGS
Video Standard
VCR Stability
Auto
On
Navigation Controls q
to adjust
this setting. Pressing the Set Button
repeatedly will only move the
6
back to input menu
s
7
window towards the right, but not
towards the left.
Figure 36
PIPVert.Pos.: The tempera-
ture bar at this line reflects the relative
vertical position of the PIP window on the
CVPD50 screen. When the dark square is
towards the right side of the bar, the win-
dow is positioned toward the top of the
screen, and when the square is towards
the left side of the bar, the window is
Brightness: This setting is also
known as “black level”, and it should be
adjusted using a PLUGE pattern found on
a test disc. Adjust this setting between
–64 and 63 to the lowest point where
one of the moving lines in the black field
remains visible, but before both disap-
pear. If you do not have a test pattern,
PIPMode: This line of the
INPUTS/PIPmenu turns the pic-
ture-in-picture feature on or off. In order
to use this feature, you must connect the
composite video output of a source that
you desire to monitor to the Picture-in-
Picture (PIP) Composite Video Input
56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
adjust it so that a typical video picture
has about the same appearance as the
surroundings in the room. That way the
eye is relaxed when watching the TV pic-
ture. This setting may be reduced when
the surrounding light is dimmed, thereby
usually improving the sharpness signifi-
cantly.
recommend for most installations.
screen, with options of 20, 40 or 60 sec-
onds available. It is particularly important
with plasma displays to avoid leaving a
still image, such as a menu, on screen for
an extended period of time, as the image
may be “burned” into the screen perma-
nently. Therefore, it is not possible to
set the menus to remain on screen
indefinitely.
However, you may prefer the colors to
appear more blue overall, or more red
overall. Select the Coldsetting for
more blue content, or the Warmsetting
for more red content. Alternatively, if you
prefer to adjust the degree of red, green
and blue more precisely, select the
USERsetting, which will activate user
color temperature settings for each color.
Sharpness: This temperature bar
and numerical value (ranging from 0 to 4)
reflect the sharpness of the picture. Due
to the pixel structure of video images,
lowering the sharpness setting will tend
to improve the quality of the picture.
OnScreenStatustime
PictureContrast:This set- out: This setting allows you to adjust
ting has three options: Ideal, Light and
Dark. The factory default setting is
named Ideal, and is what we recom-
mend for most installations. However,
you may prefer images to appear either
lighter or darker.
the amount of time the various system
status banners remain on screen, or to
disable them altogether. These banners
appear when a source is selected and a
new audio or video signal is detected.
The aspect ratio banner will first display
the aspect ratio of the source, and then
the aspect ratio in which it will be dis-
played, depending on how you have con-
figured the system. The source banner
will display the name of the source, the
audio input, and the video input or other
information as appropriate. This setting
does not affect the status bar displayed
by the CVR700’s internal DVD/CD changer
when a disc is being played. You may
choose to remove the status banners
from view after 2, 3, 4, or 5 seconds, or
you may choose the Off setting, in which
they are not displayed at all.
Color: This temperature bar and
numerical value (ranging from 0 to 31)
reflect the saturation of the color.
Decreasing this setting to 0 will remove
all color and make the picture appear
monochrome (black and white). Increasing
UserColorTemp.red: This
setting is only active when the User
settings has been selected at the
it will brighten the intensity of the colors. ColorTemperatureline
It may be adjusted using a blue filter and
color bars. If you do not have access to a
test pattern, you may adjust this setting
so that red objects are not too bright and
fuzzy around the edges.
above. The temperature bar and numeri-
cal value (ranging between 0 and 255)
reflect the intensity of the red pixels.
UserColorTemp.green:
This setting is only active when the
Usersettings has been selected at the
DNC: This temperature bar and numeri-
cal value (ranging from 0 to 15) is used to ColorTemperatureline
adjust dynamic noise control. Leave this
setting at its factory default, unless you
have a video image with interference that
is causing video “noise”. This setting may
be used to reduce the amount of noise
displayed.
above. The temperature bar and numeri-
cal value (ranging between 0 and 255)
reflect the intensity of the green pixels.
ShowStartupScreen: This
setting may be set to On or Off, and it
determines whether the JBL logo screen
appears when the CVPD50 is powered up.
UserColorTemp.blue:
This setting is only active when the
Usersettings has been selected at the
ColorTemperatureline
above. The temperature bar and numeri-
cal value (ranging between 0 and 255)
reflect the intensity of the blue pixels.
The reset line may be used to reset all of
the settings in this menu for the current
video input.
OSDTransparency: This tem-
perature bar reflects whether the Screen
menus appear transparent, so that the
current video image may be seen behind
them (dark square to the left), or opaque,
so that they have a black background that
blocks any view of the video image (dark
square to the right). There is a reset line
that may be used to reset the settings in
this menu only.
Display Settings
With the SCREENMENU(Fig. 33) on
screen, scroll down to the DISPLAY
SETTINGSline and select it by
Advanced Settings Menu
With the SCREENMENU(Fig. 33) on
screen, scroll down to the ADVANCED
line and select it by pressing the Set
pressing the Set Button s
. The
7
DISPLAYSETTINGSsubmenu
(Figure 38) will be displayed.
Button s
. The ADVANCED
7
submenu (Figure 39) will be displayed.
DVD auto picture
DISPLAY SETTINGS
ADVANCED
resize: JBL recommends that you
leave this setting in the default “On” posi-
tion so that images (video and still) on
DVDs, VCDs and JPEG discs will be auto-
matically resized by the CVR700 to fill the
CVPD50 screen. This setting only applies
to the CVR700’s internal disc changer; for
external video sources, you will still need
Color Temperature
Ideal
Ideal
20s
Screen menu time out
On Screen Status
Show startup screen
OSD Transparency
DVD auto picture resize
Screen status LED
4:3 scaling
Picture Contrast
3s t/0
Yes
User color temp. red
User color temp. green
User color temp. blue
Back to screen menu
128
127
113
On
On
Non-Linear
Reset all
Back to screen menu
Figure 38
Figure 39
to use the Frame Button `
or the
24
This menu enables you to precisely adjust
the color display.
This menu is used to adjust the appear-
ance of the on-screen menus.
Letterbox Button z
to select a dis-
16
play mode for each source that fills the
screen. Also, note that some DVDs include
a letterboxed version in which black bars
above and below the picture are part of the
ColorTemperature: This
setting has four options: Ideal, Cold,
Warm and User. The factory default set-
ting is named Ideal, and is what we
Screenmenutimeout: This
setting allows you to adjust the amount
of time the Screen menus remain on
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
movie frame. For this reason, it is not possi-
ble to remove those black bars, and you
may prefer to watch a non-letterboxed ver-
sion of the movie if provided on the disc.
With the SCREENMENU(Fig. 33) on
screen, scroll to the INFORMATION
line and select it by pressing the Set
Button s
. The INFORMATION
7
submenu (Figure 40) will be displayed.
You may notice that the picture jumps as
it is resized, and this is normal. If the pic-
ture has large dark areas, particularly
near the frame edges, the picture may be
resized frequently. In that case, you may
prefer to turn off the Auto Resize function
while watching that disc and use the
INFORMATION
Hardware Version
Software Version
Rev02
251004R
Back to screen menu
Frame Button `
or the Letterbox
24
Button z
to select a display.
16
Figure 40
Screen status LED: Some
people may find the status LED on the
front panel of the CVPD50 to be distract-
ing while watching movies, and this set-
ting allows you to turn the LED off. If pos-
sible, it is recommended that you leave
the LED turned on to alert you to its sta-
tus, such as flashing red and yellow to
indicate that it has come unplugged.
This menu displays the version numbers
of your screen and its software drivers.
Your JBL Cinema Vision system is now
completely configured, and you are ready
to begin enjoying the finest in home the-
ater entertainment.
4:3 Scaling
The 4:3SCALINGsetting is only
needed for sources where the original
program material is in the 4:3 aspect
ratio. The default setting is NORMAL,
where 4:3 materials are displayed in their
original aspect ratio, with black bars
appearing on the left and right sides of
the image. If you wish to have the image
stretched to fill the CVPD50’s 16:9 screen,
select LINEARscaling to have the
picture stretched at the same rate through-
out the frame, or NON-LINEARto
leave the center of the frame virtually
untouched, with the degree of scaling
increasing towards the edges. You may
override this setting manually for a
specific disc by using the Frame
Button `
.
24
NOTE: Leaving the black bars on screen
for long periods of time, especially during
the first 1,000 hours of operation, may
cause burnout of the CVPD50 plasma
display, which is not covered under
warranty. JBL recommends using the
Frame Button `
or the Letterbox
24
Button z
to select a display mode
16
for each source that fills the screen.
Information Menu
The last submenu in the Screen menu
system is the INFORMATION
menu. It does not contain any user-
adjustable settings. In the unlikely event
that you have a problem with your CVPD50
screen, a customer service representative
may ask you to access this screen and
report the information it contains.
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BASIC OPERATION
Once you have completed the initial
setup and configuration of the JBL
Cinema Vision system, it is simple to
operate and enjoy. The following instruc-
tions will help you maximize the enjoy-
ment of your new home theater system:
controls and in the CVR700’s menu
system.
Main Power On/Off Control 1will
turn red, and the LED on the front of
the CVPD50 will turn amber. When the
remote is used to turn the unit “off” it is
actually placing the system in a Standby
mode, as indicated by the red color of the
LED on the CVR700 and the amber color
of the LED on the CVPD50.
• As the input source is changed, the
new input name will appear momentar-
ily as an on-screen banner display
along with the audio input and video
screen format. The input name will
also appear in the Main Information
Display Ô
Turning the CVR700 and CVPD50
On or Off
To program the CVR700 for automatic
Plug the CVPD50 and CVR700 power
cords into unswitched AC wall outlets.
When using the system for the first time,
you must make sure that the power
switch on the underside of the CVPD50
next to the AC power cord is switched on
to the “1” position. Use a mirror to assist
you in locating the switch and ascertain-
ing whether it is on or off. This places the
CVPD50 in a Standby mode, as indicated
by the amber color of the LED located on
the front of the screen, below the picture.
In addition, the LED in the middle of the
Main Power On/Off Switch 1on the
CVR700 will turn red.
turn-off, press the Sleep Button
• When an audio source is selected, the
last video input used remains routed
to the VCR Video Outputs ¤, the
Digital Recorder Video Ouptuts ‚
and the Video Monitor Outputs ›.
This permits you to simultaneously
view and listen to different sources.
Y
on the remote. Each press of
14
the button will decrease the time before
shut-down in the following sequence: 90
minutes, 80 minutes, 70 minutes, 60 min-
utes, 50 minutes, 40 minutes, 30 minutes,
20 minutes, 10 minutes, Sleep Timer Off.
The sleep time will be displayed in the
Lower Display Line E, and it will
count down until the time has elapsed.
• When a video source is selected, the
video signal for that input will be routed
to the CVPD50 for viewing, and if it
is a composite or S-video source,
the video signal will be routed to the
Video Monitor Output ¤ and may
be viewed on an external TV monitor
connected to the CVR700.
When the programmed sleep time has
elapsed, the system will automatically
turn off. The CVR700’s front-panel display
will dim to one-half brightness when the
Sleep function is programmed. To cancel
the Sleep function, press and hold the
Once the units are in Standby, you may
begin a listening session by pressing the
Main Power On/Off Switch 1, which
will turn on both the CVR700 and the
CVPD50, or press the Power On (All)
Volume Control
Sleep Button Y
until the informa-
14
• Adjust the volume to a comfortable
level using the front-panel Volume
Control a or remote Volume Up/
tion display returns to normal brightness;
the Sleep indicator numbers will disap-
pear and the words SLEEPOFFwill
appear in the Lower Display Line E.
Button b
. If you hold it for 3
1
Down Buttons u
.
12
seconds, all devices programmed into
the remote will also turn on. The LED in
the center of the Main Power On/Off
Switch 1will turn orange, and the LED
on the front of the CVPD50 will turn green.
This will turn the CVR700 on and return it
to the input source that was last used.
• To temporarily silence all speaker out-
When you will be away from home for an
extended period of time it is always a
good idea to completely turn the unit off
by unplugging the CVR700, and switching
off the master power switch located on
the underside of the CVPD50 next to the
power plug. NOTE: Preset memories
should be retained indefinitely.
53
puts, press the Mute Button
This will interrupt the output to all
.
11
speakers and the headphone jack, but
it will not affect any recording or dub-
bing that may be in progress. When
the system is muted, the word MUTE
will flash in the Main Information
Display Ô. Press the Mute Button
The system may also be turned on from
Standby by pressing and holding any of
the Input Selector Buttons d
2
Source Selection
53
again, or adjust the volume to
11
. This will not only power on the
10
• To select a source, press any of the
Input Selector Buttons d
return to normal operation.
CVR700, CVPD50 and any source unit
associated with that button, it will also
begin play of the currently loaded disc
if the internal DVD/CD changer was
selected as the source.
.
2
10
• The unit’s tone controls may be taken
out of the signal path by pressing the
• The input source may also be changed
by slowly rotating the front-panel
Input Source Selector &. Each step,
which you may feel as a tactile detent
or click, will move the input selection
through the available inputs.
Tone Mode Button m
. The
35
first press will show a message in the
Lower Display Line Ewith the cur-
rent status of the tone controls. The
system default is TONEIN, which
indicates that the bass and treble
controls are active. Press the ⁄/¤
NOTE: After pressing one of the Input
Selector Buttons d
to turn
the unit on, press the System Selector
to set the remote control to the
CVR700 functions. Press the DVD Input
Selector d to control the internal
2
10
• As the input is changed, the CVR700
will automatically switch to the digital
input (if selected), surround mode,
speaker configuration, and night mode
status that were entered during the
configuration process for that source.
f
33
Navigation Control q
to
4
2
change the setting to TONEOUT,
which is “flat” response without the
tone controls being active.
DVD/CD changer.
To turn the unit off at the end of a listen-
ing session, simply press the Main
Power On/Off Control 1on the front
• When the tone controls are active,
the bass and treble boost/cut may be
adjusted by first pressing the Tone
• The Front-Panel Audio/Video Inputs
$may be used to temporarily con-
nect a device such as a video game or
camcorder to your home entertainment
system. This source is called the
panel or the Power Off Button a
39
on the remote. You may also press and
hold the Power Off (All) Button a
Mode Button m
until the
35
desired setting (BASSMODEor
TREBLEMODE) appears in the
to turn off any external source units.
39
Game/Cam input source on the remote
The LED indicator in the center of the
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
other channels, but since it is intentionally
bandwidth-limited, sound designers have
given it that unique designation.
Lower Display Line E. Next, use
the ⁄/¤ Navigation Control
Surround Mode Selector *repeatedly
until the desired surround mode is selected.
q
to change the setting as
4
To select a surround mode using the
remote, press the button for the surround
mode group that includes the mode you
desired. The unit will return to normal
operation within 5 seconds after the
setting is changed.
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a standard part of DVD,
available on specially encoded LD discs
and satellite broadcasts, and is a part
of the high-definition television (HDTV)
system.
wish to choose: Dolby p
, DTS
14
• For private listening, plug the 1/4"
stereo phone plug from a pair of stereo
headphones into the front-panel
Headphone Jack %. When the
headphone’s plug is connected, the
word HEADPHONEwill scroll once
across the Lower Display Line E
and all speakers will be silenced.
When the headphone plug is removed,
the audio feed to the speakers will be
restored.
Digital o
Logic 7 i
, DTS Neo:6 e
,
14
14
, Stereo p
or
14
14
DSP Surround g
. The first press
14
of the button will show the current mode
from that group if it is already in use, or
the first available mode if you are cur-
rently using another mode. To cycle
through the available modes in that
group, press the button again until the
desired mode appears in the Lower
Display Line Eand in the front-panel
Surround Mode Indicators G.
An optional, external RF demodulator is
required to use the CVR700 to listen to
the Dolby Digital soundtracks available
on laser discs. Connect the RF output of
the LD player to the demodulator and
then connect the digital output of the
demodulator to the Optical or Coaxial
Inputs cefhij9)of the
CVR700 corresponding to the source (e.g.,
AUX) you wish to use for your LD player.
No demodulator is required for use with
DVD players or DTS-encoded laser discs.
The CVR700’s internal DVD/CD changer
will automatically detect and play any
Dolby DVD loaded into it, and no external
connections need to be made. However,
the CVR700 is not capable of playing a
laser disc, and an external LD player
must be connected to the CVR700.
Surround Mode Selection
The Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX, DTS
5.1, DTS-ES Matrix and DTS-ES Discrete
modes may only be selected when a digi-
tal input is in use. In addition, when a
digital source is present, the CVR700 will
automatically select and switch to the
correct mode, regardless of the mode
that has been previously selected. For
more information on selecting digital
sources, see the Digital Audio Playback
section below.
One of the most important features of the
CVR700 is its ability to reproduce a full
multichannel sound field from digital
sources, analog matrix surround-encoded
programs and standard stereo programs.
Selection of a surround mode is based on
personal taste, as well as the type of
program source material being used. For
example, motion pictures or TV programs
bearing the logo of one of the major sur-
round-encoding processes, such as Dolby
Surround or DTS Stereo may be played in
either the Dolby Digital, Dolby Pro Logic II
Movie, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie, DTS
Neo:6 Cinema, or Logic 7 Cinema surround
modes, depending on the source material.
DTS
DTS is a digital audio system capable of
delivering 5.1 or 6.1 discrete or matrix
sound field reproduction. Although both
DTS and Dolby Digital are digital, they
use different methods of encoding the
signals, and thus they require different
decoding circuits to convert the digital
signals back to analog.
When a DVD-Audio disc is in use, there
is no surround processing, as the analog
output signal from a DVD-Audio disc is
carried straight through to the preamp
section.
To listen to a program in traditional two-
channel stereo, using the front left and
right speakers only (plus the subwoofer,
if installed and configured), press the
NOTE: Once a program has been encoded
with matrix surround information, it
retains the surround information as long
as the program is available in stereo.
Thus, movies with surround sound may be
decoded via any of the analog surround
modes such as Dolby Pro Logic II or IIx
Movie, Logic 7 Cinema or DTS Neo:6
Cinema, when they are broadcast via con-
ventional TV stations, cable, pay-TV and
satellite transmission. Also, a number of
TV programs, sports broadcasts and radio
dramas are recorded in surround sound.
DTS-encoded soundtracks are available
on select DVD and LD discs, as well as
on audio-only DTS discs. The CVR700’s
internal DVD/CD changer will automati-
cally detect and play any DTS-encoded
DVD loaded into it, and no external con-
nections need to be made. If you are con-
necting an external device to the CVR700,
be aware that you may use any LD or CD
player equipped with a digital output to
play DTS-encoded discs with the CVR700.
All that is required is to connect the
player’s output to either an Optical
or Coaxial Input on the rear panel
Stereo Mode Select Button m
14
until SURROUNDOFFappears in the
Lower Display Line E. From the front
panel, press the Surround Mode Selector
*until SURROUNDOFFappears in
the Lower Display Line E.
Digital Audio Playback
Digital audio is a major advancement over
analog surround processing systems. It
delivers up to six discrete channels, and
each channel reproduces full frequency
range (20Hz to 20kHz) and offers dramati-
cally improved dynamic range and signifi-
cant improvements to signal-to-noise
ratios. In addition, digital systems have the
capability to deliver an additional channel
that is specifically devoted to low-fre-
quency information. This is the “.1” chan-
nel referred to when you see these sys-
tems described as “5.1,” “6.1” or “7.1.”
The bass channel is separate from the
Even when a program is not listed as car-
rying intentional surround information,
you may find that the Dolby Pro Logic II,
Logic 7, DTS Neo:6 and the Hall or Theater
modes often deliver enveloping surround
presentations through the use of the
natural information present in all stereo
recordings.
cefhij or front panel 9).
In order to listen to DVDs encoded with
DTS soundtracks, the DVD player must be
compatible with the DTS signal, which is
indicated by the “DTS Digital Out” logo
on the player’s front panel. Some early
DVD players were not able to play DTS-
encoded DVDs. This does not indicate a
problem with the CVR700, as those play-
Surround modes may be changed at any
time by using either the front panel or
remote control. To select a new surround
mode from the front panel, press the
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ers cannot pass through the DTS signal.
If you’re in doubt as to the capability of
your DVD player to handle DTS discs,
consult the player’s owner’s manual.
data that is present. Using this informa-
tion, the correct surround mode will auto-
matically be selected. For example, DTS
bitstreams will cause the unit to switch
to DTS decoding, and Dolby Digital
bitstreams will enable Dolby Digital
decoding.
message with the letters PCM, in addi-
tion to a readout of the sampling frequency
of the digital signal.
In most cases, this will be PCM
44.1kHzor PCM48kHz, though
in the case of specially mastered, high-
resolution audio discs, you will see a
PCM96kHzindication.
NOTE: Many DVD players have a default
setting that does not pass through the
DTS data, even though the machine is
capable of doing so. If your external DVD
player has the “DTS Digital Out” logo but
does not trigger DTS playback in the
CVR700, change the player’s settings in
the “Audio” or “Bitstream” configuration
menu so that DTS playback is enabled.
The method for doing this will vary with
each player. In some cases, the proper
menu choice will be “Original,” while in
others it will be “DTS.” Consult the
owner’s manual for your player to find
the specific information to find the
proper setting.
When the unit senses PCM data from
CDs or LDs, you may select any of the
standard surround modes, such as Dolby
Pro Logic II or Logic 7. Since the range of
available surround modes is dependent
on the type of digital data that is present,
the CVR700 shows you what type of
signal is present. This will help you to
understand the choice of modes.
During PCM playback, you may select any
surround mode except one of the Dolby
Digital or DTS/DTS-ES modes.
Speaker/Channel Indicators
In addition to the bitstream indicators,
the CVR700 features channel-input indi-
cators that show how many channels of
digital information are being received
and/or whether the digital signal is inter-
rupted (see Figure 41).
When a digital source is first detected,
the CVR700 will indicate the type of bit-
stream being received by switching to the
appropriate surround mode, depending on
the bitstream and how you have config-
ured your system. The Speaker/Channel
Input Indicators Fwill light to indi-
cate which channels are contained in the
digital bitstream. For example, for a
Dolby Digital EX bitstream, the L, C, R,
SL, SR, SBL, SBR and LFE indicators will
light with a line between the SBL and
SBR boxes to indicate that those two
channels are in mono. This is the only
indication of the number of channels
present in the signal. The Surround
Mode Indicator Gthat identifies the
bitstream will also light. The Lower
Display Line Ewill indicate the sur-
round mode you have assigned to that
source using the AUDIOMODEsub-
menu system or the remote.
L
R
Selecting a Digital Source
To use either digital mode, you must have
properly connected a digital source to the
CVR700. Connect the digital outputs from
external DVD players, HDTV receivers,
satellite systems or CD players to the
Optical or Coaxial Inputs cefh
ij9). In order to provide a backup
signal and a source for analog stereo
recording, the analog outputs provided on
digital source equipment should also be
connected to the corresponding inputs on
the CVR700 rear panel (e.g., connect the
analog stereo audio output from a digital
recorder to the Digital Recorder Inputs
ª on the rear panel when you connect
the source’s digital outputs).
SL
SR
SBL
Figure 41
SBR
These indicators are the L/C/R/LFE/
SL/SR/SBL/SBR letters that are inside
the center boxes of the Speaker/
Channel Input Indicators Fon the
front panel. When a standard analog sig-
nal is in use, only the “L” and “R” indica-
tors will light, as analog signals have
only left and right channels.
Digital signals may have two, five, six or
seven channels, depending on the pro-
gram material, its method of transmission
and the way in which it was encoded.
When a digital signal is playing, the let-
ters in these indicators will light in
response to the signal being received. It
is important to note that although Dolby
Digital, for example, is referred to as a
“5.1” system, not all Dolby Digital DVDs
or programs are encoded for 5.1. Thus, it
is sometimes normal for a DVD with a
Dolby Digital soundtrack to trigger only
the “L” and “R” indicators.
If you have not already configured an
input for a digital source using the on-
screen menus as shown on page 46, first
select the desired input using the remote
or front-panel controls, as outlined in this
manual. Next, press the Audio Input
When Dolby Digital 5.1 or DTS or DTS-ES
signals are being played, the CVR700 will
automatically switch to the proper sur-
round mode, and no other processing may
be selected. When a Dolby Digital signal
with 4.0 or 2.0 channels is detected, you
may select any Dolby surround mode.
Button k
and then using the
38
⁄ ¤
/
Navigation Control q
,
4
choose the OPTICAL, COAXIAL
or ANALOGinput you wish to assign to
that source, as it appears in the Upper
Display Line H. When the digital
source is playing, the CVR700 will auto-
matically detect which type of digital
data stream is being decoded and display
that information in the Upper Display
Line H. However, the CVR700 will not
automatically detect which digital or ana-
log audio connection you have made.
When the digital audio data stream has
been interrupted or is no longer present,
such as when a DVD disc is paused or
stopped, the Speaker/Channel Input
Indicators Fwill flash to indicate that
no signal is present. This is normal and
does not indicate any problem with your
system.
NOTE: Many DVD discs are recorded
with both “5.1” and “2.0”, and Dolby
Digital and DTS versions of the same
soundtrack. When playing a DVD, always
be certain to check the type of material
on the disc. Most discs show this infor-
mation using icons on the back of the
disc jacket. When a disc offers multiple
soundtrack choices, you may have to
make some adjustments (usually with the
“Audio Select” button or in a menu
screen on the disc) to access the full 5.1
Continued on page 63
PCM Playback
PCM is the abbreviation for Pulse Code
Modulation, which is the type of digital
signal used for standard CD playback,
and other non-Dolby Digital and non-DTS
digital sources such as Mini-Disc. When
a PCM signal is detected, the Lower
Display Line Ewill briefly show a
Digital Bitstream and Surround Mode
Indicators
When a digital source is playing, the
CVR700 senses the type of bitstream
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUDIO SURROUND MODE CHART
MODE
FEATURES
Dolby Digital
Available only with digital input sources encoded with Dolby Digital data. It provides up to five separate main
audio channels and a special dedicated low-frequency effects channel.
Dolby Digital EX
Available when the receiver is configured for 6.1/7.1 channel operation, Dolby Digital EX is the latest version of
Dolby Digital. When used with movies or other programs that have special encoding, Dolby Digital EX reproduces
specially encoded soundtracks so that a full 6.1/7.1 sound field is available. When the receiver is set for
6.1/7.1 operation and a Dolby Digital signal is present, the EX mode is automatically selected. Even if specific EX
encoding is not available to provide the additional channel, the special algorithms will derive a 6.1/7.1 output.
DTS 5.1
When the speaker configuration is set for 5.1-channel operation, the DTS 5.1 mode is available when DVD,
audio-only music or laser discs encoded with DTS data are played. DTS 5.1 provides up to five separate main
audio channels and a special dedicated low-frequency channel.
DTS-ES 6.1
Matrix
Discrete
When the speaker configuration is set for 6.1/7.1 operation, playback of a DTS-encoded program source will
automatically trigger the selection of one of the two DTS-ES 6.1 Discrete DTS-ES modes. Newer discs with
special DTS-ES discrete encoding will be decoded to provide six discrete, full-bandwidth channels plus a
separate low-frequency channel. All other DTS discs will be decoded using the DTS-ES Matrix mode, which
creates a 6.1-channel sound field from the original 5.1-channel soundtrack.
Dolby Pro Logic II
Music
Dolby Pro Logic II decodes full-range, discrete, left, center right, right surround and left surround channels from
either matrix surround-encoded programs or conventional stereo sources when an analog input is in use. The
Dolby Pro Logic II Movie mode is optimized for movie soundtracks, while the Pro Logic II Music mode should be
used with musical selections. The Pro Logic mode re-creates original Pro Logic processing for those who prefer
that presentation.
Movie
Pro Logic
Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Music
Movie
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is the latest extension of Dolby Pro Logic II technology that creates a discrete 6.1 and 7.1
sound field from matrix surround or two-channel stereo sources in systems configured for surround back
speakers. Both Movie and Music versions of Pro Logic IIx are available.
Logic 7 Cinema
Logic 7 Music
Logic 7 Enhance
Logic 7 is an advanced mode that extracts the maximum surround information from either surround-encoded
programs or conventional stereo material. When the system speaker configuration has been set for 6.1/7.1
operation, you may choose between either 7.1 or 5.1 versions of the Logic 7 modes, while only the 5.1 versions
are available for 5.1-channel systems. The Logic 7 C (or Cinema) mode should be used with any source that contains Dolby
Surround or similar matrix encoding. Logic 7 C delivers increased center channel intelligibility, and more accurate placement
of sounds with fades and pans that are much smoother and more realistic than with other decoding techniques.
The Logic 7 M or Music mode should be used with analog or PCM stereo sources. Logic 7 M enhances the listening
experience by presenting a wider front soundstage and greater rear ambience. Both Logic 7 modes also direct low-frequency
information to the subwoofer (if installed and configured) to deliver maximum bass impact. The Logic 7 E (or Enhance) mode,
available only when the 5.1 option is chosen, is an extension of the Logic 7 modes that is primarily used with musical
programs. Logic 7 adds additional bass enhancement which circulates low frequencies in the 40Hz to 120Hz range to the
front and surround speakers to deliver a less localized soundstage that appears broader and wider than when the subwoofer
is the sole source of bass energy. The CVR700 features 96kHz-capable Logic 7 processing, for improved imaging and
accuracy when used with 96kHz source materials.
DTS Neo:6 Cinema
DTS Neo:6 Music
These two modes are available with analog sources playing to create a three-channel, five-channel or
six-channel surround presentation from matrix-encoded or stereo sources. Select the Cinema version of Neo:6
when a program with matrix surround encoding is present. Select the Music version of Neo:6 for optimal
processing when a nonencoded, two-channel stereo program is being played.
Theater
The Theater mode creates a sound field that resembles the acoustic feeling of a standard live-performance theater.
The two Hall modes create sound fields that resemble a small- (Hall 1) or medium-sized (Hall 2) concert hall.
Hall 1, Hall 2
5-Channel Stereo
7-Channel Stereo
These modes take advantage of multiple speakers to place a stereo signal at both the front and back of a room.
They place the same signal at the front-left and surround-left, and front-right and surround-right speakers.
The center channel is fed a summed mono mix of the in-phase material of the left and right channels.
Surround
Off (Stereo)
This mode turns off all surround processing and presents the pure left- and right-channel presentation of
two-channel stereo programs.
62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
feed to the CVR700 or to select between
Dolby Digital or DTS. It is also possible
for the type of signal feed to change dur-
inh the course of a DVD’s playback. In
some cases, the previews or special
material will be recorded in 2.0 audio,
while the main feature is available in 5.1
audio. The CVR700 will automatically
sense changes to the bitstream and chan-
nel count and reflect them in these indi-
cators.
SURROUNDmenu. See page 47 for
information on using the menus to set
this option.
cessing modes such as Logic 7, to
greatly enhance downloaded or
streaming audio playback.
MP3 and WMA Compressed
Audio Playback
IMPORTANT NOTES ON DIGITAL
PLAYBACK:
The CVR700 is one of the few audio/
video components equipped with onboard
decoding of the MP3 and WMA audio
formats used by computers and portable
audio devices. By offering MP3 and WMA
decoding, the CVR700 is able to deliver
precise conversion of the digital signals
to an analog output, along with the bene-
fits of listening to the MP3 or WMA
audio through the CVR700’s high-power
amplifier and the speakers from your sur-
round system, rather than the smaller
speakers and low-powered amplifiers
typically used with computers.
• When the digital playback source is
stopped, or in a pause, fast forward or
search mode, digital audio data will
momentarily stop, and the channel
position letters inside the Speaker/
Channel Input Indicators Fwill
flash. This is normal and does not indi-
cate a problem with either the CVR700
or the source machine. The CVR700
will return to digital playback as soon
as the data is available.
The letters used by the Speaker/
Channel Input Indicators Falso flash
to indicate when a bitstream has been
interrupted. This will happen when a digi-
tal input source is selected before the
playback starts, or when a digital source
such as a DVD is paused. The flashing
indicators remind you that the playback
has stopped due to the absence of a digi-
tal signal and not through any fault of the
CVR700. This is normal, and the digital
playback will resume once the playback
is started again.
• Some source devices, particularly cable
set-top boxes, will switch back and
forth between digital and analog audio
outputs, depending on the channel
being watched. To avoid losing sound
with this type of product, it is recom-
mended that you connect both the digi-
tal and analog audio outputs of the
source to the CVR700, with the digital
audio input set as the default following
the steps shown on page 46. If the dig-
ital data stream is interrupted and the
sound mutes, you will need to manually
switch to the analog audio input by
To take advantage of the CVR700’s MP3
and WMA capabilities, simply insert a
disc containing MP3 or WMA audio files
into the changer drawer. When the digital
signal is available, the Lower Display
Line Ewill indicate that an MP3 or
WMA bitstream is present, and the audio
will begin playing.
When a 6.1-channel mode, such as Dolby
Digital EX, is detected, a line will appear
connecting the SBL and SBR channels to
reflect that the same signal is being out-
putted through both back surround chan-
nels. The line will disappear when a 7.1-
channel mode, such as Logic 7, is in use.
At this time, there are no 7.1-channel dig-
ital formats available.
NOTES:
• The CVR700 is only capable of playing
signals in the MP3 (MPEG 1/Layer 3)
format, or in the Windows Media
Audio (WMA) format compatible with
Windows Media player version 9 or
greater. It is not compatible with other
computer audio codecs.
pressing the Audio Input Button
⁄ ¤
/
k
and using the
38
Navigation Buttons q
to
4
select the analog audio input for the
current source. Press the Set Button
Night Mode
A special feature of Dolby Digital is the
Night mode, which enables specially
encoded Dolby Digital input sources to be
played back with full digital intelligibility
while reducing the minimum peak level
by 1/4 to 1/3. This prevents abruptly
loud transitions from disturbing others,
without reducing the impact of the digital
source. The Night mode is available only
when Dolby Digital signals with special
data are being played.
s
to enter your selection and
7
• Due to the wide variation in MP3 and
WMA formats and encoding speeds,
it is possible that the CVR700 may not
be compatible with all MP3 or WMA
files. Some may produce unacceptable
results or may not be decoded. This is
not a fault of either the computer or
the CVR700, but rather a by-product of
return to normal operation. When
switching to a digital channel, follow
the same procedure, except select the
appropriate digital audio input for the
source. This switching is not a fault of
either the CVR700 or the cable box,
as it is caused by the use of different
audio technologies on different chan-
nels by the cable company or program
supplier.
the unpredictable nature of compressed
audio playback.
-
The Night mode may be engaged when a
Dolby Digital DVD is playing by pressing
• Even when your computer does not
• Although the CVR700 will decode virtu-
ally all current DVD movies, CDs and
HDTV sources, it may not be compatible
have a digital output that is compatible
with the CVR700, you may connect the
analog audio output available on virtu-
ally all computers to one of the analog
audio inputs using an optional adaptor
cable that converts the stereo mini
plug commonly used for computer
audio connections to the left/right RCA
jacks used on the CVR700. Connecting
your computer to the CVR700 will
the Night Mode Button Z
the remote. Next, press the
on
14
⁄ ¤
/
with future digital sources
.
Navigation Button q
to select
4
either the middle range or full compres-
• When a digital source is playing, you
may not be able to select some of the
analog surround modes such as Dolby
Pro Logic II, Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Hall,
Theater or Logic 7.
sion versions of the Night mode. To turn
⁄ ¤
/
the Night mode off, press the
Navigation Button q
until the
4
message in the lower third of the video
display and in the Lower Display Line
Ereads NIGHTMODEOFF.
• When a Dolby Digital or DTS
source is playing, it is not possible
to make an analog recording using
the Digital Recorder Analog
Audio/Video Outputs ‚ or the
enable you to take advantage of the
high-quality audio reproduction possi-
ble with a home theater system, as
well as enable the use of surround pro-
The Night mode may also be selected to
always be on at either level of compres-
sion using the options in the DOLBY
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VCR Analog Audio/Video Outputs
¤. However, the digital signals will be
passed through to the Digital Audio
Outputs ¶bg.
MANUALTUNEDwill neverthe-
less appear in the Lower Display
Line E.
Stations Selector Button 8t
on the front panel or remote.
h
30
When using the front-panel controls,
remember to first press the Tuning
Mode Selector 6to select Preset
as the function of the Tuning/Preset
Buttons 8.
4. Stations may also be tuned directly in
either the automatic or manual mode.
To enter a station’s frequency directly,
first select the AM or FM band as
Tuner Operation
The CVR700’s tuner is capable of tuning
AM, FM and FM Stereo broadcast sta-
tions. Stations may be tuned manually,
or they may be stored as favorite station
presets and recalled from a 30-position
memory.
desired be pressing the Tuner Button
Recording
d
. Next, press the Direct
2
Button l
. Within 5 seconds of
In normal operation, the audio or video
source selected for listening through the
CVR700 is sent to the record outputs.
This means that any program you are
watching or listening to may be recorded
simply by placing machines connected
to the Digital Recorder Analog Audio/
Video Outputs ‚ or VCR Analog
Audio/Video Outputs ¤ in the
record mode.
9
when DIRECTINscrolls in the
Lower Display Line E, enter the
station frequency by pressing the
Station Selection
Numeric Keys l
. If you press
14
1. Press the Tuner Button d
on
2
an incorrect button while entering a
direct frequency, press the Exit/
the remote to select the tuner as an
input. The tuner may be selected from
the front panel by turning the Source
Selector quntil the tuner is active.
Cancel Button r
to start over.
8
Preset Tuning
2. Press the Tuner Button d
or
2
Using the remote, up to 30 stations may
be stored in the CVR700’s memory for
easy recall using the front-panel controls
or the remote.
When a digital audio recorder is connected
to the Digital Audio Outputs bg7,
you are able to record the digital signal
using a CD-R, MiniDisc or other digital
recording system.
Tuner Band Selector !to switch
between AM and FM so that the
desired frequency band is selected.
3. When using the front-panel controls,
the Tuning Mode Button 6is
To enter a station into the memory, first
tune the station using the steps outlined
above. Then:
NOTES:
used to select the function of the
Tuning/Preset Up/Down Buttons
8. Press the Tuning Mode Button
6to toggle between TUNINGand
PRESET. Press the Tuning Mode
• The digital outputs are active only
when a digital signal is present, and
they do not convert an analog input to
a digital signal, or change the format
of the digital signal. In addition, the
digital recorder must be compatible
with the output signal. For example,
the PCM digital input from a CD
player may be recorded on a CD-R
or MiniDisc, but Dolby Digital or
DTS signals may not.
1. Press the Memory Button @k
; two underlines will flash in the
28
Upper Display Line H.
2. Within 5 seconds, press the Numeric
Selector o
on the remotes to
15
Keys l
corresponding to the
14
select manual or automatic tuning.
memory location where you wish to
store this station’s frequency. The pre-
set number will appear in the Upper
Display Line H.
In either mode, each press of the
Tuning Selectors 8vf
27
will increase or decrease the fre-
29
quency by one increment. When the
Tuning Mode Selector o has
3. Press the Memory Button @k
15
again to store the preset station.
• Please obey the copyright restrictions
on any material you copy. Unauthorized
duplication of copyrighted materials is
prohibited by law.
28
been pressed so that AUTOTUNE
appears in the Lower Display Line
E, pressing and holding the Tuning
4. Repeat the process after tuning any
additional stations to be preset.
Selectors 8vf
will
29
27
NOTE: By its nature, plasma display
devices tend to interfere with AM radio
reception. In any event, as mentioned
elsewhere in this manual, it is preferable
to leave the screen off to avoid burn-in
when no video signal is present and the
startup screen may be displayed for a
long time. Therefore, when the AM tuner
band is selected as the source, the CVPD50
will automatically enter the standby mode.
To wake it, simply select any other source
(including the FM tuner band).
cause the tuner to scan for the next
higher or lower frequency with an
acceptable signal. Release the button,
and AUTOTUNEDwill appear in
the Lower Display Line Eto indi-
cate that a station has been tuned.
AUTOSTTUNEDwill appear in
the Lower Display Line Efor FM
stereo stations.
Output Level Trim Adjustment
Normal output level adjustment for the
CVR700 is established using the test tone,
as outlined on pages 50–52. In some
cases, however, it may be desirable to
adjust the output levels using program
material such as a test disc, or a selection
you are familiar with. Additionally, the
output level for the subwoofer can only
be adjusted using this procedure.
When the Tuning Mode Selector
o
has been pressed so that
15
MANUALTUNEappears in the
Lower Display Line E, pressing
and holding the Tuning Selectors
To adjust the output levels using program
material, first set the reference volume for
the front left and front right channels
Recalling Preset Stations
• To manually select a station previously
entered in the preset memory, press
8vf
will cause the
29
27
using the Volume Control Óu
.
12
the Numeric Keys l
for the
14
tuner to scan up or down through
all frequencies, stopping when you
release the button, even if no accept-
able signal is present. The message
If you are using a disc with test signals
or an external signal generator as the
source used when the output levels are
desired station’s memory location.
• To manually scroll through the list of
preset stations, press the Preset
being trimmed, you may use the remote
64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
as an SPL meter to guide you to the cor-
rect level settings. To use the EzSet
remote as an SPL meter, follow the
instructions on page 51.
Once the SPEAKER LEVELS
submenu appears on your video screen,
⁄ ¤
use the
/
Navigation Controls
›
q
to move the on-screen cursor
4
so that it is next to the TESTTONE
Once the reference level has been set,
‹ ›
line. Press the
/
Navigation Controls
press the Level Button p
and
5
q
so that OFFis highlighted.
6
SPLEVELFL0will appear in the
Lower Display Line Ewith FL0
flashing. To change the level, first press
This will turn off the test tone and allow
you to use your external test disc or other
source material as the reference. Then,
the Set Button s
7
to select the
⁄ ¤
/
use the
Navigation Controls
, and then use the
front left (FL) channel
q
to select the channels to be
4
⁄ ¤
/
Navigation Controls q
to
4
adjusted. At each channel position, use
raise or lower the level. DO NOT use the
volume control, as this will alter the
reference setting.
‹ ›
/
the
Navigation Controls q
6
to change the output level. Remember, the
goal is to have the output level at each
channel be equal when heard at the lis-
tening position.
Once the change has been made, press
the Set Button k
and then press
7
⁄ ¤
the
/
Navigation Control q
4
If you wish to reset all the levels to their
to select the next output-channel location
that you wish to adjust. To adjust the
⁄ ¤
original factory default of 0dB offset,
⁄ ¤
/
press the
Navigation Controls
subwoofer level, press the
/
q
so that the on-screen cursor is
4
Navigation Control q
until
4
next to the RESETline and press the
SPLEVELSUB0appears in the
Lower Display Line E.
Set Button s . After the levels are
7
reset, resume the procedure outlined
above to reset the levels to the desired
settings. When all adjustments are done,
scroll BACKTOMASTERMENU
Repeat the procedure as needed until all
channels requiring adjustment have been
set. When all adjustments have been
made and no further adjustments are
made for 5 seconds, the CVR700 will
return to normal operation.
and then press the Set Button s
7
if you wish to go back to the main menu
to make other adjustments. If you have
no other adjustments to make, press the
The channel output for any input may
also be adjusted using the on-screen
menu system. First, set the volume to
a comfortable listening level using the
OSD Button D
to exit the menu
36
system.
NOTE: Output levels may be separately
trimmed for each surround mode. If you
wish to have different trim levels for a spe-
cific mode, select that mode and then fol-
low the instructions shown above.
Volume Control Óu
. Then, press
12
the OSD Button D
to bring up the
36
MASTERMENU(Fig. 1). Use the
⁄ ¤
/
Navigation Controls q
to
4
scroll down to the SPEAKERSline,
Memory Backup
and press the Set Button s to
7
select it. The confirmation menu (Figure
18) will appear, and you should scroll
down to the YESline and select it. This
will cause the SPEAKERSmenu
(Figure 19) to be displayed. Scroll down
to the LEVELSline and select it,
which will bring up the SPEAKER
LEVELSsubmenu (Figure 27).
This product is equipped with a memory
backup system that preserves the system
configuration information and tuner pre-
sets if the unit is accidentally unplugged
or subjected to a power outage. This
memory will last virtually indefinitely.
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPTICAL DISC CHANGER PLAYBACK BASICS
the quality of the disc. On some occa-
sions, it is possible that these discs may
not play on the CVR700. This does not
indicate any problem with the CVR700.
time elapsed or remaining for a title or
chapter (see Figure 41).
Loading Discs
To load discs in the CVR700, first turn the
CVR700 on by pressing the Main Power
On/Off Switch
0.
• The CVR700 will only play discs that
are coded for Region 1 or discs that are
open to being played in all regions.
Discs that contain any other Region
Code will not play.
Set the CVR700 to the DVD source input
either by slowly rotating the Source
Selector &until it engages in the
notch and DVDappears in the
Figure 41
ATitle Number: The first item in the
Status Bar is the current Title Number.
When this number is highlighted, you
may use the Numeric Keys l
enter the number of the desired title, and
Information Display Ô, or by pressing
• Both 5-inch (12cm) and 3-inch (8cm)
discs may be used.
the DVD Input Selector d
.
2
Press the Eject Button 6, and you
will be prompted to select a disc number
by a message in the Lower Display
Line E. You must enter a number, either
by pressing one of the front-panel Disc
Selectors 5, or by entering a number
between 1 and 5 using the Numeric
to
14
• When loading CD audio discs, load the
discs with the label side up.
press the Set Button I to switch
7
to that title. Some discs may prohibit this
action during certain titles, such as the
warnings against copying the disc. Note
that when the DVD Audio setting in the
DVDSETUPmenu (Figure 31) has
been set to ON, this item will be the
Group number. When the DVD Audio set-
ting has been set to OFF, the disc will
be recognized as a DVD-Video disc, and
this item will be the title number.
•
When loading DVD discs with printed
labels, load them label side up.
• Some DVD discs are double-sided.
The title information for these will be
printed on the inner ring of the disc,
very close to the center hole. The title
for the side you wish to play should
be facing up.
Keys l
. If you don't enter a num-
14
ber, the CVR700 will cancel the command.
The Disc Indicator Dcorresponding to
the tray number you selected will flash.
The door will drop forward and the maga-
zine tray corresponding to the disc posi-
tion you have selected will slide forward.
Note that the door will open only enough
to allow the correct tray to slide forward,
so that the door opens wider for the higher
numbered trays located further down.
This is perfectly normal.
Once a disc is properly loaded, press the
Eject Button 6to close the disc drawer.
After the drawer closes, you will need to
instruct the CVR700 to play the disc by
BChapter Number: The second item is
the current Chapter Number. When this
number is highlighted, you may use the
Numeric Keys l
number of the desired chapter, and press
pressing the Play Button !e
.
25
to enter the
14
The Lower Display Line Ewill prompt
you for a disc number. You may enter
the number of any loaded disc either by
pressing its corresponding Disc Selector
5or by using the Numeric Keys
the Set Button I to switch to that
7
Hold the disc by the edge, and gently
place it into the disc drawer, making sure
the disc is properly seated in the tray’s
insert. If the disc is not correctly centered,
you may damage both the disc and the
player when the drawer closes. When
loading discs, please note the following:
chapter. Some discs may prohibit this
action during certain titles, such as the
warnings against copying the disc. Note
that when the DVD Audio setting in the
DVDSETUPmenu (Figure 31) has
been set to ON, this item will be the
Track number. When the DVD Audio set-
ting has been set to OFF, the disc will
be recognized as a DVD-Video disc, and
this item will be the chapter number.
l
. If you don't select a disc, the
14
CVR700 will load the last disc played.
However, if no other discs are loaded and
you press the Play Button !e
25
instead of the Eject Button 6to close
the disc drawer, the CVR700 will close
the door and begin play of the disc you
just loaded.
• The CVR700 will play discs with the
following logos, as well as most WMA
and JPEG discs. It will play Kodak
Picture CDs, but not Photo CDs. DO
NOT attempt to play another type
of disc.
You will briefly see LOADINGin the
CElapsed Time: The third item is the
Elapsed Time of the current chapter. It is
not possible to display other time vari-
ables. When this item is highlighted, you
may take advantage of the Time Search
feature, which allows you to begin play-
back from a specified point on the disc.
Information Display
K
to alert you to
the fact that the unit is determining the
type of disc (DVD, DVD-Audio, CD, VCD,
JPEG, WMA or MP3) and is reading the
data for track, chapter, title and other
information about the disc.
Use the Numeric Keys l
the hour/minute/second indication of the
to enter
14
Status Bar
Once the disc’s data has been read, the
type of disc will be displayed by the
Disc-Type Indicator Aand the disc
will begin playing. The disc’s track timing
information and other relevant data will
appear in the Upper Display Line H.
time at which you wish play to begin, fol-
lowed by the Set Button I
.
7
Playback from that point will begin imme-
diately. (See Figure 42).
• The CVR700 will play discs in the NTSC
and PAL video formats.
While a disc is playing, you may access
the Status Bar by pressing the Status
Figure 42
• Playback capability for CD-RW, DVD-RW
or DVD+RW discs will vary according to
Button
S
to view information on
DAudio: The fourth item is the Audio
track currently in use. The audio track is
26
the current title and chapter, to change
the current title or chapter, or to view
66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
denoted by a number preceding it to indi-
cate its order of availability. Next, the
language is displayed, such as ENG for
English or SPA for Spanish. Following this
is the bitstream type, which may be PCM
for a two-channel format; or DTS or the
Dolby logo for one of those formats. Next
to the format is an icon that reflects the
number and location of the channels in
the bitstream. The icon is in the shape of
a square that represents a listening room,
with the front channels at the top. A
small block will appear at the location of
each channel encoded in the bitstream,
with only one block at each top corner for
a 2-channel format. Figure 41 depicts that
a Dolby Digital 5.1-channel bitstream has
been detected. Note that while the disc
is playing, a 0 or 1 may also appear to
the right of the icon to indicate whether
an LFE channel is present (0 if no LFE
channel is present or “1” if the LFE chan-
nel is detected). If the disc has more than
one audio track; such as 2.0-channel
PCM, 5.1-channel Dolby Digital or a
NOTES:
• The full Status Bar is only available
while a disc is playing. If you press the
Status Bar in Stop mode, an abbreviated
Status Bar will appear (see Figure 43)
that only indicates the current title, and
does not permit you to change the title
number.
Figure 46
Status banners may also appear on
screen briefly to display messages such
as “Disc Loading”, “Play”, “Stop”, “Pause”,
“Feature Not Available” or other status
messages. These messages are generated
by the DVD changer section of the CVR700,
and are separate from banner messages
generated by the CVPD50 screen.
Figure 43
Selecting a Disc For Playback
There are several methods for playing
a loaded disc in the CVR700:
• If you press the Audio Button U
, the Subtitle Button V
or
7
7
the Angle Button E
the Status Bar being on screen, the
without
15
• Turn on the CVR700 by pressing the
Main Power On/Off Button 1.
segment of the Status Bar relating to
the function you selected will appear
on screen by itself, and you will be
able to change the setting for that
function by continuing to press the
corresponding button. (See examples
of the Subtitle segment in Figures 44
and 45.)
director's commentary; you may cycle
through these tracks while the disc is
playing by repeatedly pressing the Audio
•
Any discs already loaded in the
changer will be indicated by the Disc
Indicators D. The indicator for the
last disc played will be flashing. Note
that the Upper Display Line Hwill
indicate that the unit is in Stop mode,
even when no discs are loaded. Check
for lit Disc Indicators Dto deter-
mine whether any discs are available
for play. Play will not begin automati-
cally. If you press the Play Button
Button U
.
7
ESubtitle: The fifth item is the current
Subtitle status. If the disc contains subti-
tles, you may cycle through the available
languages while the disc is playing by
repeatedly pressing the Subtitle Button
Figure 44
V
. In addition to displaying the
7
available languages, the Subtitle feature
may be set to Off by continuing to press
the button.
!e
; you will be prompted on
25
Figure 45
the Lower Display Line Eto enter
the number of the disc you wish to
play. If you enter a disc number using
the Numeric Keys l
Disc Selectors S
play that disc. If you do nothing, the
CVR700 will play the last selected disc,
whose Disc Indicator Dwill be
flashing.
A different Status Bar is displayed on
screen when a CD is playing (see Fig. 46).
This Status Bar only contains two items:
the current Track number followed by the
total number of tracks on the disc and the
elapsed time. When the Track number is
highlighted, you may use the Numeric
Keys l
a track you wish to skip to. The Time
Search function is also available for CDs.
Use the Numeric Keys l
FAngle: The sixth item is the current
camera angle. This feature is only avail-
able on certain DVD discs; check the DVD
jacket to determine whether this feature
is available on the disc. You may change
the angle setting at any time by repeatedly
14 or the
, the CVR700 will
pressing the Angle Button E
.
15
to enter the number of
14
However, the on-screen view will only
change during portions of the disc where
the multi-angle feature has been activated.
At the beginning of a passage where
multiple camera angles are available, a
Status Banner will appear indicating
“Angle Area In”. At any time after this
message appears, press the Angle
• If you wish to play a different disc,
you may skip to the next numbered
disc by pressing the Disc Skip Button
to enter
14
the hour/minute/second indication of
the time at which you wish play to begin,
followed by the Set Button I
Playback from that point will begin
T
. If you wish to skip to a differ-
31
ent disc, press the Disc Direct Button
, and then enter the desired
.
7
a
13
disc number using the Numeric Keys
. If there is no disc in that
immediately.
l
14
Button E
to view the program
15
location, the CVR700 will do nothing.
using a different camera angle. Another
Status Banner with the message "Angle
Area Out" will appear at the end of the
passage. After this second banner
JBL On Screen Library
With five disc positions available, it is
easy to forget the location of a desired
disc. Rather than having to scan through
all five positions, the CVR700 offers the
appears, pressing the Angle Button
E
will change the setting, but the
15
on-screen image will not change.
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
JBL On Screen Library, which conveniently
displays the loaded discs without your
having to look at each disc individually.
When play is stopped, you may use the
JBL On Screen Library feature. Press the
and process the digital audio streams
during these modes. However, audio will
be heard during fast-play of audio CDs
(slow-play is not available for CDs).
Stop Button #M
press the Play Button !e
the disc will resume playing from the
point at which it was stopped. Resume
mode is not preserved if you turn off
the CVR700, change to another disc, or
select another source.
once. If you
24
,
25
• The front-panel Skip/Search Buttons
8function slightly differently than the
remote buttons. When the disc changer
is the source, press and release these
buttons to move (skip) either backward
(left button) or forward (right button)
through the tracks on a DVD-Audio, CD
or VCD disc or the chapters on a DVD-
Video disc. Press and hold either but-
ton for at least 1 second to search
either backward (left button) or forward
(right button) the current track or chap-
ter at 2x speed. Press and hold again
and release to increase the scan speed
to 4x. Repeat this procedure while in
scan mode to cycle through these scan
speeds: 2x, 4x, 16x, 100x, 2x and so
forth. Press and release the button
while scanning to skip tracks or chap-
ters. To stop searching, you must press
the Play Button !, the Stop Button
#or the other Search Button 8.
OSL Button d
, and the CVR700
37
will read and identify all loaded discs, a
process which may take several minutes,
but which only needs to be performed
once. A thumbnail for each disc position
will appear on screen, including a thumb-
nail image representative of the disc
materials, if one exists on the disc, or a
logo indicating the disc type; the disc’s
title, if it is on the disc; and the disc
type (see Figure 47). Both MP3 and
WMA discs will cause an icon called
COMPRESSEDto appear. When the
disc is selected, its compressed-audio
type will be displayed in the usual
• Press the Stop Button #M
twice (once for CDs and VCDs) to stop
playback and enter Stop mode. If you
press the Play Button !e
with the disc in Stop mode, play will
begin from the beginning of the disc,
and you will also be prompted to select
another disc by entering its number.
24
25
• To move forward or backward through
the tracks on a CD, VCD or DVD-Audio
disc, or through the chapters on a DVD-
Video disc, or through the still images
on a JPEG disc, press the Track Skip
Forward/Reverse Buttons 8J
on-screen information display for the
disc contents. Use the ⁄/¤/‹/›
h
. This will not work on MP3
30
Navigation Controls q
to
highlight the desired disc, and press the
Set Button I to select it for
6
4
and WMA discs, which are navigated
using a special screen described on
page 72.
7
immediate playback. Select the Exit
Library icon if you wish to leave the
library display without selecting a disc.
• To scan quickly forward or backward
within a track or chapter on a CD,
DVD, VCD, WMA or MP3 disc, press
the Forward/Reverse Search
• To advance frame by frame while a
DVD-Video disc is playing, press the
Pause Button @M
once, and
23
then each subsequent press of the
Buttons Jh
. Each press will
30
Pause Button @M will step
23
increase the scan speed by one step,
cycling through the available scan
speeds for each disc type (see below).
If you press the opposite-direction
search button while in Search mode,
the CVR700 will begin to scan in the
opposite direction. Press the Play
one frame forward through the pro-
gram. Reverse step is not available.
Press the Play Button !e
25
to resume normal play.
• While a disc is stopped, a Stop icon
Í
(
) will appear on the left side of the
Figure 47
Upper Display Line H. During play-
back, a Play icon (›) will appear, and
when the disc is paused, a Pause icon
( ) will appear. During Search modes,
the Play icon will remain in the display,
and the Lower Display Line Ewill
indicate that the disc is being scanned
either forward or in reverse.
Button !e
to stop scanning.
25
For DVD-Audio and DVD-Video playback,
there are four forward and reverse search
speeds. Each press of the Forward/
Reverse Search Buttons 8Lf
Transport Controls – Playing a
Disc
Basic playback using the CVR700 involves
functions similar to those you may be
familiar with for conventional CD players
or changers:
will cycle to the next speed in
27 29
the following order: 2x, 16x, 64x, 200x.
For CD and VCD playback, there are three
forward and reverse search speeds: 2x,
4x, 8x.
• Press the Play Button !e
.
• During normal play, the Upper
Display Line Hwill indicate the
track number and elapsed time for
CDs; the group and track numbers and
elapsed time of the track for DVD-
Audio discs; the title and chapter num-
bers and elapsed time of the chapter
for DVD-Video discs; and the WMA,
MP3 or JPG file number (and elapsed
time for audio files).
25
You will be prompted to select a disc
number; use the Disc Selectors 5or
For MP3 and WMA compressed-audio-
file playback, there are four forward and
reverse search speeds: 2x, 4x, 8x, 16x.
the Numeric Keys l
.
14
• To momentarily pause playback (and
freeze the current picture frame on a
DVD), press the Pause Button @M
• For DVD-Video discs only, you may play
the program material in forward or
reverse slow motion. Press the Slow
Play Forward/Reverse Controls
. To resume playback, press the
23
Play Button !e
.
25
• The CVR700 also provides a Resume
mode that pauses playback, but does
not freeze a DVD's current picture
frame. Resume mode is not available
for CDs or VCDs. To enter Resume
mode for any other disc type, press the
g
to cycle through the three
32
Random Play
available speeds: 1/2x, 1/4x, 1/8x.
The CVR700 allows you to randomly play
the tracks on an audio CD or a VCD, or
MP3 or WMA compressed audio files.
Random playback is not available for
NOTE: There will be no audio playback
during forward or reverse fast- or slow-
play of DVDs, as it isn't possible to decode
68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DVD-Audio, DVD-Video or JPEG discs.
When available, Simply press the
Random Button zto enter Random
mode (a banner will appear on screen),
and again to exit Random mode.
In Stop mode, only the Repeat All
Tracks and Repeat All Discs modes
are available.
VCDs: The conventional Repeat modes
are only available in Stop mode. As with
audio CDs, only the Repeat All Tracks and
Repeat All Discs modes are available.
Audio CDs: You may enter or exit
Random mode either while the disc is
playing, or after play has been stopped by
MP3 and WMA discs: The conventional
Repeat modes are available in both Play
and Stop modes. Unlike other disc types,
the folders and files on a compressed-
audio disc are displayed on screen and
may be navigated (see page 72). Thus, it
is possible to program Repeat One File
mode while the disc is stopped. The other
available repeat modes are Repeat All
Files (in a folder), Repeat Disc and
Repeat Off.
pressing the Stop Button #w
24
twice.
VCDs: Random mode is only available in
Stop mode, after play has been stopped
by pressing the Stop Button #w
24
twice.
MP3 and WMA discs: You may enter or
exit Random mode either while the disc
is playing, or after play has been stopped
by pressing the Stop Button #w
24
twice.
The Repeat Indicators Cwill light to
indicate the current Repeat mode.
The Random Indicator Cwill light
when the CVR700 is in Random mode.
Repeat A-B
Repeat Play
The Repeat A-B function allows you to
select any portion of a disc (except for
VCD, MP3 and WMA discs) and have it
repeat until play is stopped.
The CVR700 offers several repeat options
that allow for unattended playback, even
on a continuous basis. There are two basic
types of Repeat modes: conventional
Repeat, which allows you to repeat discs
and their existing subdivisions; and
Repeat A-B, in which a passage you
select is repeated. The available Repeat
modes will vary depending on the type
of disc.
While the disc is playing, when the
beginning of the desired passage is
reached, press the Repeat A-B Button
R once. A banner with the message
“A to B Repeat Set A” will appear on
screen momentarily. When the end of the
desired passage is reached, press the
Repeat A-B Button R once more. The
message “A to B Repeat On” will appear
briefly. The passage will continue to play
repeatedly until you manually stop play,
or press the Repeat A-B Button R
once again so that the message “A to B
Repeat Off” is displayed on screen.
The conventional Repeat modes are
accessed by repeatedly pressing the
Repeat Button `to cycle through the
available modes or exit Repeat mode.
DVDs: The conventional Repeat modes
are only available while the disc is play-
ing. Each press of the Repeat Button
`will cycle through the Chapter
Repeat On, Title Repeat On and Repeat
Off modes.
NOTE: The A-B Repeat range may cover
several titles or chapters on a DVD, as
long as the DVD disc’s control program
does not force the CVR700 to return to a
DVD menu in between.
Audio CDs: The available conventional
Repeat modes vary depending on whether
the disc is in Play mode or Stop mode.
While a disc is playing, each press of the
Repeat Button `will cycle through
the Repeat One Track, Repeat All Tracks,
Repeat All Discs and Repeat Off settings,
as displayed on screen in a banner and
on the front panel. The selected Track or
disc will be repeatedly played until play
is stopped, or the Repeat mode is exited.
In Repeat All Discs mode, if the CVR700
detects a DVD in a succeeding tray, it
will play it, but it will automatically end
Repeat mode.
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DVD PLAYBACK
NOTES ON DVD-AUDIO DISCS:
• Some DVD-Audio discs contain two
menus, one used when the disc is
played on a DVD-Audio player, and a
DVD-Video menu used on older players
that do not recognize the DVD-Audio
format. You may view the DVD-Video
menu by turning off the CVR700’s DVD-
Audio capability temporarily, using the
DVD Setup menu (see Figure 31). You
may wish to do this in order to access
certain audio surround tracks, such as
Dolby Digital 5.1 or PCM on the disc.
When you have finished exploring the
DVD-Video capabilities of the disc,
remember to restore the CVR700’s
DVD-Audio capability.
Important Notes on DVD
Playback
Using a DVD’s Menu
One of the unique features of the DVD
system is that it offers a producer the
opportunity to include a wide range of
features on a disc, including multiple-
language tracks; subtitles in a variety of
languages; special information such as
movie trailers and cast information; as
well as other customized information. In
addition, producers may divide a movie or
program into chapters that allow for quick
access to specific parts of the program.
These chapters may be accompanied by
thumbnail pictures of a scene from the
specific chapter to help you select the
desired spot on the disc.
The sensitive CVPD50 plasma display
screen is vulnerable to “burn-in” if any
still image remains on screen for any
length of time. It doesn’t take very long
for an image to burn in, and it is impor-
tant to avoid leaving certain displays on
screen for more than a few minutes, as
“burn-in” cannot be repaired, and will not
be covered by your warranty. Therefore,
DO NOT leave DVD menu screens on dis-
play for more than a brief period of time
unless they contain movement. Either
begin play of the movie, or turn off the
system (especially the screen) after 5
minutes.
When a disc is playing, press the Disc
• Some DVD-Audio discs do not permit
you to access the disc menu using the
j
j
The CVR700 is capable of all the features
and options covered by the DVD standards.
However, it is up to the producer of a
DVD disc to decide which of those fea-
tures and functions are available on any
given disc. For that reason, not all discs
will function identically, and some discs
will not have many of the features of the
DVD system. For example, most current
DVD discs do not take advantage of the
multiple-angle feature. When you press
a button and the player displays the
“Feature Not Available” message, this is
an indication that the disc has not been
programmed for that feature, or that the
CVR700 is not capable of executing that
command on that disc in the current
mode.
Menu Button
to pause the
38
playback and display the disc’s menu. As
there are no hard rules about style and
content for DVD menus, the way they
appear on the screen and the information
they contain will vary from one disc to
another. However, the following general
rules apply to most menus:
Menu Button
. However,
38
pressing the Title Button yor the
Audio Button U may provide menu
access. In addition, you may simply
place the disc in Stop mode and play
the tracks in order.
Zoom Feature
• The first menu that appears is the Main
Menu, and you may move through the
options with the Navigation ⁄¤‹›
The CVR700’s advanced digital video pro-
cessing circuits include a Zoom feature
that allows you to enlarge the image for
closer examination of a particular part of
the picture. Four steps of enlargement are
available.
Buttons q
, as the disc’s
6
4
programming allows. The option selected
will typically be highlighted in a certain
color or inside an outline box.
• To select a highlighted option, which
may either play a portion of the disc or
move to a submenu, press the Set
• To use the Zoom feature, press the
Zoom Button
k
while a disc is
28
playing or paused. Each press of the
button will increase the zoom-in effect.
When you have zoomed through all
four steps, the picture will return to
normal size.
In addition, it is common for the produc-
ers of DVD discs to block the use of cer-
tain functions during only some parts of a
disc. For example, many discs prohibit the
use of fast-play buttons or prohibit access
to the Chapter Menu display during the
playback of copyright notices, studio
logos, movie credits or trailers. The
Button s
or Play Button
7
!e
.
26
• On some discs, when you select the
DVD menu during the playback of a
movie, the disc will return to the point
in the program where the menu was
selected by offering a “Play Movie”
• When in any of the Zoom modes, you
may use the Navigation ⁄¤‹›
Buttons q
to navigate
6
4
option. Press the Set Button s
7
around the frame.
appearance of the “Feature Not
or Play Button
!e
to resume
26
Available” message, or the inability of
certain features to operate when the disc
itself has prohibited them, does not indi-
cate a problem with the CVR700, as these
features are outside of the unit’s control.
• Some discs are created in a way that
prevents the Zoom feature from operat-
ing. In addition, the Zoom feature will
not operate on disc menus and may not
operate on subtitles.
play. However, not all discs offer this
feature, and selecting the menu while
playing a movie may mean that you will
either have to go back to the beginning
of the program or the start of a chapter.
This feature is out of the control of the
CVR700, as it is set by the disc’s inter-
nal programming.
• The Zoom function is not available for
VCD or JPEG discs.
• Some DTS discs contain incorrect digi-
tal flags that may initially cause the
CVR700 to display incorrect information
on the available surround modes or
other features. This is the fault of the
disc author and not the CVR700, which
will correctly process the disc’s bit-
stream once it has been detected and
identified.
70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CD PLAYBACK
The Time Search function enables you to
begin play at a specific time point on the
Audio CD Playback Features
When playing audio CDs, your DVD player
has the same features as a CD player,
including track skip, repeat play and
programmed playback, as described on
pages 68–69. You may also access these
functions directly using the remote
control.
disc. Press the Status Button x
26
to display the Status Bar. Use the ‹/›
Navigation Controls q
to high-
6
light the elapsed track time, then simply
enter the time from which you wish
play to begin using the Numeric Keys
l
s
, and then press the Set Button
to enter it. Play will begin imme-
17
Selecting a Track
7
diately from that point in the current
track.
During Stop, Resume or Play mode,
enter the track number directly with the
Numeric Keys
The track selected will be played at once.
l
on the remote.
17
Video Off Feature
During CD playback, the JBL logo screen
will remain on display. After a few min-
utes, the screen saver image should
begin automatically, as a moving image is
necessary to avoid “burn-in” of an image
on the sensitive CVPD50 plasma display.
Some users may wish to turn the video
display off if they find the visual display
distracting or unnecessary during audio
playback.
You can skip through tracks forward or
backward by pressing the Forward/
Reverse Skip Buttons 8Jh
.
30
In Stop mode, the Upper Display Line
Hwill show the number of tracks
recorded on a CD and the total time on
the disc.
During normal play the Upper Display
Line Hwill indicate the track number
and elapsed time. The Lower Display
Line Ewill indicate the currently selected
audio surround mode.
The CVPD50 screen may be placed in
Screen Standby mode by first making
sure the remote control is in Screen
mode by pressing the Screen Selector
CD Status Bar
While a CD is loaded, you may view its
Status Bar by pressing the Status Button
e
. Then press the Screen
34
Standby Button Y
to place the
19
screen in Standby mode. Press it again
to return the screen to normal viewing
mode. The front-panel displays on the
CVR700 will remain lit to remind you
that the system is on.
x
. If the CD is in Stop mode, the
26
Status Bar will display the total number
of tracks on the disc, and the total time
of the disc. If the CD is playing, the first
item shown will be the current track num-
ber, followed by a slash, and then the
total number of tracks on the disc. The
second item shown will be the elapsed
track time (see Figure 46).
To skip directly to a specific track, make
sure the remote control is in DVD mode
by pressing the DVD Input Selector
d
, then enter the number of the
2
track you wish to play using the Numeric
Keys . If the Status Bar is on
screen, you must press the Set Button
after the track number to enter
l
17
s
7
it. If the Status Bar is not on screen,
the CD will immediately skip to the track
you entered.
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MP3/WMA PLAYBACK
The CVR700 is among those DVD players
that are able to play back discs recorded
with MP3 or WMA files. This means that
you may enjoy the latest music using discs
created in your computer through the
high-quality audio components in your
home theater system. As the way that
MP3 and WMA files are recorded on
discs differs from the way conventional
CD audio discs are structured, MP3/WMA
playback is slightly different from that of
standard CDs.
NOTES ON MP3 AND WMA
PLAYBACK
• During playback, the front-panel display
and the time indicator on the screen
above the list will show the elapsed
time of the track being played. Other
time display options are not available
with MP3/WMA playback.
Figure 50
To select a track, press the ⁄/¤
Navigation Controls q until the
desired track name is highlighted. If the
list of tracks is longer than will fit on the
screen, press the Page Down/Up
• The CVR700 is only compatible with
standard MP3- and WMA-encoded
discs. Other compressed audio formats
used for Internet audio downloads will
not play on the CVR700.
4
Important Note on MP3 Playback:
MP3 and WMA discs may contain 200
tracks or even more. To get the best
overview about all tracks on the disc and
their names and to select or program
them comfortably, use the on-screen dis-
play rather than the front-panel display.
The front-panel display will only show the
number and the elapsed time of the track
being played.
Buttons Jh
to jump through a
30
• Due to the differences in various ver-
sions of the MP3 and WMA formats,
and the many differences between the
CD-R machines used to record discs on
a computer, it is possible that some
discs may not play on the CVR700 even
though they will work on a computer.
This is normal and does not indicate
a fault with the unit.
list of the track numbers forward or back-
ward through the list.
To start play of the track selected on the
list, press the Set Button
Play Button .
I
or
7
!
e
25
During MP3/WMA playback, some of the
standard CD/DVD playback controls oper-
ate in their normal fashion:
Important Note on WMA Playback:
The supported bit-rate is between 32k
bits and 192k bits.
• When a multisession disc with both
standard CD audio and MP3 or WMA
content is in use, the CVR700 will play
only the CD audio sections of the disc.
Track numbers will be visible in the dis-
play, but the files will not be decoded.
• You may skip forward to the next track
on the disc by pressing the Skip
Forward Button 7h
.
30
MP3 or WMA Disc Playback
• You may skip back to the current or
previous track on the disc by pressing
After the disc is loaded and the tray
closed, the CVR700 will read the disc’s
table of contents (TOC). A listing of all
the directories on the disc will be dis-
played if the disc was made with several
directories (see Figure 48).
the Skip Reverse Button
7J
30
• When a disc with multiple directories
is playing, only tracks from one directory
can be displayed and played at a time.
Select the desired directory and press
once or twice.
• Press the Pause Button
to momentarily stop playback. Press
the Play Button to
resume play. Press the Stop Button
twice to enter stop mode.
@M
23
!e
25
the Play Button
!e
to start
25
the first track. To see and play tracks
from other directories, first you must
select that directory, then select the
track and press the Play Button
#M
24
• You may search through tracks forward
or in reverse by pressing the appropri-
ate Search Buttons Lf
.
!e
.
29
25
27
• You may play an MP3 or WMA disc in
random mode like a normal CD (see
page 68).
• Only stereo audio playback is available
for MP3 and WMA discs.
Figure 48
To select a directory (if any), press the
• The Repeat function may be accessed
during playback of an MP3 or WMA
disc.
⁄/¤
Navigation Controls
q
6
4
until the desired directory name is high-
lighted, then press the Set Button
I
.
7
The folder will expand, listing all of the
tracks within the directory, each preceded
by a logo to identify it as an MP3 file or
WMA file. (See Figures 49 and 50.)
Figure 49
72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programmed Playback With
MP3 or WMA Discs
The CVR700 is capable of creating play-
lists of the files on a properly recorded
disc. To create a playback list for MP3
or WMA titles, follow the same steps as
for programming a playlist for any other
format disc as described on page 75.
JPEG Playback
The CVR700 is one of the few available
DVD players that is capable of recogniz-
ing JPEG still-image files and displaying
them. When a disc containing JPEG files
is loaded, the CD ROM Disc-Type
Indicator Awill light. The list of direc-
tories on the disc will appear, and may
be navigated in the same way as for a
compressed-audio disc. Use the ⁄/¤
Navigation Controls q
to
select a folder, and press the Set Button
to expand the folder and display
6
4
I
7
the tracks. JPEG files are listed with an
appropriate icon preceding the file name
(see Figure 51). Press the Play Button
!e
to begin displaying the
25
images in the expanded folder. You may
set the amount of time each image
remains visible on screen using the DVD
Setup menu (see Figure 31).
Figure 51
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VCD PLAYBACK
VCD, a format that predates DVD, is
based on a different compression format
than DVD and a recording method that is
similar to CD. Although the DVD has, for
the most part, replaced VCD as a format,
the CVR700 offers VCD playback so that
you may play your existing library of
VCD discs.
You may select the track number and
change it to skip to another track.
• Direct number entry without any VCD
menu shown on screen has no effect –
even when the Status Banner is on.
Using the Status Bar for VCD
Playback
When playing VCD discs it is possible to
• When PBC is on, the Disc Menu
Button j
will have the same
38
function as with DVDs, making the
player return to the latest disc menu.
When PBC is off, pressing the Disc
view the Status Bar. Press the Status
Button
N
26 to see the Status Bar.
Note, however, that when the PBC is on,
some features may not be available with
that VCD.
There are two versions of the VCD format:
an early version which is simply called
“VCD” and a later version with Playback
Control which is called “Version 2.0” or
“PBC”. The CVR700 is compatible with
both forms of VCD, although playback will
vary according to which version is used
and the specific way in which the disc
was created.
Menu Button j
will turn the
38
PBC on and the disc will be played
from the beginning.
You will be able to see the current track
number, followed by a slash and the total
number of tracks on the disc. You will
also be able to see the elapsed time for
the current track. However, you may not
be able to change the track number or uti-
lize the Time Search function as with an
audio CD.
Even though VCD discs provide video,
because the format is based on CD tech-
nology, the playback functions for a VCD
disc are similar to CD. To play a VCD disc,
place it in the CVR700 as you would do
with any other CD or DVD disc. The unit
takes a few seconds to read the disc’s
contents. The VCD Disc Type Indicator
Awill light in the front panel. If the disc
has playback control, a PBCONbanner
will appear on screen briefly.
Use of functions when the PBC is on will
vary according to the disc type. Note that
if the disc was created with Playback
Control (PBC – see below), it is not possi-
ble to change track numbers directly.
Playback Control
VCD discs made under the Revision 2.0
specification will usually offer PBC play-
back control.
NOTE: Some VCDs are created without
playback control, so that only a VCD file
exists on the disc. The CVR700 may iden-
tify this disc with a CDROM Disc Type
Indicator A, similar to a compressed
audio disc. In that case, the disc is navi-
gated the same way as an MP3 or WMA
disc. A screen similar to the one in Figure
52 will appear, and you will need to
The PBCONbanner will appear when
the disc is played.
With PBC, you can select titles and
navigate the disc as with DVDs. However,
the access to some functions may be
prohibited by the PBC playback control;
in that case, the FEATURENOT
AVAILABLEbanner will appear
on screen.
select the VCD file and play it manually.
When the VCD is made without PBC,
the disc can be controlled the same as
an audio CD, but direct track access by
entering a number is not possible without
opening the Status Bar.
With PBC, many discs include chapter
selection menus that are similar to those
found on DVDs. However, on VCD discs
the disc menu (if any) is accessed and
controlled differently than on DVDs.
Figure 52
Keep in mind that the exact level of func-
tionality for any VCD will vary widely and
it is ultimately determined by the way the
disc was created, not by the CVR700, par-
ticularly if the disc has been created
under VCD Version 2.0 with Playback
Control (see “Playback Control”).
• Play will start with the first track
(which may be an intro), then leading to
the VCD menu (if any) automatically.
• NEXT (Skip Forward) will skip to the
VCD menu from the intro (Track 1)
directly.
When playing VCD discs, most standard
DVD/CD playback controls are used,
including Play, Stop, Pause, Track Skip
Forward and Reverse and Fast Forward or
Reverse Search. The functions Slow Play
and Step and the Zoom function are not
available with VCDs.
• Once the menu options appear on the
screen, make your selection by pressing
the Numeric Keys
l
that corre-
14
spond to your desired choice. The
desired selection will begin playing
automatically.
74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PROGRAMMED PLAY
Programmed play allows you to select
any track from an audio CD for playback
in a specific order. This type of program-
ming is particularly useful for parties or
other situations in which you desire con-
tinuous playback of specific selections for
a long period of time.
Begin by stopping play and pressing the
Program Button S
and a list of
21
loaded discs with their disc types will
appear on screen (see Figure 53). How-
ever, you may only program tracks on the
current disc.
The Upper Display Line Hwill display
T– followed by the disc number. This
represents the track number on the disc,
which will appear in the order pro-
grammed. Use the Numeric Keys
l
to enter the number of the first
14
track you wish to program into your
playlist, and press the Set Button
s
to enter it. Continue entering
7
tracks in this fashion to create your list,
and press the Play Button e
to
25
play the list.
To edit the list, press the Program
Button S followed by the ⁄
21
Navigation Button q
to view the
4
next track in the list or to add a track to
the end of the list, or the ¤ Navigation
Button q
to view the previous
4
track in the list.
Once you have programmed a list, you
may repeatedly press the Program
Button S
to toggle in and out of
21
programmed play mode. However, to
cancel the program, you must remove
the disc from the CVR700.
Figure 53
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PROGRAMMING THE CVR700R2 REMOTE
The CVR700R2 remote is factory-pro-
grammed for all functions needed to
operate the unit. In addition, it is also
preprogrammed to operate most recent
JBL DVD players and changers, CD play-
ers and changers, CD recorders and cas-
sette decks. The codes for other brand
devices may be programmed into the
CVR700R2 remote using its extensive
library of remote codes or a head-to-head
learning process for codes not in the
internal library.
corder, which do not have remote-
controlled power on/off codes, you
must insert a disc or tape and
begin play.
• DVI/COMPUTER: Used to program an
external device equipped with a digital
video interface (DVI) video output, such
as an external DVD player, cable televi-
sion box, satellite television receiver or
HDTV tuner.
2. Press and hold the Remote Menu
Button b for about 3 seconds
while the message shown in Figure
54 appears in the remote’s LCD
Information Display c. Release
the button when the red light under
the Set Button sappears.
5. SELECT A DEVICE will appear in
the LCD display (Figure 57). Press the
⁄/¤Navigation Controls qto
scroll through the list of device types
available for the source you have
selected, and press the Set Button
swhen the device you wish to set
the codes for appears. For this exam-
ple, we will select “HDTV-Tuner” to
enter the codes needed to operate your
HDTV set-top tuner.
Important Notes on Using the
CVR700R2 Remote: The CVR700R2
remote control is capable of operating
up to nine devices, including the CVR700.
In order to segregate the control com-
mands for each device, the remote’s logic
contains a separate “page” of commands
for each device that is called up when
that device’s selector has been pressed.
For example, in order to access the
commands that control the CVPD50
screen, such as Letterbox or PIP, you must
first press the Screen Selector e, so
that the word SCREEN appears in the
upper line of the LCD Information
Display c.
Figure 54
3. The remote’s MAIN MENU message
(Figure 55), will appear in the LCD
display and the Set Button swill
remain illuminated in red. Press the
Set Button sto begin the process
of selecting a device and locating the
proper remote codes.
Figure 57
If you make a mistake at any time, press
the Exit/Cancel Button rto return to
the previous menu screen, or press the
Remote Menu Button b to exit the
remote menu system.
Figure 55
4. PROGRAM CODE will appear in the
6. At the next menu screen on the
remote (Figure 58), press the Set
Button sto enter the Manual
mode, which means that you will
select the brand name of the device
from the list programmed into the
remote’s memory.
LCD display (Figure 56). Press the
⁄
¤
/
Navigation Button qto
Most of the programming functions in
this section begin by using the remote
control’s own menu system, which is
accessed by pressing and holding the
Remote Menu Button b until the
Main Menu appears. In order to access
this function, you must first press the
System Selector f.
scroll through the list of source inputs
and press the Set Button qwhen
the source you wish to set the codes
for appears. For this example, we will
select “AUX” to enter the codes needed
to operate your HDTV tuner. As a
shortcut, once the screen shown in
Figure 56 appears, you may jump to
the desired source by pressing its
Input Selector d.
Figure 58
Programming Product Codes
7. The next menu screen on the remote
(Figure 59) will show the start of the
list of available brands. Press the
Thanks to the remote’s advanced technol-
ogy and two-line LCD display, it is no
longer necessary to look up cumbersome
codes when programming the remote; fol-
lowing the steps outlined below, you sim-
ply search for the brand name from the
remote’s memory. We recommend that
you first try the preprogrammed code
entry method. If that procedure is not
successful, then try the code-learning
method.
⁄
¤
/
Navigation Buttons quntil
the brand name of the device you are
programming into the remote appears
on the lower line of the display and
then press the Set Button s. As a
shortcut, once the screen shown in
Figure 57 appears, you may jump to
the first letter of the desired brand
name by pressing the corresponding
Alphanumeric Key l repeatedly
until the brands beginning with the
desired letter appear. For example,
to jump to the brand “RCA”, simply
press the “7” key three times, until
the first brand beginning with an “R”
appears, and then scroll to the
Figure 56
NOTE: Each source may be programmed
with certain device types:
• AUX: Used to program a TV, HDTV tuner,
VCR, TV/VCR combination device, exter-
nal DVD or CD player, cable box or satel-
lite receiver.
• VCR: Used to program a videocassette
recorder or TV/VCR combination device.
Preprogrammed Code Entry
The easiest way to program the remote
for operation with a source device from
another brand is to follow these steps:
• CBL/SAT: Used to program a cable tele-
vision box, satellite television receiver or
HDTV tuner.
1. Turn on the power to the device you
wish to program into the remote. This
is important, as in a later step you will
need to see whether the device turns
off to determine whether the remote
has been programmed for the proper
remote codes. In order to program
codes for a game console or cam-
• GAME/CAM: Used to program a video
game console or camcorder.
desired name.
• DR: Used to program a digital recorder,
such as a DVD recorder, CD recorder,
D-VHS recorder, TiVo, or personal video
device (digital video recorder) containing
a hard disc drive.
Figure 59
76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTE: If the brand name for the product
you wish to program does not appear in
the list, the codes may still be available,
as some manufacturers share codes.
If the desired brand is not listed, press
the Exit/Cancel Button rto exit the
programming process, and skip to the
instructions shown at right for the
“Automatic” method of programming the
remote. If desired, or if the codes for your
brand are not part of the remote’s library
at all, you may still use the remote to
program most infrared-controlled prod-
ucts by “learning” the commands from
the product’s original remote into the
remote. The instructions for Learning
Commands are on page 78.
ask whether the game has stopped. For a
camcorder, the remote will ask whether
the camera has zoomed in.
be in the code library. You may fill in the
codes for any button that does not oper-
ate properly by using the learning tech-
nique shown on this page.
10. If the device being programmed into
the remote does not turn off after you
have pressed the “1” Button l,
repeat Steps 8 and 9 by pressing the
available numeric keys shown until
the device turns off. If the device still
does not turn off after all choices
have been tried, or if there is only one
number key shown as available to try,
the code for this specific device is not
in the remote library under that brand
name. If that is the case, press the
Exit/Cancel Button rto exit the
manual programming mode.
Automatic Code Entry
In addition to manual code selection using
the brand name list, it is also possible to
automatically search through all the codes
that are stored in the remote’s library to
see whether a device will respond even
if it is not listed among the brands that
appear when you program the remote
manually. To automatically search through
the codes that are available for a specific
device type (e.g., DVD, VCR), follow these
steps:
1. Turn on the power to the device you
wish to program into the remote. This
is important because in a later step you
will need to see whether the device
turns off to determine whether the
remote has been programmed for the
proper remote codes. In order to pro-
gram codes for a game console or
camcorder, which do not have
8. The next step is important, as it
determines which codes will operate
the source device or display. Point
the remote at the device being pro-
grammed and, following the instruc-
tions shown in the remote’s LCD
Information Display c(Figure
60), press and release the Numeric
Keys kshown on the menu screen
one at a time, starting with the “1”
button. After you press the “1”
Remember that the codes may still be
stored in the remote’s library under
another brand, and you can have the
remote control search for them by fol-
lowing the instructions below for
automatic programming. You may
also manually “learn” the codes for
most devices into the remote by fol-
lowing the Learning Commands
instructions on page 78.
remote-controlled power on/off
codes, you must insert a disc or tape
and begin play.
11. When the device being programmed
does turn off after a numeric key has
been pressed, you must press the Set
Button swithin five seconds to
enter the setting into the remote’s
memory. After you press the Set
Button k, the remote’s LCD screen
will briefly go blank as the code is
being transmitted, but you will see
2. Press and hold the Remote Menu
Button b for about three seconds
while the message shown in Figure
54 appears in the remote’s LCD
Information Display c. Release
the button when the red light under
the Set Button sappears.
the “transmit” icon
in the upper
right corner of the display to serve as
confirmation that the remote is send-
ing out commands.
Button s, the top line of the LCD
display will read SAVING… and
then the word SAVED will flash four
times in the center of the bottom line.
3. The remote’s MAIN MENU message
(Figure 55) will appear in the LCD dis-
play and the Set Button swill
remain illuminated in red. Press the
Set Button sto begin the process
of selecting a device and locating the
proper remote codes.
Figure 60
12. When the codes are saved, the
remote will return to normal opera-
tion, and whenever you press the
Input Selector Button dthat was
just programmed, the codes for the
new device will be used.
9. After you press and release the num-
ber key, watch the device being pro-
grammed to see whether it turns off.
As shown in the instructions that will
appear on the next menu screen
4. PROGRAM CODE will appear in the
LCD display (Figure 56). Press the
⁄/¤ Navigation Controls qto
scroll through the list of sources and
press the Set Button swhen the
source you wish to set the codes for
appears. For this example, we will
select “AUX” to enter the codes
needed to operate your HDTV
(Figure 61), if your device has turned
off, press the Set Button s, and
then skip to Step 11. If the unit does
not turn off, proceed to Step 10.
NOTE: Some brands share a common
remote control code for “Power Off” for
many models. For that reason it is possi-
ble that even though the remote appears
to be properly programmed, you may find
that some buttons do not appear to issue
the correct command. If this is the case,
repeat the procedure outlined above, but
if more than one numeric key selection is
suggested in Step 8, try a different num-
ber to see whether the remote operates
correctly. Although the remote is prepro-
grammed with an extensive library of
codes for many major brands, it is also
possible that you may have attempted to
program a product that is too new or too
old, and thus not all of its commands will
Y
#
Figure 61
NOTE: Since game consoles and cam-
corders have no remote control power
on/off codes, the test command used to
program a remote code will be different.
In order to program codes for a game
console or camcorder, which do not have
remote-controlled power on/off codes,
you must insert a disc or tape and begin
play. For a game console, the remote will
set-top tuner.
5. SELECT A DEVICE will appear in
the LCD display (Figure 57). Press the
⁄
¤
/
Navigation Button qto
scroll through the list of device cate-
gories and press the Set Button s
when the device for which you wish
to set the codes appears. For this
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
example, we will select “HDTV-
Tuner” to enter the codes needed to
operate your HDTV set-top box.
will have to “learn” them into the
remote following the instructions
shown in the next section. Press the
Remote Menu Button b as
instructed to exit the programming
process.
then the word SAVED will flash four
times in the center of the bottom line.
14. When the codes are saved, the
remote will return to normal opera-
tion, and whenever you press the
Input Selector Button dthat was
just programmed, the codes for the
new device will be used.
6. At the next menu screen on the
⁄
remote, press the Navigation
Button qso that the bottom line of
the LCD display reads AUTO (Fig. 62)
and then press the Set Button sto
enter the Automatic programming
mode.
Figure 64
Learning Commands
10. If the device being programmed does
turn off after following the instruc-
tions in Step 7, you will need to
verify the code set by pressing the
Numeric Keys l in sequence,
as instructed in Figure 60. Point the
remote at the device being pro-
grammed, and press the “1” Button
l to see whether the device turns
back on.
On occasions when the remote does not
contain the codes for a particular prod-
uct’s remote in its built-in library, or when
you wish to program a missing or special
function into one button of a device, the
remote’s learning capability allows you
to do that. To teach commands from one
product’s remote into the remote, follow
the steps below:
Figure 62
7. As instructed on the next menu
⁄
screen, press the Navigation
Button qto begin the automatic
code search process. Your confirma-
tion that the remote is sending out
commands is the movement of a
square block across the top line of
the LCD display screen while the bot-
tom line reads PLEASE WAIT….
You will also see the transmit icon in
the upper right corner of the LCD dis-
play’s top line to remind you that the
remote is working even though you
may not see anything happening to
the device being programmed.
The process requires that both the
device’s original remote and the
11. After pressing and releasing the “1”
Button l, check to see whether
the device has turned back on. If it
has, skip to Step 12. If it does not
turn off, press the “2” Button l,
or the next button in the numeric
sequence if you are repeating the pro-
cedure, as instructed by the LCD
screen in Figure 65.
CVR700R2 remote be available. Before
pressing any buttons on either remote,
place them so that the IR transmitter on
the remote from the device to be pro-
grammed is facing the Infrared Lens
s
on the CVR700R2 remote, pointing to
the area next to the slots over the EzSet
Microphone Sensor r. The two
remotes should be no more than an inch
apart, and there should not be any direct
sunlight or other bright light source near
the remotes.
8. It will take a few seconds for the
remote to send out the first group of
commands, after which you will see a
new display in the LCD screen, as
shown in Figure 63. Following the
instructions, if the device being pro-
grammed has not turned off, press
Y >>~
Figure 65
12. When pressing the “1” button does
not turn the device being programmed
back on, repeat the procedure by try-
ing the remainder of the Numeric
Keys l in sequence, each time
pressing and then releasing the but-
ton to see whether the new device
turns back on. When it does, skip to
the next step. However, if you try all
10 numeric keys and find that the unit
will not turn on, you won’t be able
to use this method to program the
device. Press the Remote Menu
Button b to exit the programming
process. You’ll need to follow the
Learning Commands instructions below
to enter the codes for this device into
the remote.
1. Press and hold the Remote Menu
Button b for about 3 seconds
while the message shown in Figure
54 appears in the remote’s LCD
Information Display c. Release
the button when the red light under
the Set Button sappears.
⁄
the Navigation Button qagain
to send another group of codes (see
Step 9). If the device being programmed
has turned off, press either the “1” or
“0” key and skip to Step 10.
2. The remote’s MAIN MENU message
(Figure 55), will appear in the LCD
display and the Set Button swill
remain illuminated in red. Press the
Y > ~ >
Figure 63
⁄
Navigation Button quntil
⁄
9. By pressing the Navigation
LEARN appears on the bottom line
of the LCD screen, as shown in Figure
66. Press the Set Button sto
begin the process of learning com-
mands from another device’s remote
into the remote.
Button qagain, the remote will
send out a new set of commands.
When it pauses, follow the instruc-
tions shown in Step 8. Depending
on how many codes are stored for
a specific device type, you may have
to repeat this process as many as 15
times. Remember, if the device turns
off, skip to Step 10. When all the
codes for the device being pro-
13. When pressing one of the numeric
keys in Step 11 or 12 causes the
device being programmed to turn
back on, follow the instructions
Figure 66
shown in Figure 65 and press the Set
Button swithin five seconds of
the device turning on. After you press
the Set button, the top line of the LCD
display will read SAVING… and
3. LEARN CODE will appear in the
LCD display (Figure 67). Press the
⁄/¤ Navigation Controls qto
scroll through the list of sources and
press the Set Button swhen the
source you wish to set the codes for
grammed have been tried, the
instruction shown in Figure 64 will
appear. This means that the codes for
the product you are trying to program
are not in the remote library and you
78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
appears. The available options are
DVD/MAIN, SYSTEM, SCREEN,
7. If the message shown in Figure 71
appears in the display, press the Set
Button sto try programming the
button again. When the remote
prompts you to press and hold the key
on the original remote again by show-
ing the display shown in Figure 69,
immediately press the button on the
source remote again. To avoid anoth-
er failed attempt, make certain that
the windows on the two remotes are
facing one another.
DVI/DVD, TIVO, GAME, CABLE, VCR,
TV and FM/AM [TUNER]. We recom-
mend that you learn new codes only
for devices that are external to the
JBL Cinema Vision system. For this
example, we will select “DVI/DVD” to
enter the codes needed to operate an
external DVD player with a DVI output.
Figure 73
11. When you have programmed all keys
⁄
for the desired device, press the
Navigation Button qrepeatedly
when the LEARN MENU (Figure 70)
appears until you see the display
shown in Figure 74. Press the Set
Button sto return the remote to
normal operation.
8. Continue to hold the button on the
original remote until the LCD display
changes again. If the code was suc-
cessfully learned, you will see the
display shown in Figure 70. In that
case, go to Step 9.
Figure 67
4. The next menu screen (Figure 68) will
prompt you to select the button on
the remote that you wish to program.
Press that button on the remote.
Figure 74
12. If you wish to program the codes for
another device, repeat the procedure
outline above, but select a different
device in Step 3.
If the CODE FAILED display (Fig. 71)
appears again, you may either try to
program the key again, or press the
Note on Learning Function: Remote
control signals can vary from one con-
troller to the next due to different stan-
dard formats adopted by each manufac-
turer. For example, some manufacturers
repeat the code sequence in the initial
transmission, and others insert a special
code to identify the brand or model. Due
to the variety of formats, occasionally an
error may occur in the learning process
even though the CVR700R2 remote has
indicated that the code was learned cor-
rectly. Therefore, it is recommended that
you test the newly learned codes with
the source component. If the code was
not learned correctly, try relearning it.
Usually, after several tries, the code
can be learned correctly.
⁄
Figure 68
Navigation Button qto stop the
process. It is possible that some
remotes may use code sequences or
infrared frequencies that are not com-
patible with the CVR700R2 remote,
and those codes cannot be learned.
When the display shown in Figure 72
appears, press the Set Button s
to exit the Learning system.
5. Once you press the button to be pro-
grammed on the remote, press and
hold the button on the remote control
for the device to be programmed
within five seconds, as instructed on
the next menu screen (Figure 69).
Figure 69
6. Continue to hold the button on the
original remote until the menu on the
CVR700R2 remote’s LCD screen
changes. If the code is successfully
learned, you will see the display shown
in Figure 70.
Figure 72
9. When a code has been learned suc-
cessfully, you have three options.
When the display shown in Figure 70
is on the LCD screen on the remote,
you may press the Set Button sto
learn additional codes from the but-
tons on a original source remote into
the CVR700R2 remote. Follow Steps 4
through 6 as often as needed to com-
plete the code-learning process.
Changing Devices
In the factory default settings, the remote
is programmed so that the commands
transmitted correspond to the device
selected by pressing one of the Input
Figure 70
If you see that menu, proceed to Step 9.
If the code is not successfully learned,
you will see the display shown in Figure
71. If that menu appears, proceed to
Steps 7 and 8.
Selectors
3. This is logical, as you
want the remote to control the device you
have selected. However, in some circum-
stances you may have configured your
system so that the devices connected
to the CVR700 do not correspond to the
default device settings and the legends
printed on the remote. For example, if
your system has two VCRs you may
connect the second VCR to the digital
recorder input. There is no problem in
doing that, but in normal operation the
commands issued after selecting the digi-
tal recorder input are not for a VCR.
10. If you wish to change the name that
appears in the LCD display when the
button that has just had a new code
⁄
learned is pressed, press the
Navigation Button quntil the
display shown in Figure 73 appears in
the LCD display. Press the Set Button
sto be taken to a EDIT BUTTON
display. Enter the new name for the
key following the instructions shown
in the Renaming Individual Keys sec-
tion of this manual on page 86. If you
find it more convenient to rename the
buttons at a later time, you may do
that separately by following the
Figure 71
If you don’t attempt to “teach” a remote
code to the CVR700R2 remote within 5
seconds, the words “TIME OUT” will
appear briefly on the second line of the
LCD display, and you will be prompted to
start over by pressing a button on the
CVR700R2 remote (see Figure 68).
The remote allows you to correct that sit-
uation through the “Changing Devices”
process. This enables you to assign the
codes from one type of device to a differ-
You may exit the process at any time by
pressing the Remote Menu Button b.
instructions on page 85.
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ent button. For example, in the steps
below, we will explain how to program
the digital recorder buttons to provide the
commands to operate a VCR. Of course,
you may program the remote to have any
of the devices take on the code set of any
other device, as your system requires.
And, with the remote’s “Edit” function,
you can even change the way the name
of the device appears on the remote’s
LCD display so that you see exactly which
commands are being sent.
4. Once the “old” device type has been
selected, you need to tell the remote
which set of remote codes to use as a
replacement for the device just selected.
When the instructions shown in
⁄ ¤
7. After you press and release the num-
ber key, watch the device being pro-
grammed to see whether it turns off.
As shown in the instructions that will
appear on the next menu screen
(Figure 61), press the Set Button
s, and then skip to Step 9. If the
unit does not turn off, proceed to the
next step.
Figure 77 appear, press the
/
Navigation Button qto scroll
through the list of device categories
to find the name of the device that
you wish to use. The old device name
will remain on the left side of the
LCD screen, while the replacement
device list will scroll to its right. For
8. If the device being programmed into
the remote does not turn off after you
have pressed the “1” Button
l,
NOTE: You may not change the device
types for the DVD/MAIN device
(CVR700’s internal DVD/CD changer), the
FM/AM (TUNER) device, the SCREEN
device (controls CVPD50 functions) or the
SYSTEM device (controls CVR700’s
receiver functions).
continue Steps 6 and 7 by pressing
the available numeric keys shown
until the device turns off. If the device
still does not turn off after all choices
have been tried, the code for this
specific device is not in the remote
library under that brand name. If that
is the case, we suggest that you
press the Set Button sto accept
the codes from another brand so that
the programming is completed, but
remember that you will then have to
program the remote manually by fol-
lowing the Learning Commands
instructions on page 78.
⁄
example, press the Navigation
Button quntil the display screen
reads TIVO<-VCR to have the digi-
tal recorder Button transmit the com-
mands used to control a VCR. Press
the Set Button swhen the
desired device combination appears.
To program the buttons normally assigned
to one device for the commands of
another, follow these steps:
<
Figure 77
1. Press and hold the Remote Menu
Button
b
for about 3 seconds
5. Once the new device is selected, the
remainder of the process will select
the codes for the specific brand to
be used, and for that reason they
are identical to the way a device is
programmed using manual entry.
Continue the process as outlined in
the next few steps, remembering that
if the codes for your specific device
are not found, you may select any
brand and then “learn” the proper
codes into the remote using the
process outlined on page 78. To begin
the process, start by selecting the
brand of device, as shown in Figure
⁄ ¤
while the message shown in Figure
54 appears in the remote’s LCD
Information Display
2. Release
9. When the device being programmed
does turn off after a numeric key has
been pressed, you must press the Set
Button swithin five seconds to
enter the setting into the remote’s
memory. After you press the Set but-
ton, the top line of the LCD display
will read SAVING... and then the
word SAVED will flash four times in
the center of the bottom line.
the button when the red light under
the Set Button sappears.
2. The remote’s MAIN MENU message
(Figure 55), will appear in the LCD
display and the Set Button swill
remain illuminated in red. Press the
⁄
Navigation Button quntil
CHANGE DEVICE appears on the
bottom line of the LCD screen, as
shown in Figure 75. Press the Set
Button sto begin the process of
reassigning the commands used for a
particular device.
10. When the codes are saved the remote
will return to normal operation, and
whenever you press the Input
57. Press the
/
Navigation
Button quntil the brand name of
the device you are programming into
the remote appears on the lower line
of the display and then press the
Set Button s.
Selector Button
3
that was just
programmed, the display will show
the original device type code at the
far left side of the display, with the
name of the new code set type in
brackets. For example, the display
will read TIVO<-VCR in our exam-
ple of replacing the TiVo codes with
those for a VCR.
Figure 75
3. Next, you will select the Input
Selector dfor the device that you
wish to change. When the display
shown in Figure 76 appears, press the
⁄ ¤
6. The next step is important, as it
determines which codes will operate
the source device or display. Point
the remote at the device being pro-
grammed and, following the instruc-
tions shown on the remote’s LCD
/
Navigation Button qto
scroll through the list to find the
device you wish to use for another
function. In this case, we will select
“TIVO,” and show how to change it to
take on the codes for operating a
VCR. When that device’s name
Macro Programming
Information Display
and release the Numeric Keys
one at a time, starting with the “1”
2, press
Macros enable you to easily repeat fre-
quently used combinations of multiple
remote control commands with the touch
of a single button. Once a macro is pro-
grammed, you may send up to 20 com-
mands with one press of the Power On or
Macro buttons. This will greatly simplify
the process of turning on your system,
changing devices or other common tasks.
Thanks to the remote’s two-line display, it
l
Button
Button
l
l
. After you press the “1”
, the remote’s LCD screen
appears, press the Set Button
s.
will briefly go blank as the code is
being transmitted, but you will see
the “transmit” icon in the upper right
corner of the display to serve as con-
firmation that the remote is sending
out commands.
Figure 76
80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
is easier than ever for you to take advan-
tage of the power of macro commands.
desired device name appears to move
to the next programming step.
• Power On
1
• System
• Logic 7
5
Recording a Macro
To record a macro into the remote’s mem-
ory, follow these steps:
f
As each button is pressed to enter it
into the macro, you will see the but-
ton names appear and then scroll up
on the LCD display as your confirma-
tion of the key entry (Figure 83).
Figure 81
1. Press and hold the Remote Menu
Begin entering the individual com-
mands for the macro, in the order
you wish them to be transmitted.
Remember that when you want to
change devices, you must first press
the Input Selectors dfor that but-
ton, and then press the Command or
Function key.
Button
b
for about three seconds
while the message shown in Figure
54 appears in the remote’s LCD
9. When all commands for the macro
have been entered, press the Set
Information Display
2. Release
the button when the red light under
the Set Button sappears.
Button
s
to save the macro. The
display screen will show the button
to which the macro has been pro-
grammed and the number of steps
used, and the word SAVED will blink
four times in the lower line of the
LCD display. When the display returns
to normal, the macro has been
entered and the remote is ready for
operation.
2. The remote’s MAIN MENU message
(Figure 55), will appear in the LCD
display and the Set Button swill
remain illuminated in red. Press the
6. The next display (Figure 82) and the
subsequent screens are where the
actual macro programming takes
place. The words at the left side of
the top line of the display show the
button that is being programmed
(e.g., one of the Macro Buttons
⁄
Navigation Button quntil
MACRO appears on the bottom line
of the LCD screen, as shown in Figure
78. Press the Set Button sto
enter the main macro menu branch.
R
) and the indication at the right
10. As the macro plays, you will see the
steps appear in the remote’s LCD dis-
play. Macros programmed into one of
the four discrete Macro buttons may
be activated at any time by pressing
the appropriate button.
side of the top line shows the number
of macro steps available of 20 possi-
ble steps. Following the instructions
on the remote’s LCD screen, press the
first key you wish to be transmitted in
the macro. In our example, we first
want the CVR700 to turn on, so the
Figure 78
3. At the next menu screen (Figure 79)
press the Set Button sto begin
recording a macro.
Preprogrammed Macros
Several macro-type commands have been
preprogrammed into the remote, and they
may be activated not by pressing one of
the Macro Buttons X, but rather by
pressing and holding certain other but-
tons as described below:
Power Button
pressed.
1
should be
Figure 79
4. The next display screen (Figure 80)
is where you select the button that
will be used to recall the macro.
The choices are one of the discrete
Macro Buttons
Navigation Button quntil the
name of the button you wish to pro-
gram the macro into is shown. For
this example we will show how to
program a series of commands that
will automatically be sent out every
time the M1 button is pressed.
Figure 82
7. Once the first command button for
the macro has been pressed, continue
to press the buttons you wish to be
part of the macro, in the order they
will be used. Press each button
within 5 seconds of the last button,
remembering to press the Input
1. Pressing and holding the Power On
1 or Power Off 0 buttons will
execute the Power On (All) or Power
Off (All) commands to either turn on
or turn off all devices whose product
codes have been programmed into the
remote. Note that if you are not using
any external devices, you may simply
power on the CVR700, and the CVPD50
screen will automatically be triggered
to turn on as well.
⁄ ¤
/
X
. Press the
Selector
3
when you are chang-
ing device functions. As the buttons on
the remote are pressed, the remote’s
display screen will show the steps in
the macro as they are programmed
(Figure 83).
2. Pressing and holding certain Input
Selectors 3 will cause the CVR700
to switch to the selected source input
device, and the device will begin
playing:
Figure 80
5. The next screen that appears (Fig. 81)
is where you select the device for the
first command that will be sent out as
⁄ ¤
Figure 83
part of the macro. Press the
/
8. For our example, we first want the
CVR700 Power On button pressed,
followed by the Cable Box On, fol-
lowed by the selection of the Logic 7
mode. To do that, press the buttons in
this order:
a. Press and hold the DVD Selector
3, and the CVR700 will switch
to the internal DVD/CD changer
source. If you do not enter the num-
ber for a disc you desire to play, the
last played disc will begin playing.
Navigation Button quntil the
name of the device appears on the
left side of the lower line in the LCD
display. For this example, the first
button we want to have the macro
“press” is the Power On button, so
the DVD/MAIN is selected. Press
the Set Button swhen the
• Power On
• Cable/Sat
1
3
b. Press and hold the CBL/SAT
Selector 3, and the CVR700 will
switch to the source device connected
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
to the cable/satellite inputs. If you
have programmed the cable or satel-
lite set-top box’s remote control
codes, the device will be turned on.
while the message shown in Figure
54 appears in the remote’s LCD
remain illuminated in red. Press the
⁄
Navigation Button
q
until
Information Display
the button when the red light under
the Set Button appears.
2
. Release
MACRO appears on the bottom line
of the LCD screen, as shown in Figure
s
78. Press the Set Button
s
to
c. Press and hold the VCR Selector
3, and the CVR700 will switch to
the source device connected to the
VCR inputs. If you have programmed
the VCR's remote control codes, the
device will be turned on, and the play
command will be transmitted to it.
enter the main macro menu branch.
2. The remote’s MAIN MENU message
(Figure 55), will appear in the LCD
3. At the next menu screen, press the
⁄ ¤
/
display and the Set Button
s
will
Navigation Button quntil
remain illuminated in red. Press the
the bottom line in the remote’s LCD
⁄
Navigation Button
q
so that
display shows READ A MACRO
MACRO appears on the bottom line
(Figure 86). Press the Set Button
to begin the process of reading a
macro.
s
of the LCD screen, as shown in Figure
d. Press and hold the DR (Digital
Recorder) Selector 3, and the
CVR700 will switch to the source
device connected to the DR inputs.
If you have programmed the DR's
remote control codes, the device
will be turned on, and the play com-
mand will be transmitted to it.
78. Press the Set Button
s
to
enter the main macro menu branch.
3. At the next menu screen (Figure 84),
⁄ ¤
/
press the
Navigation Button
Figure 86
ountil the bottom line in the
4. The next display screen (Figure 87)
is where you select the macro to be
⁄ ¤
remote’s LCD display reads ERASE A
MACRO. Press the Set Button
q
read. Press the
/
Navigation
to begin the process of erasing a
macro.
e. Press and hold the AUX Selector
3, and the CVR700 will switch to
the source device connected to the
AUX inputs. If you have programmed
the device's remote control codes,
the device will be turned on, and the
play command will be transmitted to it.
Button quntil the name of the
macro you wish to read appears. For
this example, we will read back the
Micro 1 macro created in a previous
section. When the name of the macro
to be read appears, press the Set
Figure 84
4. The next display screen (Figure 85) is
where you select which macro will be
⁄ ¤
Button
s.
f. Press and hold the Game/Cam
Selector 3, and the CVR700 will
switch to the source device connected
to the Game/Cam inputs. If you have
programmed the device's remote
control codes, the play command
will be transmitted to it. Note that
for video game consoles and cam-
corders, there are no power on or off
commands. Therefore, only the Play
command (or start/stop command for
camcorders) will be transmitted.
erased. Press the
/
Navigation
Button quntil the number of the
macro you wish to erase appears. For
this example we will erase the Power
On macro created in the previous sec-
tion. When the name of the macro to
be erased appears, press the Set
Figure 87
5. As soon as the Set button is pressed,
the first two steps in the macro will
be appear in the remote’s LCD
⁄ ¤
screen. You may then use the
/
Button
s.
Navigation Button qto step
up or down through the list of com-
mands stored as the macro. As you
read the display, you will see Input
Figure 85
Selector Buttons
3
appear in
5. The word ERASED will flash four
times in the bottom line of the
remote’s LCD display, and then the
display will return to its normal condi-
tion. When that happens, the macro
is erased and the remote is returned
to normal operation.
g. Press and hold the DVI Selector
3, and the CVR700 will switch to
the source device connected to the
DVI inputs. If you have programmed
the device's remote control codes,
the device will be turned on, and
the play command will be trans-
mitted to it.
brackets, (e.g., [M/DVD]). When
the step in the macro is a function,
navigation or any other button, it
will appear next to the bracketed
read-out of the underlying device
(e.g., [M/DVD] POWER ON).
6. When you are finished reviewing
Read a Macro
the macro’s contents, press the Set
To check the commands stored in the
remote’s memory for one of the macro
buttons, follow these steps:
3. The PIP Swap Button c is activated
while in screen mode by pressing and
holding that button until the video source
in the picture-in-picture frame swaps
position with the main video source.
Button
s
to return the remote to
normal operation.
NOTE: It is not possible to edit the steps
in a macro. If you notice an error, you will
need to erase the macro as described
above, and reprogram all of the steps.
1. Press and hold the Remote Menu
Button
b
for about three seconds
while the message shown in Figure
54 appears in the remote’s LCD
Erasing a Macro
Once a macro has been created and
stored in the remote’s memory, you have
the option of erasing it (except the pre-
programmed macros). You may do this
at any time by following these steps:
Information Display
the button when the red light under
the Set Button appears.
2. Release
s
2. The remote’s MAIN MENU message
(Figure 55), will appear in the LCD
1. Press and hold the Remote Menu
display and the Set Button
s
will
Button
b
for about 3 seconds
82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
device. In the example used, the display
to return the remote to default settings
will appear as shown in Figure 93.
Punch-Through Configuration
Punch-through is a capability of the
remote that allows the Volume controls,
Channel Up/Down buttons or Transport
keys (Play, Stop, Record, Pause, Fast
Forward and Reverse, and Skip Up/Down)
to link to a different device. For example,
if your TV, cable box or satellite receiver
is connected through the CVR700, you
will most likely want to use the CVR700’s
volume control commands even when the
remote has been set to issue all other
commands for the video device. “Punch-
through” enables you to easily program
the remote to do this.
Figure 89
4. The next display screen (Figure 90) is
where you select the device that will
receive the punch-through commands.
In our example, that is the Game/Cam
button, as that is where we want
the CVR700’s volume controls to be
⁄ ¤
<
Figure 93
Channel Control Punch-Through
Channel punch-through allows the
Channel Up/Down buttons to send com-
mands to a different device than the one
that has been selected for other com-
mands. For example, you may wish to use
a cable box or satellite receiver as the
source for a VCR, so you would want the
Channel Up/Down Controls g to
transmit commands to the cable box even
though the other button commands are
programmed to operate the VCR.
active. Press the
/
Navigation
Button quntil the name of the
base device appears and then press
the Set Button
s.
Volume Punch-Through
Figure 90
Follow these steps to enable the Volume
Up/Down and Mute controls from one
device to be used when the remote is
otherwise programmed for a different
device.
5. At the next display screen (Fig. 91),
you will select the device whose
Volume Up/Down and Mute com-
⁄ ¤
To program the remote for channel
punch-through, follow these steps. This
example will show how to program chan-
nel punch-through so that the commands
programmed for Channel Up/Down for
the Cable device will be transmitted
when the VCR device has been selected
as the current device.
mands will be used. Press the
/
Navigation Button quntil the
desired device’s name appears to
the right of the device in use. In
our example, that is the CVR700
(indicated by M/DVD). When the
desired combination of devices
NOTE FOR VOLUME PUNCH-
THROUGH: The remote’s default settings
are for the CVR700’s volume controls, to
be used when any input or device is
selected, with the exception of the
Game/Cam button. There is no need to
program the remote for volume punch-
through for the CVR700’s controls with
other sources, such as DVD. To have the
CVR700’s volume commands used when
the Game/Cam device is selected, follow
these steps:
appears, press the Set Button
s
.
1. Press and hold the Remote Menu
Button
b
for about 3 seconds
while the message shown in Figure
54 appears in the remote’s LCD
<
Figure 91
Information Display
the button when the red light under
the Set Button appears.
2. Release
6. When the Set button is pressed, the
display will change to show you that
the new combination of control com-
mands is being saved to the unit’s
memory, as shown in Figure 92. The
word SAVED will flash four times
and then the remote will return to
normal operation.
s
1. Press and hold the Remote Menu
2. The remote’s MAIN MENU message
Button
b
for about three seconds
(Figure 55), will appear in the LCD
while the message shown in Figure
54 appears in the remote’s LCD
display and the Set Button
s
will
remain illuminated in red. Press the
Information Display
the button when the red light under
the Set Button appears.
2. Release
⁄ ¤
/
Navigation Button quntil
PUNCH-THROUGH appears on the
bottom line of the LCD screen, as
shown in Figure 88. Press the Set
s
<
2. The remote’s MAIN MENU message
(Figure 55), will appear in the LCD
Button
s
to enter the main punch-
Figure 92
display and the Set Button
s
will
through menu branch.
7. Once the punch-through is pro-
grammed, the Volume Up/Down and
Mute buttons of the second device
named will be used when those con-
remain illuminated in red. Press the
3. At the next menu screen, press the
⁄ ¤
/
Navigation Button quntil
⁄ ¤
/
Navigation Button quntil
PUNCH-THROUGH appears on the
bottom line of the LCD screen, as
shown in Figure 88. Press the Set
CHANNEL appears on the bottom
line of the LCD screen, as shown in
trols
K
are pressed while the mas-
Figure 94. Press the Set Button
to begin programming the remote for
channel punch-through.
s
ter device is in use.
Button
s
to enter the main punch-
through menu branch.
Returning the Volume Control
Settings to Default Operation
If you wish to remove the Volume punch-
through so that the commands for Volume
and Mute are returned to the factory
default setting, follow the steps shown
above, except that in Steps 4 and 5,
select the same device for both the
Figure 88
Figure 94
3. At the next menu screen (Figure 89),
4. The next display screen (Figure 95) is
where you select the device that will
receive the punch-through commands.
In our example, that is the VCR button,
as that is where we want the cable
press the Set Button
s
to begin
programming the remote for Volume
punch-through.
DEVICE IN USE on the left side of the
bottom line and the PUNCH-THROUGH
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
box’s channel controls to be active.
M
and Skip Up/Down Jh
name appears to the right of the
⁄ ¤
Press the
/
Navigation Button
Transport Controls are set at the factory
to operate your DVD player, or the con-
trols of a specific device such as a VCR
or CD player when they are selected.
However, by using the Transport Punch-
Through feature you may program these
controls to transmit the commands for a
different device. For example, you may
wish to operate the transport of a VCR
connected to the VCR input as the
default, rather than the button for the
internal DVD player, as shown in the
following example.
device in use. In our example, that is
the VCR. When the desired combina-
tion of devices appears, press the Set
quntil the name of the base
device appears and then press the
Set Button
s
.
Button
s.
<
Figure 95
Figure 101
5. At the next display screen (Fig. 96),
you will select the device whose
Channel Up/Down commands will be
⁄ ¤
6. When the Set button is pressed, the
display will change to show you that
the new combination of control com-
mands is being saved to the unit’s
memory, as shown in Figure 102. The
word SAVED will flash four times
and then the remote will return to
normal operation.
used. Press the
/
Navigation
Button quntil the desired device
name appears to the right of the
device in use. In our example, that is
the cable box. When the desired com-
bination of devices appears, press the
1. Press and hold the Remote Menu
Button
while the message shown in Figure
54 appears in the remote’s LCD
Information Display
the button when the red light under
the Set Button appears.
b
for about three seconds
<
Set Button
s.
2. Release
Figure 102
<
s
7. Once the punch-through is pro-
grammed, the transport buttons of
the second device named will be
used when those buttons are pressed
while the master device is in use.
Figure 96
2. The remote’s MAIN MENU message
(Figure 55) will appear in the LCD dis-
6. When the Set button is pressed, the
display will change to show you that
the new combination of control com-
mands is being saved to the unit’s
memory, as shown in Figure 97. The
word SAVED will flash four times
and then the remote will return to
normal operation.
play and the Set Button
s
will
remain illuminated in red. Press the
⁄ ¤
/
Navigation Button quntil
Returning the Transport Control
Settings to Default Operation
PUNCH-THROUGH appears on the
bottom line of the LCD screen, as
shown in Figure 88. Press the Set
If you wish to remove the Transport
Punch-Through so that the transport com-
mands are returned to the factory default
setting, follow the steps shown above,
except that in Steps 4 and 5, select the
same device for both the DEVICE IN
USE on the left side of the bottom line
and the PUNCH-THROUGH device. In
the example used, the display to return
the remote to default settings will appear
as shown in Figure 103.
Button
s
to enter the main punch-
through menu branch.
<
3. At the next menu screen, press the
⁄ ¤
/
Navigation Button quntil
Figure 97
TRANSPORT appears on the bottom
7. Once the punch-through is pro-
grammed, the Channel Up/Down
Buttons of the second device named
line of the LCD screen, as shown in
Figure 99. Press the Set Button
s
to begin programming the remote for
will be used when those controls
g
transport punch-through.
are pressed while the master device
is in use.
<
Returning the Channel Control
Settings to Default Operation
Figure 99
Figure 103
4. The next display screen (Figure 100)
is where you select the device that
will receive the punch-through com-
mands. In our example, that is the
System button, as that is where we
want the VCR’s transport controls to
⁄ ¤
If you wish to remove the Channel Punch-
Through so that the commands for
EzSet Configuration
JBL’s patented EzSet feature makes it easier
than ever to calibrate the output levels on
your new home theater system for maxi-
mum playback accuracy. In addition to
automatically setting the levels, the
remote’s LCD display allows the unit to
be used as a direct readout SPL meter.
Complete instructions for using the EzSet
features of the remote are found on page
51 of this owner’s manual.
Channel Up/Down are returned to the
factory default setting, follow the steps
shown above, except that in Steps 4 and
5, select the same device for both the
DEVICE IN USE on the left side of the
bottom line and the PUNCH-THROUGH
device. In the example used, the display
to return the remote to default settings
will appear as shown in Figure 98.
be active. Press the
/
Navigation
Button quntil the name of the
base device appears, and then press
the Set Button
s.
In most cases, you will find it easier to
access the EzSet capabilities directly by
pressing the SPL Select Button 9
and following the menu prompts as
detailed on page 51. However, there is
one function of the remote that is avail-
Figure 100
<
Figure 98
5. At the next display screen (Figure
101), you will select the device
whose transport commands will be
⁄ ¤
Transport Control Punch-Through
The Play
Reverse Lf, Pause
e
, Stop
M
, Fast Forward/
, Record
used. Press the
/
Navigation
M
Button quntil the desired device
84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
able only through the remote’s menu sys-
tem being described in this section.
menu system and return to normal opera-
tion or press the Set Button again
name of the base device appears and
s
then press the Set Button
s.
to immediately use the EzSet feature
to calibrate the system as shown
on page 51.
To avoid having the calibration settings
created with EzSet changed accidentally,
the remote allows you to disable the SPL
Select Button 9 on the remote. To
de-activate the button, follow these
steps:
Figure 108
Renaming
5. At the next menu screen, you will see
the device name on the bottom line of
the display with a blinking cursor box
to the right of the device name. Press
While the names given to the buttons
and inputs on the remote represent rec-
ognizable categories of audio/video prod-
ucts, system operation may be easier if
the displays shown in the remote’s LCD
screen are customized to reflect the spe-
cific characteristics of a playback source’s
brand name or the new function given to
a specific button when one remote’s con-
trols are programmed into the remote.
The CVR700R2 remote allows you to
change the name of either a master
device or any button on the remote
using the following steps.
1. Press and hold the Remote Menu
Button
b
for about 3 seconds
‹
the Navigation Button qto
while the message shown in Figure
54 appears in the remote’s LCD
return the blinking cursor to the far
left side of the display line. You may
then retitle the device name as
shown in the next step.
Information Display
the button when the red light under
the Set Button appears.
2. Release
s
6. To enter the new name, press the
Alpha Numeric Keys
2. The remote’s MAIN MENU message
l. The let-
(Figure 55), will appear in the LCD dis-
ters above the numbered buttons
indicate which letter or symbol will
appear when the button is pressed
during the renaming process. The first
press of the button will enter the first
letter shown, subsequent presses of
the same button will change the dis-
play to the other letters above that
numbered key. For example, since the
first letter we need to rename the
input to HDTV Tuner is an “H,” you
would locate the “H” above the “4”
button, and press the button twice.
The first press shows a “G,” the
second press changes it to an “H.”
Consult the table at the end of this
section to see which characters
pressing a particular button
play and the Set Button
s
will
remain illuminated in red. Press the
⁄ ¤
/
Navigation Button quntil
SET SPKR LEVELS appears on the
bottom line of the LCD screen, as
shown in Figure 104. Press the Set
Renaming a Device
To rename a specific device/input source
button, follow these steps. For this exam-
ple, we will show you how to rename the
Device/Input Selector normally shown as
“TV” to “HDTV TUNER.”
Button
s
to enter the main EzSet
menu branch.
1. Press and hold the Remote Menu
Button
b
for about 3 seconds
Figure 104
while the message shown in Figure
54 appears in the remote’s LCD
3. At the next menu screen (Figure 105)
⁄ ¤
/
press the
Navigation Buttons
Information Display
the button when the red light under
the Set Button appears.
2. Release
qonce so that EZSET DISABLE
appears in the lower line of the LCD
display.
s
2. The remote’s MAIN MENU message
generates.
(Figure 55), will appear in the LCD dis-
play and the Set Button
s
will
7. After you enter the first letter of the
new device name, there are three
options for entering the next
character:
Figure 105
remain illuminated in red. Press the
⁄ ¤
/
Navigation Button quntil
4. Within 5 seconds, press the Set
RENAME appears on the bottom
line of the LCD screen, as shown in
Figure 106.
Button
Select Button 9. Once the Set
Button is pressed, the word
s
to disable the SPL
a. To enter a letter that requires a dif-
ferent numeric key to be pressed,
simply press that button. The cur-
sor will automatically move to the
next position and the first letter
accessed by the new button will
appear. Following our example, the
next letter needed is a “D,” so you
would press the “3” button once.
s
EXITING will flash four times in
the lower line of the LCD display
and then it will return to normal
operation.
Figure 106
3. Press the Set Button sand
RENAME DEVICE will appear on
the bottom line of the LCD screen, as
shown in Figure 107. Press the Set
Once these steps are completed, when
the SPL Select Button 9 is pressed,
the remote will show EZSET DISABLE
and it will not be activated.
b. To enter a letter that uses the
same numeric key, you must first
Button
q
to begin renaming a
To restore the EzSet feature to normal
operation, repeat the procedure outlined
above, except that in Step 3 you should
⁄ ¤
device.
›
press the Navigation Button
q
to move the blinking cursor
block to the next position. Then
press the Numeric Key as
press the
/
Navigation Button q
Figure 107
l
so that EZSET ENABLE appears in the
lower line of the LCD display. When that
display appears, press the Set Button
required to enter the desired letter.
4. The next display screen (Figure 108)
is where you select the device that
will be renamed. In our example, that
⁄ ¤
›
c. To enter a blank space, press the
Navigation Button
The first press will move the cursor
to the right, and the second press
s
and the EzSet feature will be reacti-
q
twice.
vated. You may then press the Remote
Menu Button to exit the remote’s
is the TV button. Press the
/
b
Navigation Button quntil the
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
will move the cursor one more
space to the right, leaving a blank
space between the last letter and
the next one.
To rename a specific button on the
remote, follow these steps. For instance,
this example will show you how to pro-
gram the remote so that FULL SCREEN
appears in the remote’s LCD display when
you press the Tone Button H while in
CABLE mode to match the original cable
remote. Of course, remember that you
will first have to learn the codes for that
function into the Exit button, following
the instructions shown on page 78.
Figure 111
6. Depending on whether or not the but-
ton pressed already has a named
function within the device selected,
one of two things will happen.
8. Repeat Step 7 as needed to enter all
the needed letters, numbers, charac-
ters and spaces.
9. When the text entry is complete,
a. If the button to be renamed already
has a pre-programmed, or previ-
ously renamed title in the remote’s
memory, you will see that name on
the top line of the LCD display, and
a blinking block cursor will appear
on the far left side of the bottom
line of the display, as shown in
Figure 112.
press the Set Button
s. The
LCD display will blink DEVICE
RENAMED three times and then
return to normal operation.
1. Press and hold the Remote Menu
Button
b
for about 3 seconds
Once a device is renamed you will see
the new name on the top line of the
remote’s LCD display whenever the
while the message shown in Figure
54 appears in the remote’s LCD
Information Display
the button when the red light under
the Set Button appears.
2. Release
Input//Device Selector
3
is pressed,
or when any other command/function
button on the remote is pressed after the
main Device Selector is pressed. Note
that renaming a device in the remote will
not change the name of the input used
by the on-screen menu system of the
CVR700.
b. If the button to be renamed does
not have a function in the device
selected, the top line of the LCD
screen will be blank, and a blinking
block cursor will appear on the far
left side of the bottom line of the
display.
s
2. The remote’s MAIN MENU message
(Figure 55), will appear in the LCD dis-
play and the Set Button
s
will
remain illuminated in red. Press the
⁄ ¤
/
Navigation Button quntil
RENAME appears on the bottom line
of the LCD screen, as shown in
Figure 106.
NOTES ON RENAMING DEVICES:
• To move the cursor to the right or left
of the display during the renaming
‹ ›
Figure 112
3. At the next menu screen, press the
process, press the
/
Navigation
⁄ ¤
/
Navigation Button quntil
7. To enter the new name for the button,
press the Alphanumeric Keys
The letters above the numbered but-
tons indicate which letters or symbols
will appear when the button is
Buttons
q
as required.
RENAME BUTTON appears on the
bottom line of the LCD screen, as
shown in Figure 109. Press the Set
l.
• The table below shows the letters,
numbers and characters that may be
accessed by pressing the Numeric
Keys:
Button
s
to continue.
pressed during the renaming process.
The first press of the button will enter
the first character shown, subsequent
presses of the same button will
change the display to the other let-
ters above that numbered key. For
example, since the first letter we
need to rename the Exit button to Full
screen is an “F,” you would locate the
“F” above the “9” button, and press
the button four times. The first press
shows a “D,” and subsequent presses
step through the other letters avail-
able until the “F” appears. Consult
the table at left to see which
Key Characters Key Characters
1
2
3
4
5
[,],/,1
A,B,C,2
D,E,F,3
G,H,I,4
J,K,L,5
6
7
8
9
0
M,N,O,6
P,Q,R,S,7
T,U,V,8
W,X,Y,Z,9
-,.,#,0
Figure 109
4. The next display screen (Figure 110)
is where you select the device within
which the button to be renamed
⁄ ¤
exists. Press the
/
Navigation
There is a limit of nine characters (includ-
ing spaces) for any new device or button
name.
Buttons Quntil the name of the
base device appears. In our example,
since we want to rename a button
within the DVD device memory,
DVD/MAIN should appear in the
lower line of the LCD. When the
desired device name appears, press
• Renaming a device changes the name
of the device only, not any of the indi-
vidual key functions within that device
memory. To change the name of an
individual device, follow the instruc-
tions in the next section.
the Set Button
S.
characters are available by pressing
a particular button.
Renaming Individual Buttons
8. After you enter the first letter of
the new device name, there are
three options for entering the next
character:
Thanks to the programming flexibility of
the CVR700R2 remote, an individual but-
ton on the remote may be assigned a fea-
ture or function that is different from the
name that appears as the factory default
when the button is pressed. With the
Rename Button function, it is possible to
rename almost any button on the remote
so that when the button is pressed you
will see a more descriptive or appropriate
name displayed.
Figure 110
5. At the next menu screen you will
select the first button within the
device to be renamed, as instructed
in the display shown in Figure 111.
Select the button (in this case, the
Exit/Cancel Button H) by simply
pressing it on the remote.
a. To enter a letter that requires a dif-
ferent numeric key to be pressed,
simply press that button. The cur-
sor will automatically move to the
next position and the first letter
accessed by the new button will
appear. Following our example, the
86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
next letter needed is a “U,” so you
would press the “8” button twice.
with which it is used. There is a limit
of nine characters (including spaces)
for any new device or button name.
4. When the remote has been totally
reset and returned to the factory
default condition, a REMOTE RESET
COMPLETE message will appear
(Figure 116) briefly, and then the
remote will return to normal
operation.
b. To enter a letter that uses the
same numeric key, you must first
Resetting the Remote
›
press the Navigation Button
Depending on the way in which the
remote has been programmed, there may
be a situation where you wish to totally
erase all changes that have been made
to the remote and return it to the factory
defaults. You may do that by following
the steps shown below, but remember
that once the remote is reset, ALL
changes that have been made, including
programming for use with other devices,
learned buttons, macros, punch-through
settings and button names, will be
q
to move the blinking cursor
block to the next position. Then
press the Alphanumeric Key
as required to enter the desired
letter. This is the way you would
enter the second “L” in the word
“FULL”.
l
Figure 116
If the remote locks up for some reason
and you wish to reset it without losing
any programming or removing and replac-
ing the batteries, you may perform a soft
reset by removing the cover from the bat-
tery compartment and gently pressing the
small black rectangular button labeled
“RESET”. This should return the remote to
normal operation.
›
c. To enter a blank space, press the
Navigation Button
q
twice.
The first press will move the cursor
to the right, and the second press
will move the cursor one more
space to the right, leaving a blank
space between the last letter and
the next one.
erased and any settings you had previ-
ously made will have to be reentered.
To erase all settings and reset the remote
to the original factory default settings
and displays, follow these steps:
Additional Notes on Configuring and
Operating the Remote
9. Repeat Steps 7 and 8 as needed to
complete entering the needed letters,
numbers, characters and spaces.
1. Press and hold the Remote Menu
• In normal operation, the last selected
device will appear in the upper line of
the LCD Information Display 2.
After one minute with no activity, the
remote will go into standby mode and
the display will go blank to conserve
power. Simply press any button to
return the remote to normal operation.
Button
b
for about three seconds
10. When the text entry is complete,
while the message shown in Figure
54 appears in the remote’s LCD
press the Set Button
s. The new
name will be entered into the
remote’s memory, replacing the
default name.
Information Display
the button when the red light under
the Set Button appears.
2. Release
s
11. At this point, you have two options:
2. The remote’s MAIN MENU message
(Figure 55), will appear in the LCD dis-
a. The screen shown in Figure 113
will appear, prompting you to con-
tinue renaming. Press the Set
•
When the remote is being programmed,
it will automatically time-out if no button
is pressed within a 30-second period.
The message shown in Fig. 117 will
appear briefly, and the remote will then
exit the feature being programmed and
any data entered will be lost.
play and the Set Button
s
will
remain illuminated in red. Press the
⁄ ¤
/
Navigation Button quntil
Button
s
to select CONTINUE.
USER RESET appears on the bot-
tom line of the LCD screen, as shown
in Figure 114.
Figure 113
The remote will return to the PRESS
A BUTTON menu option (Fig. 111)
as shown in Step 6. Repeat the in-
structions in Steps 6 though 11 to
rename the next button.
Figure 114
Figure 117
3. Press the Set Button
s
to reset
• The programming or configuration
process may also be stopped at any
time by pressing the Remote Menu
the remote. Note that once the Set
button is pressed, the process may
not be stopped. A RESETTING...
message will appear in the upper line
of the remote’s LCD screen, as shown
in Figure 115, while the remote’s
memory is being cleared. It may take
a few minutes for the reset process
to take place, and the length of time
will vary depending on how much
customization and programming has
taken place. Please be patient; as
long as the message appears in the
display the remote is functioning
properly.
b. If you have no additional buttons to
Button
b. The message shown
⁄
rename, press the Navigation
in Figure 117 will appear, the data
entered in the current process will be
lost and the remote will return to nor-
mal operation. Any process that was
underway when the button will be
pressed must be restarted.
Button
o
until the menu screen
displays EXIT on the bottom line
of the display. Press the Set
Button
s
to return the remote
to normal operation.
NOTES ON RENAMING KEYS:
• Renaming a button does not change its
function. You may change the function
of an individual button by “learning” a
new code into the remote. See page 78
for more information.
• In most situations, you may press the
Exit/Cancel Button H to simply
exit the current function and return to
the previous menu screen. The Cancel
function is not always available, in
which case you may need to exit
the remote's menu system altogether
by pressing the Remote Menu
Button B.
• When a button is renamed, it will only
apply to the specific device selected in
Step 4. The same button may be renamed
as needed for each individual device
Figure 115
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Extensive use of the programming,
learning and configuration functions of
the remote may consume significantly
more battery power than normal remote
operation. While the batteries should
last for four to six months in normal
operation, you may find that they need
to be changed sooner after the remote
is programmed for the first time.
the internal DVD/CD changer of the
CVR700 (DVD Selector 3) or to con-
trol additional products. When you press
any one of the selectors, its name will
appear on the upper line of the LCD
Information Display 2 to indicate
that you have changed the device being
controlled.
1
2
3
When operating a device other than the
CVR700 or CVPD50, the controls may not
correspond exactly to the function printed
on the remote or button. Some com-
mands, such as the volume control, are
the same as they are with the CVR700.
Other buttons will change their function
so that they correspond to a secondary
label on the remote. For example, the
Slow Play controls also function as the
Channel Up and Channel Down controls
when operating most TV sets, VCRs or
cable boxes. The Channel Up/Down
indication is printed directly on the
remote. For many standard CD players,
cassette decks, VCRs and DVD functions,
the standard function icons are printed
on top of the buttons. For some products,
however, the function of a particular but-
ton does not follow the command printed
on the remote. Even though the name of
the function will appear on the lower line
of the LCD Information Display 2
when the button is pressed, in order to
conveniently see which function a button
controls before you press it, consult the
Function List tables on pages 89–91.
• When the batteries approach a level
below which the remote will not func-
tion, the remote’s LCD screen will dis-
play a LOW BATTERY warning as
shown in Figure 118. We strongly rec-
ommend replacing the batteries as
soon as this message appears to avoid
the loss of programming and configura-
tion settings. These settings are not
lost when the batteries are changed
quickly.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
17
14
18
22
26
30
34
15
19
16
20
24
28
32
36
21
25
29
33
37
23
27
31
35
Figure 118
• The remote has a built-in backlight that
may be activated by pressing the Light
Button
W. This button is made from
a special “glow” material so that it is
easier to find in dark rooms. This glow
feature does not consume any electric-
ity, but the glow will fade when the
remote is kept in a dark location for an
extended period of time. The “glow”
feature may be restored by placing the
remote in normal room light for a few
hours.
38
40
39
41
42
43
45
48
44
47
46
49
To use those tables, first check the type
of device being controlled (e.g., TV, VCR).
Next, look at the remote control diagram
in Figure 119. Note that each button has
a number on it. To find out what function
a particular button has for a specific
device, find the button number on the
Function List and then look in the column
for the device you are controlling. For
example, button number 37 is the Zoom
button for the CVR700’s internal DVD
changer, but it is the Memory button for
the tuner; the +100 button for many TVs,
VCRs, HDTV tuners and PVRs, and the
Enter button for many video game con-
soles and D-VHS players.
• The remote’s backlight will remain lit
for approximately 5 seconds after the
Light Button
W
is pressed, and it
will stay lit for another 5 seconds if
any key is pressed while the backlight
is on. You may keep the backlight lit by
holding the Light button, but extensive
use of the backlight will reduce battery
life.
50
58
51
59
52
56
53
54
• The LCD display will remain on for 10
seconds after a key is pressed and
then turn off to conserve battery life.
55
57
• When any button is held for more than
30 seconds, the LCD will turn off and
the remote will stop transmitting the
codes to conserve battery life.
60
61
62
64
65
69
63
NOTE: The numbers used to describe the
button functions in Figure 119 for the pur-
poses of describing how a button oper-
ates are a different set of numbers than
those used in the rest of this manual to
describe the button functions for the
main remote.
Programmed Device Functions
66
67
68
Once the CVR700R2 remote has been
programmed for the codes of other
devices, press the appropriate Input
Selector 345 to switch the
remote to control the audio section of the
CVR700 (System Selector 5), the
CVPD50 screen (Screen Selector 4),
70
74
71
75
72
76
73
77
Figure 119
88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PROGRAMMING THE CVR700R1 REMOTE
In addition to its powerful CVR700R2
remote control, the JBL Cinema Vision
system also includes a smaller CVR700R1
remote intended for everyday use. This
remote features many of the same func-
tions as the main remote, including the
capability of controlling most popular
brands of audio and video equipment,
such as CD players, cable boxes, digital
recording devices, VCRs, satellite
Direct Code Entry
ume, channel and transport controls
work as they should. If functions do
not work properly, you may need to
use a different remote code.
This method is the easiest way to
program your remote to work with
different products.
1. Use the tables in the following pages
to determine the three-digit code or
codes that match both the product
type (e.g., VCR, TV) and the specific
brand name. If there is more than one
number for a brand, make note of the
different choices.
7. If a code cannot be entered to turn
the unit off, if the code for your prod-
uct does not appear in the tables in
this manual, or if not all functions
operate properly, try programming
the remote with the Auto Search
Method.
receivers and HDTV set-top tuners, but in
a more compact design.
2. Turn on the unit you wish to program
into the secondary remote.
Auto Search Method
The CVR700R1 remote control is capable
of operating up to nine devices, including
the CVR700. In order to segregate the
control commands for each device, the
remote’s logic contains a separate “page”
of commands for each device called up
when that device's selector has been
pressed. For example, in order to access
the commands that control the CVPD50
screen, such as Letterbox or PIP, you must
If the unit you wish to include in the
remote is not listed in the code tables in
this manual or if the code does not seem
to operate properly, you may wish to pro-
gram the correct code using the Auto
Search method that follows:
3. Press and hold both the Input
Selector
you wish to control (e.g., VCR, TV) and
the Program Button at the
for the product
2
10
21
same time. When the light under the
Input Selector stays lit,
release the buttons. It is important
that you begin the next step within
20 seconds.
1. Turn on the unit that you wish to
include in the remote.
2
10
2. Press the Input Selector
the type of product to be entered and
the Program Button at the
for
2
10
first press the Screen Selector
,
34
4. Point the remote toward the unit to be
programmed, and enter the first three-
digit code using the Numeric Keys
and an orange light underneath that but-
ton will light. When you press another
button on the remote that is used to con-
trol the screen, the light underneath the
21
same time. Hold both buttons until the
red light under the Input Selector
stays lit. The next step must
. If the unit turns off, the correct
14
2
10
code has been entered. Press the
take place while the light is on, and it
must begin within 20 seconds after
the light appears.
Screen Selector
firm the current mode.
will blink to con-
34
Input Selector
again, and
2
10
note that the red light will flash three
times before going dark to confirm the
entry. If the Input Selector
Programming Product Codes
3. Point the remote toward the unit to be
The remote is factory-programmed for all
CVR700 functions, as well as those of JBL
DVD players. In addition, by following one
of the methods below, you may program
the remote to operate a wide range of
devices from other manufacturers.
2
10
⁄
programmed, and press either the or
flashes nine times instead of three
times, it means that the code was not
accepted. Check the code table to ver-
ify the code, and reenter it. If you
wish to exit the program mode, press
¤
Button
. Each press will send
4
out a series of codes from the remote’s
built-in database. When the unit being
programmed turns off, release the
⁄/¤
Button
, as that is your indi-
4
The Input Selectors
each may
and hold any Input Selector
2
10
2
cation that the correct code is in use.
be programmed with one of several device
types, as listed in the table below. Unlike
the main remote control, the device types
on the secondary remote control may not
be reassigned. It is important to program
your external devices into the correct cor-
responding source buttons so that the
desired remote control commands will be
available for use with your device.
for 2 seconds.
10
4. Press the Input Selector
;
2
10
NOTE: Since video game consoles and
camcorders do not have Power Off codes,
look for your game device to execute the
“Stop” function, and your camcorder to
execute the “Zoom In” function.
the light under it will flash three
times before going dark to confirm
the entry.
5. Try all of the functions on the remote
to make certain that the product oper-
ates. Keep in mind that many manu-
facturers use a number of different
combinations of codes, and it is a
good idea to make certain that not
only the power control works, but also
the volume, channel and transport
controls, as appropriate. If all func-
tions do not work properly, you may
need to Auto-Search for a different
code, or enter a code via the Direct
Code Entry method.
5. If the device to be programmed in
does NOT turn off, continue to enter
three-digit codes until the equipment
turns off. At this point, the correct
code has been entered. Press the
Source Device Types
Button
AUX
TV, HDTV, VCR, DVD, CD,
Cable, Satellite
VCR
Input Selector
note that the light under the Input
Selector will flash three
again and
2
10
VCR
2
10
CBL/SAT Cable, Satellite, HDTV
Game/ Game, Camcorder
Cam
times before going dark to confirm
the entry.
6. Try all of the functions on the remote
to make certain that the product oper-
ates properly. Keep in mind that many
manufacturers use a number of differ-
ent combinations of codes, so it is a
good idea to make certain that not
only the power control, but the vol-
DR
DVD-R, CDR, DVHS, TIVO, PVD
(DVR/PVR – Personal Video
Recorder)
DVI/
DVI/DVD, DVI/CBL, DVI/SAT,
COMP HDTV
The DVD, Tuner, Screen and System selec-
tors may not be reprogrammed.
92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For future reference, enter the setup
codes for the equipment in your system
here:
secondary remote, press the Input
Selector you pressed in
Step 2. It will blink three times and go
power on the CVR700, and the CVPD50
screen will automatically be triggered
to turn on as well.
2
10
dark, exiting learning mode.
Source
Button
Device
Type
Product
Code
2. Pressing and holding certain Input
8. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for any addi-
tional remotes you wish to “teach”
into the secondary remote.
Selectors
will cause the
10
2
CVR700 to switch to the selected
source input device, and the device
will begin playing.
AUX
VCR
Note on Learning Function: Remote
control signals can vary from one controller
to the next, due to different standard for-
mats adopted by each manufacturer. For
example, some manufacturers repeat the
code sequence in the initial transmission,
and others insert a special code to identify
the brand or model. Due to the variety of
formats, occasionally an error may occur
in the learning process, even though the
CVR700R1 remote has indicated that the
code was learned correctly. Therefore, it is
recommended that you test the newly
learned codes with the source component.
If the code was not learned correctly, try
relearning it. Usually, after several tries,
the code can be learned correctly.
CBL/SAT
GAME/CAM
DR
a. Press and hold the DVD Selector
, and the CVR700 will switch to
2
the internal DVD/CD changer source.
If you do not enter the number for a
disc you desire to play, the last
played disc will begin playing.
DVI/COMP
Learning Codes
In addition to using codes from the
b. Press and hold the CBL/SAT
Selector
, and the CVR700 will
2
switch to the source device connected
to the cable/satellite inputs. If you
have programmed the cable or satel-
lite set-top box’s remote control
remote’s internal code library, the remote
is able to “learn”codes from remotes that
may not be in the code library. Also, you
may use this function to “learn over” the
codes from a preprogrammed device to
add functions not included in the prepro-
grammed codes. To learn or transfer
codes from an original remote to the sec-
ondary remote, follow these steps:
codes, the device will be turned on.
c. Press and hold the VCR Selector
and the CVR700 will switch to
2
the source device connected to the
VCR inputs. If you have programmed
the VCR’s remote control codes, the
device will be turned on, and the
play command will be transmitted
to it.
Erasing Learned Codes
The remote allows you to remove or erase
the code set for all the codes that have
been programmed into specific device
buttons.
1. Place the front of the original remote
with the code being sent so that it is
facing the IR Transmitter
secondary remote “head to head.” The
remotes should be between 1 and 3
inches apart.
on the
40
To erase all codes within a single device,
follow these steps:
d. Press and hold the DR (Digital
Recorder) Selector
, and the
10
1. Press and hold both the Input Selector
CVR700 will switch to the source
device connected to the DR inputs.
If you have programmed the DR’s
remote control codes, the device will
be turned on, and the play command
will be transmitted to it.
2. Select the button on the remote that
you wish to use as the device selector
for the codes about to be entered.
This may be any of the Input
within which the individual
2
10
button to be erased has been pro-
grammed and the Learn Button
.
19
Selectors
3. Press the chosen Input Selector
and the Learn Button
.
2. When the LED under the Input
Selector turns on, release the buttons.
2
10
2
e. Press and hold the AUX Selector
at the
19
3. Press and release the Input Selector
10
, and the CVR700 will switch to
2
same time. Hold these buttons until
the light under the device selector but-
ton turns on. Release the buttons.
for 3 seconds.
2
10
the source device connected to the
AUX inputs. If you have programmed
the device’s remote control codes,
the device will be turned on, and the
play command will be transmitted
to it.
4. The light under the Input Selector
will blink three times and go dark,
2
10
4. Press the button on the secondary
remote that you wish to program.
and all of the learned codes for that
device will have been erased.
5. Within 5 seconds, press and hold the
button on the original remote that you
wish to “teach” into the secondary
remote. When the light under the
Macros
Several macro-type commands have been
preprogrammed into the remote, and they
may be activated by pressing and holding
certain other buttons as described below.
(The secondary remote does not allow you
to program new macro functions.)
f. Press and hold the Game/Cam
Selector
, and the CVR700 will
10
switch to the source device connected
to the Game/Cam inputs. If you have
programmed the device's remote
control codes, the play command
will be transmitted to it. Note that
for video game consoles and cam-
corders, there are no power on or
off commands. Therefore, only the
Play command (or start/stop com-
mand for camcorders) will be
transmitted.
Input Selector
blinks.
2
10
NOTE: If the Input Selector
2
10
flashes nine times during Step 5, the
programming was not successful.
Repeat the steps to see whether the
code will “take.”
1. Pressing and holding the Power On
or Power Off
buttons will
1
39
execute the Power On (All) or Power
Off (All) commands to either turn on
or turn off all devices whose product
codes have been programmed into the
remote. Note that if you are not using
any external devices, you may simply
6. Repeat Steps 4 through 6 for each
button on the source remote that you
wish to transfer to the remote.
7. Once all codes have been transferred
from the original source remote to the
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
g. Press and hold the DVI/Comp
Selector , and the CVR700 will
Notes on Using the Secondary
Remote With Other Devices
Programmed Device Functions
10
Once the secondary remote has been pro-
grammed for the codes of other devices,
press the appropriate Input Selector
to switch the remote to control
switch to the source device connected
to the DVI inputs. If you have pro-
grammed the device’s remote control
codes, the device will be turned on,
and the play command will be trans-
mitted to it.
• Manufacturers may use different code
sets for the same product category. For
that reason, it is important that you
check to see whether the code set you
have entered operates as many controls
as possible. If it appears that only a
few functions operate, check to see
whether another code set will work
with more buttons.
10
2
the audio section of the CVR700 (System
Selector ), the CVPD50 screen
33
(Screen Selector 34 ), the internal
DVD/CD changer of the CVR700 (DVD
3. The Screen Saver Button
is
16
activated while in screen mode by
pressing and holding that button until
the screen saver image appears on the
CVPD50 screen.
Selector
) or to control additional
2
products. When you press any one of the
selectors, it will briefly flash in red to indi-
cate that you have changed the device
being controlled.
• When a button is pressed on the sec-
ondary remote, the red light under the
4. The PIP Swap Button
is activ-
Input Selector
for the prod-
10
17
2
ated while in screen mode by pressing
and holding that button until the video
source in the picture-in-picture frame
swaps position with the main video
source.
uct being operated should flash briefly.
If the Device Control Selector flashes
for some but not all buttons for a par-
ticular product, it does NOT indicate a
problem with the remote but rather
that no function is programmed for the
button being pushed.
When operating a device other than the
CVR700, the controls may not correspond
exactly to the function printed on the
remote or button. Some commands, such
as the volume control, are the same as
they are with the CVR700. Other buttons
will change their function so that they
correspond to a secondary label on the
remote. For example, the Numeric Keys
Volume Punch-Through
The secondary remote may be pro-
grammed to operate the Volume Control
are used to access various functions
14
1
2
of the CVR700’s audio section, such as
selecting surround modes, or setting the
sleep timer. However, in DVD mode these
buttons are used as numbers to access
various items such as track numbers and
time search.
and Mute
functions of the
11
12
5
9
4
6
3
7
CVR700 in conjunction with any of the
devices controlled by the remote. For
example, since the CVR700 will likely be
used as the sound system for TV viewing,
you may wish to have the CVR700’s vol-
ume activated, although the remote is set
to run the TV. The CVR700 or TV volume
control may be associated with any of the
remote’s devices. To program the remote
for Volume Punch-Through, follow these
steps:
10
8
12
13
19
11
17
For some products, however, the function
of a particular button does not follow the
command printed on the remote. In order
to see which function a button controls,
consult the Function List tables on pages
96–97. To use those tables, first check
the type of device being controlled (e.g.,
TV, VCR). Next, look at the remote control
diagram in Figure 120. Note that each
button has a number on it.
15
14
16
18
21
20
22
23
26
1. Press the Input Selector
for
10
2
25
24
the unit you wish to have associated
with the volume control and the
30
34
27
31
28 29
Volume Button
at the same time
12
To find out what function a particular but-
until the red light appears under the
32
36
40
44
33
37
41
45
ton has for a specific device, find the but-
ton number on the Function List and then
look in the column for the device you are
controlling. For example, button number
45 is the Night Mode button for the
CVR700’s audio sectioin, but it is the
“Number 9” button for most other prod-
ucts. Button number 31 is the Volume
Down button for the CVR700 and most
products, the Scan Down button for video
games and the Zoom Out button for cam-
corders.
Input Selector
.
2
10
35
39
43
47
51
55
38
42
46
50
54
58
2. Press either the System Selector
or the Input Selector
,
33
10
2
depending on which system’s volume
control you wish to have active for
the punch-through mode. The Input
Selector
you pressed in
2
10
48 49
52 53
Step 1 will blink three times and then
go out to confirm the data entry.
Example: To have the CVR700’s vol-
ume control activated even though
the remote is set to control the TV,
first press the Aux Input Selector
56
57
59
61
NOTE: The numbers used to describe
the button functions in Figure 120 for the
purposes of describing how a button
operates are a different set of numbers
than those used in the rest of this manual
to describe the button functions for the
CVR700.
60
eand the Volume Up Button
12
at the same time. Next, press the
System Selector
.
33
NOTE: Should you wish to return the
remote to the original configuration after
Figure 120
94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
programming a Volume Punch-Through,
you will need to repeat the steps shown
above. However, press the same Input
Selector in Steps 1 and 2.
Transport Control Punch-
Through
Resetting the Remote Memory
As you add components to your home
theater system, occasionally you may wish
to totally reprogram the remote control
without the confusion of any commands,
macros or ”Punch-Through“ programming
that you may have done. To do this, it is
possible to reset the secondary remote to
the original factory defaults and command
codes by following these steps. However,
once the remote is reset, all commands or
codes that you have entered will be
The secondary remote may be pro-
grammed to operate so that the Transport
Control Functions
Channel Control Punch-
Through
The secondary remote may be pro-
21 23
25 27 28
(Play, Stop, Fast Forward, Rewind,
30
Pause, Skip Up/Down and Record) for a
VCR, DVD or CD will operate in conjunc-
tion with one of the other devices con-
trolled by the remote. For example, while
using and controlling the TV, you may wish
to start or stop your VCR or DVD without
having to change the device selected by
the CVR700 or the remote. To program the
remote for Transport Control Punch-
Through, follow these steps:
grammed to operate so that the channel
control function for either the TV, cable or
satellite receiver used in your system may
be used in conjunction with one of the
other devices controlled by the remote. For
example, while using and controlling the
VCR, you may wish to change channels on
a cable box or satellite receiver without
having to change the device selected by
the CVR700 or the remote. To program
the remote for Channel Control Punch-
Through, follow these steps:
erased and will need to be reentered:
1. Press any of the Input Selector
Buttons
at the same time until the Input
and the ”O“ Button
10
2
7
1. Press the Input Selector
for
Selector Buttons
you
10
10
2
2
the device you wish to have the chan-
nel control associated with and the
pressed lights.
2. Press the ”0“ Button
three times.
14
Play Button
at the same time
25
1. Press the Input Selector Button
2
3. The LED under the Input Selector
2
until the light appears under the Input
Selector
2. Press and release the Input Selector
Button for the device that
for the device you wish to have
10
will blink three times.
10
.
10
2
the channel control associated with and
the Volume Up Button 12 at the
same time until the red light appears
Note that this may take a few minutes,
depending on how many commands are in
the memory that need to be erased.
2
10
under the Input Selector
2. Press and release the Input Selector
Button for the device that
will be used to change the channels.
The Input Selector you
.
10
2
requires the transport control. The
If the remote locks up for some reason
and you wish to reset it without losing
any programming or removing and replac-
ing the batteries, you may perform a soft
reset by removing the cover from the bat-
tery compartment and gently pressing the
small black rectangular button visible
through the opening where the battery
cover normally latches. This should return
the remote to normal operation.
Input Selector Button
you
2
10
pressed in Step 1 will blink three times
and then go out to confirm the data
entry.
10
2
10
2
pressed in Step 1 will blink three times
and then go out to confirm the data
entry.
Example: To control the transport of a
DVD player while the remote is set to
control an external TV, first press the
Aux Input Selector Button
and
2
Example: To control the channels using
your cable box or satellite receiver
while the remote is set to control the
VCR, first press the VCR Input
the Play Button at the same
25
time. Next, release them and press the
DVD Input Selector Button
NOTES:
.
2
Selector Button
Channel Up Button
and the
2
at the same
32
• To remove the Channel Control Punch-
Through and return the remote to its
original configuration, repeat the steps
in the example above. However, press
the same Input Selector in Steps 1
and 2.
time. Next, release them and press the
AUX Input Selector Button
.
2
NOTE: To remove the Channel Control
Punch-Through and return the remote to
its original configuration, repeat the steps
shown in the example above. However,
press the same Input Selector in Steps 1
and 2.
• Before programming the remote for
Volume, Channel or Transport Punch-
Through, make certain that any pro-
gramming needed for the specific TV,
CD, DVD, cable or satellite receivers has
been completed.
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CVR700R1 TV SETUP CODES
Maker (Brand) Name Code Number (3-Digit) List
AKAI
AMPRO
001 070 008
001 070 008
AMSTRAD
AOC
ANAM
001 011 103
001 011 103
045 057 103 106 122
AMARK
103 132
103 132
001 002 003 011
059
070
045
ADMIRAL
CANDLE
CAPEHART
CENTURION
CENTRONIC
CITIZEN
001 002 003 011 045 092 094 132
CLASSIC
CONCERTO
CONTEC
CORONADO
CRAIG
CROWN
CXC
045
011
041 045 051 052
132
045
045 132
045 132
CURTIS MATHES
DAEWOO
DAYTRON
DIGI LINK
DYNASTY
DYNATECH
ELECTROHOME
EMERSON
FISHER
001 011 092 132
011 022 038 045 046 094 097 105 111 118 132
011 132
073
045
063
074 132
001 010 012 033 045 052 132 141
013 033 045 058
013 033 045 058
FUNAI
FUTURETECH
GE
045
001 011 014 015 026 057 068 098 141
053
011
076
001 011 015 016 017 018 029 072 132
148
148
GRUNDIG
HALL MARK
HARMAN KARDON
HITACHI
INFINITY
INKEL
JENSEN
JC PENNEY
JVC
KAWASHO
KEC
019 148
001 011 014 015 035 092 132 145
038 040
045
045
KENWOOD
KTV
KLOSS
001 010 045 079 132
001 010 045 079 132
002 060 132
KMC
002 060 132
LG (GOLDSTAR)
LODGENET
LXI
LUXMAN
LOGIK
011 101 103 104 110 118 128 132
013 021 069 077 145 148
013 021 069 077 145 148
011 069
011 069
MAGNAVOX
MARANTZ
MATSUI
MEMOREX
METZ
001 003 011 060 061 065 118 132 145 148
001 074 148
001 074 148
011 013 069
011 013 069
MGA
001 011 033 044 050 068 074
001 011 033 044 050 068 074
001 006 008 011 033 042 044 095 100 115
093
MIDLAND
MITSUBISHI
MOTOROLA
NAD
021 031 045
NIKEI
NATIONAL
021 031 045
036
98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maker (Brand) Name Code Number (3-Digit) List
NEC
ONKING
ONWA
001 013 022 025 042 057 121 123 125
045
045
OPTONICA
ORION
PANASONIC
PENNEY
PHILCO
025 077 080 081 082 083 084
025 077 080 081 082 083 084
036 038 057 087 120 148
068
001 003 011 045 060 061 065 118 132 148
PHILIPS
001 003 011 040 060 067 088 132 145 148
001 011 024 029 031 032 086 089
011 132
011 030 059 122 132 133
011 030 059 122 132 133
038 057 087
011 025 045 048 056 062 066 118 132
001 009 011 026 029 057 071 098 133 145
PIONEER
PORTLAND
PROSCAN
PROTON
QUASAR
RADIO SHACK
RCA
REALISTIC
RUNCO
SAA
013 025 045 048 056 062 066
004 005
011 045
SSS
SAMPO
011 045
001 059 011
SAMSUNG
SANYO
SCOTT
051 092 096 104 107 011 118 128 132 145
013 027 037 041 054 058 078 091
011 033 045 132
SEARS
SHARP
011 021 026 033 058 132 145 148
006 011 020 025 028 033 034 077 099 132
SIGNATURE
SONY
069
043 055 067 075 085 116 117 130 136
003 011 033 045
103
002
001 003 011 060 061 064 065 145 148
039
057 063 077
SOUNDESIGN
SPECTRICON
SUPREMACY
SYLVANIA
SYMPHONIC
TANDY
TATUNG
TECHWOOD
TEKNIKA
TELERENT
TERA
057 063 077
011
001 003 011 033 045 069 092 094 132
069
007 011
007 011
TMK
THOMSON
TOSHIBA
TOTEVISION
UNIVERSAL
VIDEO CONCEPTS
VIDTECH
WARDS
047 049
013 021 035 042 052 063 092 102 108 109 112 113 114 119
132
014 015
008
011
011 014 015 033 061 065 132 148
001 011
011 045
YAMAHA
YORK
YUPITERU
ZENITH
ZONDA
011 045
069 070 090 094 103
069 070 090 094 103
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CVR700R1 HDTV SETUP CODES
Maker (Brand) Name Code Number (3-Digit) List
LG
960
961
957
959
958
MOTOROLA
RCA
SAMSUNG
ZENITH
100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CVR700R1 VCR SETUP CODES
Maker (Brand) Name Code Number (3-Digit) List
AIWA
AKAI
191
173 199 201 259 260 277
AMPRO
ASA
227 285
227 285
ANAM
190 221
169 195 199
285 286 288
185 190 221 286 291
AUDIO DYNAMICS
CANDLE
CANON
CITIZEN
CRAIG
285
154 196 267
CURTIS MATHES
DAEWOO
X DUAL
DYNATECH
ELECTROHOME
EMERSON
FISHER
190 221
163 165 168 220 249 253 254
169 195 199
191 208
214
174 182 186 193 201 238 263
154 167 168 191 293
FUNAI
GE
154 167 168 191 293
190 218 221 227 244 275 278
GO VIDEO
HARMAN KARDON
HITACHI
INSTANT REPLAY
JCL
JENSEN
JC PENNEY
JVC
264 268
169 200
162 191 199 218 269 281
190 221
190 199 221
190 199 221
169 170 190 196 221 238
169 190 199 203 205 210 215 262 281 283
KENWOOD
LG(GOLDSTAR)
LLOYD
171 195 199 203
169 170 177 238 243 258
170 171 191 238
170 171 191 238
LXI
MAGIN
196
MAGNAVOX
MARANTZ
MARTA
190 191 221 222 223
169 190 221 222 224
238
MATSUI
MEI
238
190
MEMOREX
MGA
MTC
154 168 171 190 191 208 227 238 266 271
200 201 214
200 201 214
MINOLTA
MITSUBISHI
MOTOROLA
MULTITECH
NAD
NATIONAL
NEC
170 177
170 176 177 200 201 204 206 214 216 282 296
172 175
191
290 291
290 291
169 195 199 203
NORDMENDE
OPTIMUS
OPTONICA
PANASONIC
PENTAX
199
159
208 209
164 187 188 221 265 276
170 177 190 218 221
190 191 221 222
PHILCO
PHILIPS
PILOT
190 191 209 221 222 226 238
238
PIONEER
PROSCAN
PULSAR
QUARTZ
QUASAR
RADIO SHACK
RCA
170 178 203
180 181
227
171
190 221 230 276 295
153 158 159 160 161 258 285 288 291
157 164 170 177 218 244 275 276 278
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maker (Brand) Name Code Number (3-Digit) List
REALISTIC
RUNCO
RICO
153 154 160 168 171 208 209 238 288 293
213 279
213 279
SALORA
SAMSUNG
SANSUI
171
184 189 196 239 241 244 249 256 257 260
179 199 203 267
154 165 168 171 266
SANYO
SCOTT
SEARS
174 249 263
154 167 168 170 171 177 221 228 238 293
SHARP
SONY
156 209 221 280
154 166 167 207 211 212 213 231 232 233
SOUNDESIGN
STS
SYLVANIA
SYMPHONIC
TANDY
191
170
190 191 214 221 222
191
168 191
TASHICO
TATUNG
TEAC
TECHNICS
TEKNIKA
THOMAS
TMK
285
195 199
191 195 199
190 221
190 191 221 238
191
191
TOSHIBA
TOTEVISION
UNITECH
VECTOR RESEARCH
VICTOR
VIDEOSONIC
VIDEO CONCEPTS
WARDS
155 170 198 202 214 236 249 263 293
196 238
196
169
203
196
169 191 201
154 170 174 190 191 196 208 209 263
169 191 195 199
YAMAHA
ZENITH
183 191 203 211 213 227 234 238
102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CVR700R1 CD SETUP CODES
Maker (Brand) Name Code Number (3-Digit) List
ADCOM
AIWA
804 818 824
827 866 873 911 925
AKAI
805 939
880
776
808
AUDIOACCESS
AUDIOFILE
AUDIO TECHNICA
BSR
799
CALIFORNIA AUDIO
CARVER
CROWN
770 864
812 891 895 896 898 899 900 940 941
797
DENON
EMERSON
FISHER
782 942 943
804 807
778 810 812 823
FUNAI
HARMAN KARDON
HITACHI
881
756 780 795 806 809 821 825 831 835 838 842 843 848 850 851 945
804
JENSEN
JVC
908
931 950 951
KENWOOD
LG(GOLDSTAR)
LUXMAN
MAGNAVOX
MARANTZ
MCINTOSH
MGA
MITSUBISHI
MITSUMI
NAD
769 778 785 817 833 834 903 906 931 933
771
773 790 832 857
794 868
798 813 839 946 947 948
949
787
787
907
768 829 952 953
NAKAMICHI
NEC
NIKKO
757 954 955
824
808 810
ONKYO
759 760 792 793 800 801 926 930
775 781 791 820 844 845 846 847 859
761 770 830 864 874 913 938
767 794 893 904
OPTIMUS
PANASONIC
PHILIPS
PIONEER
PROTON
QUASAR
RADIO SHACK
RCA
784 855 867 878 886 915 916 917
772
770 864
782 881
779 804 836 905
REALISTIC
SAMSUNG
SANSUI
SANYO
SHARP
SHERWOOD
SONY
SOUNDSTREAM
SYMPHONIC
TEAC
THETA DIGITAL
TOSHIBA
YAMAHA
812 813 859 860
783
802 836 889 912 927
788 812 823 837 923
775 813 828 860 869 906 914 922 935 936
758 796 813 860 888
765 781 815 858 870 871 873 887 894 918
879
814 865
766 803 813 841 861 862 865 876 892 901
794
768 829 852 906 910 928
774 786 808 816 890
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CVR700R1 CDR SETUP CODES
Maker (Brand) Name Code Number (3-Digit) List
BANG OLUFSEN
DENON
HARMAN KARDON
KENWOOD
PHILIPS
257
261
262
260
259
258
SONY
CVR700R1 DVD SETUP CODES
Maker (Brand) Name Code Number (3-Digit) List
APEX DIGITAL
BRAVO
CALIFORNIA AUDIO
DENON
715 730
734 735
694
656 673 676 688 705
DVD VIDEO
GE
HARMAN KARDON
JBL
728
657 658
655 686 720
655
JVC
KENWOOD
KLH
660
661 704 723
722
LG(GOLDSTAR)
MAGNAVOX
MARANTZ
MITSUBISHI
NAD
659 709 718 724 737
687 710
687 713
677 690
664 716
ONKYO
663 669 702
OPTIMUS
PANASONIC
PHILIPS
PIONEER
PROCEED
PROSCAN
RCA
665 704
678 679 684 688 689 698 706 732
687 710
664 666 674 692 695 700 719
714
657 658 691
657 658 672 691
681
RUNCO
SAMSUNG
SANYO
SHARP
685 707 708 733
667 703
675 682 704 727
669 683 697 699 721 729
680
SONY
TECHNICS
THOMSON
TOSHIBA
YAMAHA
ZENITH
657 658
663 664 687 711 712 731
670 671 684 717
659 687 693 709 718 736
104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CVR700R1 DVD-R SETUP CODES
Maker (Brand) Name Code Number (3-Digit) List
BROKSONIC
CYBER HOME
GO VIDEO
JVC
017
020
014
012
LITE ON
021
MAGNAVOX
PANASONIC
PHILIPS
PIONEER
RCA
016
005 006 007 008 009
016
004 015
019
SAMSUNG
SANSUI
SONY
TOSHIBA
ZENITH
013
017
001 002 003
010 011 018
014
CVR700R1 D-VHS SETUP CODES
Maker (Brand) Name Code Number (3-Digit) List
JVC
MITSUBISHI
602
601
CVR700R1 GAME SETUP CODES
Maker (Brand) Name Code Number (3-Digit) List
SONY PLAYSTATION2
MICROSOFT X BOX
002
001
CVR700R1 CAMCORDER SETUP CODES
Maker (Brand) Name Code Number (3-Digit) List
CANON
JVC
PANASONIC
SAMSUNG
SONY
265 266
262
263
257 258
259 260 261
264
SHARP
CVR700R1 TIVO SETUP CODES
Maker (Brand) Name Code Number (3-Digit) List
DIRECTV
PIONEER
518
513
SERIES 2 DVR
TOSHIBA
OTHER TIVO
514 521
515
517 519 520
CVR700R1 PVR (DVR) SETUP CODES
Maker (Brand) Name Code Number (3-Digit) List
DAEWOO
ECHOSTAR
EXPRESSVU
HUGHES
HYUNDAI
KEEN
769 772
782 783 784
782
785 795
786
777
PANASONIC
PHILIPS
778 791
779 785 792 795
PROSCAN
RCA
REPLAY TV
SONIC BLUE
SONY
787
787 795
776 778 780 793 794
778 780
775 781 788 789 790 791 792
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CVR700R1 CABLE SETUP CODES
Maker (Brand) Name Code Number (3-Digit) List
ABC
303 305 313 347 350 354 361 412
413
369
323
ALLEGRO
AMERICAST
ANTRONIX
ARCHER
314 316 323 333 414
BELCOR
415
335 415
394
316
CABLE STAR
CENTURION
CENTURY
CITIZEN
316 413
COLOUR VOICE
COMBANO
COMTRONICS
DIAMOND
DIGI
371 392
385 386
328 339
332
416
EAGLE
329 339 348 488
EASTERN
ELECTRICORD
EMERSON
FOCUS
GC ELETRONICS
GE
365 368 372 417
341
414
418
415
378
GEMINI
GENERAL
317 331 334 362
312
GENERAL INSTRUMENT 470
GOLDEN CHANNEL
GOODMIND
G I
339
414
303 305 313 317 319 394 395 398 399
309 310 357 358 363 394 401 403 419 477
HAMLIN
HITACHI
HOSPITALITY
JASCO
303 363 490
376 382
413
JERROLD
LINDSAY
MACOM
303 304 305 313 318 375 395 397 398 399
420
342 493
MAGNAVOX
MEMOREX
MOTOROLA
MOVIE TIME
M NET
319 321 370 384
360
470
337 341
345
NSC
324 337 346 377 492
OAK
PACE
325 340 345 361 396 498 499
481
PANASONIC
PANTHER
PARAGON
PHILIPS
352 355 380 478 479 491
416
360
315 321 322 329 371 387 392
303 311 343 359 421 473 502
PIONEER
POPULAR MECHANICS
POST NEWS WEEK
PRELUDE
PRIMESTAR
PTS
418
325
422
464
320 356 377 378
360
PULSAR
RADIO SHACK
RCA
RECOTON
REGAL
379 413 414
355 380
418
309 357 358 363 401 402 403
REGENCY
REMBRANT
365 417
334
106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maker (Brand) Name Code Number (3-Digit) List
SAMSUNG
SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA
339 374 488
305 306 307 349 350 351 353 354 381 393 404 405 406 407 408 410 411 428 430 431
432 485 486
423
SEAM
SHERITECH
SIGNAL
SIGNATURE
SL MARX
SONY
331
339
303 490
339
429
SPRUCER
STARCOM
STARGATE
SYLVANIA
TADIRAN
TANDY
TELECAPATION
TEXSCAN
TFC
355 383 479 491
304 313 317 318 465
317 339 422
373
339
326
330
338 373
424
TIMELESS
TOCOM
TOSHIBA
UNIKA
425
308 347 348 364 472
360
316 323 333
UNITED CABLE
UNIVERSAL
VIDEOWAY
VIEWSTAR
ZENITH
313 361
314 316 323 333 335 336 341 344 415
366 426
321 324 327 388 389 390 391 492
360 366 367 400 427
418
ZENTEK
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CVR700R1 SATELLITE SETUP CODES
Maker (Brand) Name Code Number (3-Digit) List
ALPHASTAR
ALPHASTAR DBS
ALPHASTAR DSR
AMPLICA
561
653
625 645
559
BIRDVIEW
617 628
BSR
562
562
CAPETRONICS
CHANNEL MASTER
CHAPARRAL
CITOH
523 524 525 528 564
508 518 519 522 583
563
CURTIS MATHES
DRAKE
DX ANTENNA
ECHOSTAR
559
515 520 521 604 616
534 555 565 582 605
509 510 543 567 598 599 600 601 609 614 630
ELECTRO HOME
EUROPLUS
FUJITSU
595
618
527 531 532 537
GENERAL INSTRUMENT 506 511 514 526 548 568 575 606
HITACHI DBS
HOUSTON TRACKER
HUGHES
512
543
619
562
HYTEK
JANIEL
JERROLD
569
511 545 548 570
KATHREIN
LEGEND
LG
613
510
646
LUXOR
MACOM
571
520 568 572 573 574
MAGNAVOX
MEMOREX
NEXTWAVE
NORSAT
540 566
510
510 627
576 577
OPTIMUS
547
PANASONIC
PANASONIC DBS
PANSAT
PERSONAL CABLE
PHILIPS
549 569
513
623
621
578
PICO
610
529 607
PRESIDENT
PRIMESTAR
RCA
511 545 579 615
504 546 611 624 631 639 642
RCA DSS
516
REALISTIC
SAMSUNG
SATELLITE SERVICE CO
SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA
SONY
552 580 603
507 625 645
538 544 556 591
542
608 620 632
STARCAST
STAR CHOICE DBS
SUPER GUIDE
TEECOM
TOSHIBA
UNIDEN
550
517
530 626 627
533 536 581 593 594 596 612
505 539 540 541 560 629
526 535 539 554 557 584 585 602 604 606
588 589 590 597 622
ZENITH
108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
SYMPTOM
POSSIBLE CAUSE
SOLUTION
Unit does not turn on
• Main Power Switch turned off
• No AC power
• Press in Main Power Switch
0.
• Check AC power plug and make certain
any switched outlet is turned on.
• Press the Standby Switch at least
4 seconds after the unit has been
• Standby pressed within 4 seconds
after Main Power Switch
turned on by the Main Power Switch
0.
Disc does not play
• Disc loaded improperly
• Incorrect disc type
• Load disc label-side up; align the disc
with the guides and place it in its
proper position.
• Check to see that disc is CD, CD-R,
CD-RW, VCD, SVCD, MP3, WMA, Photo CD,
DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW
(standard conforming), DVD-Video
or DVD-Audio; other types will not play.
• Make sure disc’s Region Code matches
code shown on rear panel of unit.
• Enter password to override or change
rating settings (see page 54).
• Invalid Region Code
• Rating is above parental preset
No picture
• Intermittent connections
• Wrong input
• Progressive Scan output selected
• Check all video connections.
• Check input selection of TV or receiver.
• Use Progressive Scan mode only with
compatible TV.
• Video Off feature active
• Press Screen Standby Button
Y
19
to reactivate video circuitry (see page 71).
• Make sure to obtain the most recent
software update for the source unit.
• Incompatibility between DVI (HDCP)
source unit and CVR700
• Port needs to be reset
• Sometimes it helps to simply turn off the
CVR700 using the Main Power On/Off
Switch 0, turn off the master power switch
on the CVPD50 (depressed towards rear of
unit), unplug the JBL Digital Link cable and
unplug the AC power cords from both units.
Then follow these steps in reverse order, and
often the unit will function normally.
• LED on CVPD50 flashing yellow and red • Check AC power cord connections at wall
and unit. Check CVPD50 power switch
(should be depressed toward rear of unit).
See note on page 45.
“Snowy” picture when used with
external DVI (HDCP) DVD player
• Copy protection communication
between the source unit and the
CVR700 was unsuccessful
• Reset the connection by switching sources
on the CVR700, or by stopping and
restarting the DVD.
No sound
• Intermittent connections
• Incorrect digital audio selection
• DVD disc is in fast or slow mode
• Check all audio connections.
• Check digital audio settings.
• There is no audio playback on DVD discs
during fast or slow modes.
• Surround receiver not compatible
with 96kHz PCM audio
• Use analog audio outputs.
Picture is distorted or jumps during
fast forward or reverse play
• MPEG-2 decoding
• It is a normal artifact of DVD playback
for pictures to jump or show some
distortion during rapid play.
Some remote buttons do not operate
during DVD play; prohibited
• Function not permitted at this time
• With most DVDs, some functions are
not permitted at certain times (e.g.,
Track Skip) or at all (e.g., direct audio
track selection).
symbol
appears (see below)
109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SYMPTOM
POSSIBLE CAUSE
SOLUTION
The Feature Not Available
message appears
• Requested function not available at
this time
• Certain functions may be disabled by
the DVD itself during passages of a disc.
Picture is displayed in the
wrong aspect ratio
• Incorrect match of aspect ratio
settings disc or video signal
• Change aspect ratio settings (see pages 13
and 27) using the Frame Button `
or
24
Letterbox Button z
.
16
Remote control inoperative
Disc will not copy to VCR
• Weak batteries
• Sensor is blocked
• Change both batteries.
• Clear path to sensor or use optional
outboard remote sensor.
• Copy protection
• Many DVDs are encoded to prevent copying
to VCR.
To clear the CVR700’s entire system
memory including tuner presets, output
level settings, delay times and speaker
configuration data, press the Main
If the system is still operating incorrectly,
there may have been an electronic dis-
charge or severe AC line interference that
has corrupted the memory or micro-
processor. If these steps do not solve the
problem, consult your custom installer or
an authorized JBL service center.
System Reset
In the rare case in which the unit’s opera-
tion or the displays seem abnormal, the
cause may involve the erratic operation
of the system’s memory or microproces-
sor. To correct this problem, first try turn-
ing off the master power switch on the
underside of the CVPD50 (depressed
toward the front of the unit) and unplug-
ging the JBL Digital Link cable, and the
power cords for both the CVR700 and the
CVPD50 and wait at least 3 minutes.
After the pause, reconnect the AC power
cords and the JBL Digital Link, turn the
CVPD50’s master power switch to the On
position (depressed toward the rear of
the unit) and check the system’s opera-
tion. If the system still malfunctions, a
system reset may clear the problem.
Power On/Off Button
units in Standby mode, and then press
and hold the Mute Button for
0
to place both
q
11
5 seconds. The unit’s software version
number will flash in the Information
Display Ôas an indication that the unit
has been successfully reset.
NOTE: Resetting the processor will erase
any configuration settings you have made
for speakers, output levels, surround
modes and digital input assignments, as
well as the tuner presets. The unit will be
returned to the factory presets, and all
settings for these items must be reen-
tered.
110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
JBL CINEMA VISION TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CVPD50 Display
Size/Diagonal
50" (1270 mm); 16:9 Widescreen format
Displayable Picture Size (W x H):
Resolution:
Viewing Angle:
43-1/2" x 24-1/2" (932mm x 532mm)
1366 x 768 pixels
<160˚
Contrast Ratio:
Brightness:
3,000:1
1,000 cdl/m
2
Storage Temperature:
Operating Temperature:
Maximum Usable Altitude:
Power Requirements:
Dimensions (W x H x D):
Display Screen:
Display Screen With Credenza Stand: 48-3/4" x 37-3/8" x 10" (124cm x 95cm x 25cm)
Net Weight:
Display Screen:
–15˚C to +60˚C
+5˚C to 35˚C
6,560 ft. (2,000 meters)
120V AC, 60Hz, 450W maximum, 1W standby
48-3/4" x 29-3/4" x 3-1/2" (4" with wall bracket) (124cm x 76cm x 9cm)
97 lb (44kg)
Display Screen With Credenza Stand: 110 lb (50kg)
CVR7007.1-Channel A/V Receiver/Optical Disc Changer/Video Processor
Optical Disc Player Section:
Applicable disc sizes:
Applicable disc formats:
Video:
5" (12cm) or 3" (8cm)
DVD-Video, DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW, Video-CD (VCD)
Audio:
DVD-Audio, CD, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, Windows Media 9, Dolby Digital and DTS Audio Discs
Still Image:
JPEG, Kodak Picture CD
NTSC
1V p-p/75 ohms, sync negative polarity
Video Signal System:
Composite (CVBS) Video Output:
S-Video (Y/C) Output:
Y/Luminance:
1V p-p/75 ohms, sync negative polarity
0.286V p-p
C/Chrominance:
Component (Y/Pb/Pr or YUV) Video Output:
Y:
1V p-p/75 ohms, sync negative polarity
0.7V p-p/75 ohms
Pb (U):
Pr (V):
0.7V p-p/75 ohms
Video Digital-to-Analog Converters:
Audio Signal-to-Noise Ratio:
Audio Dynamic Range:
Audio Digital-to-Analog Converters:
27MHz/10-bit
105dBA
96dB (16-bit), 100dB (18-bit), 105dB (20-bit)
192kHz/24-bit
Audio Processing Section:
Surround modes:
Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Digital, Dolby Pro Logic II, Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Pro Logic,
DTS ES 6.1 Matrix and Discrete, DTS 5.1, DTS 96/24, DTS Neo:6, Logic 7 with 96kHz capability,
3 DSP Modes
Bass management for DVD-Video and DVD-Audio
Inputs:
Composite (CVBS) Video:
S-Video (Y/C):
Front Panel: 1, Rear Panel: 4
Front Panel: 1, Rear Panel: 4
Front Panel: 1, Rear Panel: 2
Rear Panel: 1
Component (Y/Pb/Pr or YUV):
DVI (HDCP)/Analog RGB:
PIP Composite (CVBS):
Analog Audio L/R:
Digital Audio Coaxial:
Digital Audio Optical:
IR:
Rear Panel: 1
Front Panel: 1, Rear Panel: 5
Front Panel: 1, Rear Panel: 4
Front Panel: 1, Rear Panel: 4
Rear Panel: 1
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outputs:
Composite (CVBS) Video:
S-Video (Y/C):
Rear Panel: 2
Rear Panel: 2
Component (Y/Pb/Pr or YUV):
Analog Audio L/R:
Digital Audio Coaxial:
Digital Audio Optical:
Headphone:
Rear Panel: 1 (Monitor Out)
Rear Panel: 2
Rear Panel: 1
Front Panel: 1, Rear Panel: 1
Front Panel: 1
LFE/Subwoofer:
Rear Panel: 1
Speaker Level Outputs:
IR:
7 pairs (Rear Panel)
Rear Panel: 1
Audio Section:
Amplifier Type
Advanced PWM
Two Channel Stereo Mode:
100 Watts per channel continuous RMS power into CVSAT50 speakers,
90Hz to 20kHz, @<0.15%
Five and Seven Channel Cinema Modes:
100 Watts per channel continuous RMS power into CVSAT50 and CVCEN50 speakers,
90Hz to 20kHz, @<0.15%
Input Sensitivity/Impedance:
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:
200mV/47k ohms
97dBA
FM Tuner Section:
Frequency Range:
87.5 – 108MHz
IHF 1.3µV/13.2dBf
70/68dB
Usable Sensitivity:
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (Mono/Stereo):
Distortion (Mono/Stereo):
Stereo Separation:
Selectivity:
0.2/0.3%
40dB @ 1kHz
+/–400kHz, 70dB
80dB
Image Rejection:
IF Rejection:
90dB
AM Tuner Section:
Frequency Range:
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:
Usable Sensitivity:
Distortion:
520–1720kHz
45dB
Loop 500µV
1kHz, 50% modulation, 0.8%
+/–10kHz, 30dB
Selectivity:
Video Section:
Television Format:
NTSC
Input Level/Impedance:
Output Level/Impedance:
Video Frequency Response:
Composite and S-video:
Component video:
1V p-p/75 ohms
1V p-p/75 ohms
10Hz – 8MHz (–3dB)
10Hz – 100MHz (–3dB)
General:
Power requirement:
Power Consumption:
Dimensions (W x H x D):
Net Weight:
120V AC, 60Hz
320W maximum, 78W idle, 10W standby
17-3/8" x 6-3/5" x 17-3/4" (441mm x 168mm x 451mm)
24 lb (11kg)
112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
4.3 Scaling 58
5-Channel Stereo 30, 34, 62
7-Channel Stereo 62
AC Power Connections 45, 59
Advanced Settings 52–53, 57–58
Advanced Settings Menus 52, 57
Antenna Terminals 23, 43
Aspect Ratio 13, 19, 27–28, 34–36, 54,
57–58
Installation Location 7–8, 39–40,
42–43
Installing CVPD50 39–41
IR Receiver 18, 31, 37–38
JBL On Screen Library 29, 37, 67–68
JPEG 12, 14, 73
Letterbox 13, 27, 34, 57-58
Lip Sync 53
Loading Discs 66
Screen Standby 29, 35, 40–41, 71
Secondary Remote Control 32–38,
92–108
Setting Preset Stations 64
Sleep Mode 16, 29, 59
Source Configuration 46–48
Source Selection 18, 25, 33, 46, 59
Speaker Configuration and Bass
Manager Menu 48
Audio Equipment Connections 21–23,
43–44
Audio Mode Menus 46–47
Audio Surround Mode Chart 62
Auto Mode Tuning 16–17, 26–27, 29,
34, 36, 64
Auto Search Method 77, 92
Auxiliary Input 22, 44, 76
Bass Management 48–50
Burn-in 28, 35, 40–41
Cable Television 4, 21, 43, 76, 106-107
CD 12, 71, 103
Logic 7 25, 34, 47, 60, 62
Macros 80–83
Main Menu 45
Main Remote Control 24-31, 76–91
Manual Mode Tuning 16–17, 26–27,
29, 34, 36, 64
Memory Backup 65
MP3 12, 14, 63, 66–69, 72-73
Mute 31, 33, 59
Night Mode 29, 34, 47, 63
On-Screen Display 45, 53, 55
Operation 59–75
Speaker Crossovers 49
Speaker Crossovers Menu 49
Speaker Distances Menu 50
Speaker Levels Menu 51
Speaker Menu 48
Speaker Placement 42–43
Speakers Polarity 42
Speaker Setup 48–51
Speaker Sizes 48–50
Speaker Wire 42
Speaker/Channel Input Indicators 19,
61
Channel-Control Punch-Through 83, 95
Cleaning and Maintenance 7
Coaxial Digital Audio Jacks 17, 22, 26,
37, 43–44, 46, 61
Component Video 13–14, 22, 47, 54
Composite Video 21-22, 47, 56
Credenza Stand 39–40
Delay Settings 30, 37, 50
Description and Features 5
Digital Audio Playback 60–64,
Digital Recorder 21, 22, 23, 44, 59, 64,
76, 104, 105
Digital Source Selection 46, 61
Dimming Front-Panel Display 52
Direct Code Entry 92
Optical Digital Audio Jacks 17, 22–23,
26, 37, 43–44, 46, 61
OSD Time-Out 53
Output Level Adjustments 50–52
Output Level Trim Adjustment 64–65
PCM 61
Picture-in-Picture (PIP) 22, 29, 35,
55, 56
Picture Settings 56–57
Picture Settings Menu 56
Power Switches 16, 25, 33, 37, 45, 59
Preset Stations 16, 17, 26, 30, 37, 64
Processor Reset 110
Programmed Device Functions 88-91,
94, 96–97
Programmed Play 75
Programming Product Codes 76–78,
92–93
SPL Selector 25, 51, 84–85
Subwoofer 21, 42–43
Surround Mode Selection 18, 25, 30,
31, 34, 46–47, 60–63
Surround Off 30, 34, 62
S-Video 21–22, 47, 56
System Configuration 45–58
System Menu 46
Technical Specifications 111-112
Theater 25, 34, 62
Tone Controls 26, 37, 59
Trademark Acknowledgements 114
Transport Controls 17, 26, 27, 28, 29,
30, 34, 35, 36, 37, 67, 68
Transport-Control Punch-Through 84, 95
Troubleshooting Guide 109–110
Tuner Mode 16–17, 26–27, 29, 34,
36, 64
Display Settings 57
Display Settings Menu 57
Distances 30, 37, 50
Dolby Digital 31, 34, 47, 60, 62
Dolby Pro Logic 31, 34, 47, 62
DSP Surround Modes 25, 34, 62
DTS 31, 34, 60–61, 62
DTS Neo:6 31, 34, 62
DTS-ES 62
DVI 22–23, 44, 45, 55–56, 76,
DVD 12, 13–15, 16, 46–47, 53–55, 57,
60–63, 66–69, 70
DVD-Audio 2, 19, 25, 46, 54, 60, 66, 70
DVD Auto Picture Resize 57–58
DVD Setup 53–55,
Progressive Scan 14–15
Punch-Through Programming 83–84,
94–95
Random Play 27, 68–69,
Rear-Panel Connections 20–23
Recalling Preset Stations 16, 17, 26,
30, 37, 64
Tuner Operation 64
Turn-On Volume Level 52–53
TV 98-99
Typographical Conventions 3
Unpacking 7–9
VCR 21, 44, 76, 101–102
Video Equipment Connections 21–23,
43–44
Recording 64
Remote Controls 24–38, 76–108
Remote Control Batteries 45
Remote Control Function Lists 89–91,
96–97
Video Monitor 22, 54
Video Off 29, 35, 40–41, 71
Volume Control 18, 26, 34, 52–53, 59
Volume Default 52–53
EzSet 25, 31, 51, 84–85
Fan 21, 53
Remote Control Setup Code Tables
98–108
Repeat A-B 28
Volume Punch-Through 83, 94
WMA 12, 15, 63, 66–69, 72–73
Frame 13, 28, 35, 57–58
Front-Panel Controls 16–18
Front-Panel Information Display 19
Front-Panel Jacks 17, 59
Front-Panel-Display Brightness 52
Hall 25, 34, 62
Repeat Play 28, 69
Resetting the Remotes 87, 95
Resume Mode 15, 68
Safety Information 4, 7–9
Satellite Television 21, 22, 43–44, 76,
108
Headphones 18, 60
HDTV 14
Installation 39–44
Screen Menu 55
Screen Saver 28, 34–35, 40–41
Screen Setup 30, 55–58
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Depth measurement includes knobs and connectors.
Height measurement includes feet and chassis.
All specifications subject to change without notice.
JBL and Logic 7 are registered trademarks, and JBL Cinema Vision, JBL Digital Link and On Screen Library (patent pending) are
trademarks, of Harman International Industries, Incorporated.
* “Dolby”, “Pro Logic” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Confidential Unpublished Works.
Confidential 1992–1997 Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved.
DTS, DTS 96/24, DTE-ES and DTS Neo:6 are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
Microsoft, Windows and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States
and/or other countries.
Kodak is a trademark of Eastman Kodak Company.
TiVo is a trademark of TiVo Inc.
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other
intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must
be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by
Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTES
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
JBL Consumer Products
250 Crossways Park Drive, Woodbury
New York 11797 USA
www.jbl.com
2004 Harman International Industries,
©
Incorporated
Part No. CQX1A9142 12/04
A Harman International Company
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
Insignia Flat Panel Television NS LCD19 09 User Manual
ION Stereo System PROFILE LP User Manual
Jackson Dishwasher JV 24 B BF User Manual
JVC Car Video System LVT1484 001B User Manual
JVC Printer CU VD50AA User Manual
Kensington Camcorder Accessories K33928 User Manual
Kicker Speaker OC10 User Manual
KitchenAid Cooktop KGCV566R User Manual
KitchenAid Washer KAWE767B User Manual
Konica Minolta Printer 5440 DL User Manual